Quantcast
Channel: read my mind
Viewing all 3271 articles
Browse latest View live

What Do You Know About the House of Orange?

$
0
0
*******
Nason, Pieter (attributed_to) Four generations Princes of Orange
William I, Maurice and Frederick Henry, William II, William III - 1662-1666
*******
Transcript
The German Philosopher Johann Von Goethe, once said, there are none more hopelessly enslaved, than those who falsely believe they are free.
But few who hear the words realize that they are the ones to whom Goethe was referring for the reality is that every person in the civilized world is enslaved from childhood. They are enslaved in a prison without walls or bars and so few ever even realize it but all are enslaved none the less. And what the people of the world are enslaved to, is a system of perpetual self generating debt that is created for them wholly by design by private international banking interests, and the people are taught from an early age to just accept this debt, because this is 'just the way things are' but the real reality is that it is not just the way things are, but more the way things have been designed and all one has to do is glance around them at the state of the world today to realise that though this is the way things current are, it is most definitely not the way things should be.
The most powerful and useful tool a person can ever gain in their life is knowledge for with knowledge comes wisdom and a deeper understanding and real truth can be exhilarating because real truth will set you free.
Now whether you believe in the Illuminati or not, whether you will take the time to listen to so called conspiracy theories or not, there are some things that should be clearly understood by all and these are not conspiracy theories by any stretch of the imagination, they are well documented, quite traceable and very provable facts and these facts are as follows.
There is one ruling bloodline that exists on this earth. This ruling Bloodline is very old. It is the same bloodline that has always ruled the earth ever since the days of ancient Egypt and it is very pervasive. For example: many people think that anyone can get to be President of the United States, but the reality is, that all US presidents have been freemasons, a large number of them are in fact related, and that their lineage can be traced back to European Monarchy and in particular to the line of William of Orange. This elite Bloodline can actually be traced back a good deal further than of William of Orange and can even back as far as the royalty of ancient Egypt. It is this very same bloodline that has ruled the earth ever since and to which the British Monarchy and the current US president can both be ultimately traced. Many people may surprised to learn That US President George W Bush is in fact the 13th cousin of Queen Elizabeth the second, the current British Monarch.
Reverence for the royal bloodline and worship of Amen Ra is still carried out in the world today though it is veiled and secretive but the symbolism remains true, as always, hidden in plain view. Adherence to such traditions is why each of the 3 city states of London, Vatican and the District of Columbia all have their own obelisks. The London Obelisk is also accompanied by 2 sphinx wrought in the image of Thutmoses indicating that it is in London that the royal bloodline actually resides. The fact that out of all the Pharo's to choose from, the London sphinx depicts Thutmoses, is actually very telling indeed for a number of reasons but that is another tale.
The British Monarchy is steeped in ancient traditions and symbolism and they do not attempt to hide these connections, they just don't mention them or answer questions about them, but the signs and symbols are right there for discerning eyes to clearly see, again and as always, hidden in plain view. Just a look at the Royal Coat of Arms, the Royal Regalia and the Coronation Throne clearly demonstrates these connections. The evidence linking that these rulers to the one bloodline is does exist and all the information to verify these claims is available within the public domain. It is up to each of you to connect the dots yourself.
More importantly however is the fact that Over the last 200 odd years there has developed behind this ruling bloodline, another elite class, somewhat similar to a priesthood, that remains hidden in the shadows. This shadowy priesthood, is the money changers. The international banking elite, consisting of 13 very influential families and it is this shadowy elite who ultimately controls things from behind the scenes. This control is achieved through covert manipulation of the global money systems, and maintained through an intricate web of interconnected secret societies, through which control over the flow of all money, all resources, all food, and most importantly, all information, through manipulation of the worlds educational institutions and corporate media, is also achieved. Many of these smaller secret societies, are completely oblivious to the existence of the others, but all lead back to a round table of six, and ultimately, to just one at the very top, that is populated by a virtual handful of individuals. It is this handful of very powerful men that controls all the other societies, and through them the heartbeat of the entire world.
The society that sits at the very top, was founded on Knights Templar traditions in Bavaria in 1776 by a man called Adam Weishaupt, and this is the order of the illuminati. The man who commissioned Weishaupt for the task was Mayer Amschel Rothschild, and it was done in order to carry out a plan conceived by Rothschild and the heads of 12 other families at a secret meeting that took place in 1773. These families included the Warburgs, the Schiffs and the Oppenheimers. The Illuminati has since become the most powerful society in the world, and in the last 230 years, it has been instrumental in helping the Rothschild family accumulate over one half of the worlds total wealth, at the cost of quite literally, millions of innocent lives. The horded wealth of this one family alone, could comfortably feed, clothe, and house, every man, woman, and child on earth. And this just one of the 13 illuminati families.
The goal of the illuminati has always been a simple one and that is to achieve, by whatever means possible, total ownership and control, over no less than every resource, every government, every rock, every drop of water, every blade of grass, and every living creature, both human, and non human, in the entire world and since its inception, for over 230 years, the order of the illuminati has been tirelessly, relentlessly, and unfalteringly, steering its members towards the achievement of that one ultimate goal. Through secrecy, they have so far been extremely successful in their endeavors, in fact so much so, that we are, right now, living in the time when they intend to see this long spanned work come to fruition. The situation we are witnessing in our world, right now, is in fact the final endgame of the illuminati. This is their big grab for ultimate power and mass de-population.
Some people claim that the Illuminati is a myth and that what is really to blame are organizations such as Zionism but I assure you that such is not the case. It goes far deeper than Zionism and such people have simply limited the scope of their vision. They have looked to an answer that supports their beliefs and have refused to delve any deeper. They are not seeing the Bigger picture. Greek Philosopher Socrates once said that true wisdom is knowing how little we actually know and he was absolutely correct and this is why is important to keep an open mind and allow your beliefs to be flexible enough to change as new knowledge is acquired. And it is important to listen to all the information and not just that which reinforces your beliefs because this conspiracy goes very deep and Zionism and the Jewish influence over the money system is merely one layer of it - and it goes still deeper than even the illuminati. Those whom we know as the illuminati are merely the shadowy controllers.
The plan that is unfolding in the world today is indeed an old one, and it is a plan that is very complex, but not so with the system of control that is in place to blind the people to its existence. This system of control just appears to be complex, but in reality, it isn't. In reality, its very simple, and very fragile, however it is its apparent complexity, that has kept it so well veiled, and it has also been kept very well hidden by constructing a conspiracy culture to breed around it, and by then promoting an air of endless ridicule towards such concepts. Indeed, the creation and proliferation of such a culture, and the promotion of constant ridicule towards it, has been one of the illuminati's most valuable assets in obscuring the reality of the society's existence.
The entire Illuminati system is today operated by the crown, and what is the crown exactly? Well contrary to popular belief the crown does not refer to the Royal family or to the British monarchy but to the Inner city of London which, in actual fact, is a privately owned corporation that functions as a completely separate sovereign state, outside the Jurisdiction of England, the same as its two sister city states of Vatican and Washington's District of Columbia, all of which combine to form the Empire of the three cities. Most people are completely unaware that when they swear allegiance to the crown they are actually swearing allegiance to this a private Corporate Empire owned by the 13 Illuminati families. These are the same private individuals who also indirectly own and operate the world bank - and what does the world bank do exactly? Well apart from other things, like control global oil prices, it lends money to whole countries by supplying each countries Federal Reserve Bank and then it collects interest on these loans which is paid by taxing the the labor of the people of each country.
Now let me just run that by you again so you clearly understand how this really works.
If you live in a country that has a federal reserve bank, then the world bank, a privately run company that is able to legally create money from thin air, is who supplies your country with money, at interest, and you the individual is required to pay a tax on your labor to pay off the interest on the governments loan from this private bank. Many people are duped into believing that their taxes pay for infrastructure and without taxes their would be no roads or schools and the country would fall apart, but this is completely untrue. The Government has the legal right to coin its own money and control its value but it does not, it borrows money from a private bank and uses this bank loan to pay for infrastructure and you are taxed in order to pay of the interest on the loan, interest, which from a business perspective, is pure profit for the international banksters.
How ever you choose to look at it one thing must be very clearly understood and that is that each person in the western world who has a job, is forced every year, to give away approximately 3 months worth of wages in taxes and that tax money goes directly into the pockets of the private individuals who own and run the world bank.
Its one big, privately run scam and if you ever allow yourself to be microchipped and cash money is abolished altogether, which is their plan, then all bills and all taxes will be automatically removed from your account when they are due, whether you actually owe the money or not, and if you complain about the system, well they can simply turn off your chip. Since all commerce will center around the chip, you will not be able to buy food, or pay rent or do anything and there will be absolutely nothing whatsoever that you can do about it. And that is their goal - to limit the size of the population on earth and microchip those that are left. Then its game set and match and total control of the world and everyone in it will be in the hands of an international cartel of criminal banksters.
This whole scam is being planned and carried out very methodically. It is these people and their minions and puppets who attend such gatherings as Bilderberg meetings and the Bohemian Grove summer festival and who still adhere closely to the schools of ancient mystery which many such as the late Bill Cooper have referred to as the Ancient Mystery Religion however it is more a mechanism of control designed to reach an ultimate goal rather than a religion.
Though steeped in ritual and what many would term 'black magic', It is simply a system, the illuminati system and though its workings seem complex to the layman, In reality its quite simple, and its also very easy to see, once one has acquired the correct manner of looking at things. And there is definite purpose and reason in the ritualistic nature of this system, in its use of numerology, symbolism and ritual, and all that is needed to realize this is a deeper understanding of the true nature of the Universe and how we are all connected to it however this film directs its focus on the system itself and the key to this system functioning, which is through covert control of the money supply by very few people.
It is crucial that people become aware of this because the methods by which society could free itself from this system of control are also very simple, once a person has gained an understanding of the true realities of this world we live in - and this is not as difficult a task as you may at first think, because due to its complexities, the illusion the elite have created, that most perceive as reality, is a very fragile one.
It is fragile because it is not reality.
The reality is that the world does not have to be this way at all, it does not have to be heading in the direction it is heading, people do not have to live in a never ending sea of self generating debt, wars do not have to be fought and children do not have to starve, and don't think people starve because the world is over populated. Don't believe what the Televisions tells you, the world isn't over populated at all. In fact lets look at it realistically with a simple comparison of population versus land mass, and we can do a rough estimate and formulate a quick hypothetical to demonstrate this very easily.
There are approximately 6 billion people in the world and there is 2.97 million square miles of land in the Island continent of Australia. 2.97 million square miles breaks down to 1 billion, 900 million, 800,000 acres which then converts down to 7,603,200,000 quarter acre blocks of land. So we could hypothetically give every person in the world a quarter acre block of land and they would all fit into an area the size of Australia, each would have enough land that they could all have gardens and grow a substantial supply of their own food, and we would still have 1,603,200,000 quarter acre blocks, or an area roughly half the size of Queensland left over - plus the entire rest of the world. Now just pause to let that sink in to your brain for a second. ALL the people, that's every man woman and child on earth would comfortably fit inside Australia, each individual person could have a quarter acre block of land and we would still have half of Queensland and the entire rest of the planet left totally unoccupied.
The world is not over populated at all. Its just very badly managed and and you need have absolutely no doubt whatsoever that this bad management is intentional, and it is methodical. It would however, be very simple to fix things and all that is required is for people to wake up to how much they are being lied to and how much they are being scammed - and this goes for everyone.
People really need to gain an understand of how this system actually works because this bad management is crippling the world and it is crippling the people. The methods that are used to do this become truly transparent once a person has gained a clear enough vision to see it and people really do need to open their eyes to see it right now because now that the world has been made smaller and now that all resources have been discovered and there are no frontiers left to conquer, the criminal elite intend to carry out a mass depoplulation of this world and their plan to do this is well underway. They are doing it in the middle east with war, in countries such as Africa through starvation and now in western countries through water additives, aerial spraying and through the introduction of toxic and nutrient deficient GM foods. This is to very soon be taken to the next level with the Global Implementation of Codex Alimentarius, an insidious set of food guidelines that are due to come into effect world wide on Dec 31st 2009. But people are now beginning to wake and realize that all is not right and they are beginning to speak out. The police need to understand this situation and take action to address these matters as well, and this is very important and there is no reason the Police should act against the people who are waking up and speaking out about this corrupt system, for the police are also being scammed, just as badly and in some ways even worse than everyone else. Worse because it is the Police who are being coerced and tricked into defending this elitist corruption by puppet governments put in place by the banksters who coerce these officers into compliance by applying creative names to such public awakenings such as 'social unrest' or 'civil disobedience' and by instilling a robot like adherence to authority within the minds of police officers rather than a strong set of moral values.
The police in these cases should stand by the people they are sworn to protect, not blindly follow instructions given to them by the criminal elites. The police need to realize that they too are the people and they are being stolen from and used as well and the way to beat this system is for the people, the police and everybody else is to simply stop agreeing with it - and the also the politicians who bow to these corrupt money cartels and enact these ridiculous pieces of legislation. These Politicians, need to think seriously about what they are doing. They need to realise that these money cartels don't care about them or their families, these politicians have children and grandchildren who are also going to have to live in this world that is being created and don't kid yourself that there is a politician in a position of power who isn't a puppet. All are puppets of the money cartels without exception. These people may well have been voted into power but the voting process is simply theater for the masses, to promote the illusion of peoples choice. The people may vote for one particular candidate over another, but they do not get to actually decide who these candidates will be to begin with.
The people of the world need to realize their own potential and wake up from the dream they are living in. Forget what you are told and trained to you by the TV because its a lie. TV is there to train people what to think and how to act. End of list. It is nothing more than a tool of propaganda that has successfully brainwashed 95% of the western world by feeding people manufactured news, disinformation and by giving people an utterly false perception of the the world and of their relationship to each other. Turn your TV off and leave it off, after even a month of no TV, you will be surprised at how much better and healthier you feel.
It needs to be clearly understood by people everywhere that the elite only have the power over the people that the people themselves grant to them, so stop giving it to them. Stop doing what the TV tells you to do and stop complying with the system. Understand that there truly is no division among the people of the world no matter who they are or where they are from. We are all people and we are all one. It is through the constantly promoted illusion of division that the system is able to function but in order for it to do so, it needs public compliance. Stop complying and you will shut the system down. You will shut it down completely because if people stop complying, it will simply implode. It will collapse like a house of cards. And all it would take for this to occur, is global awareness of how it really works.
We have reached a turning point in history and the veil of secrecy that has always surrounded the illuminati system is now at last being lifted. Now is the time for the people of the world to look after each other, and not the system. It really is that simple, and the world is almost on the verge of that happening now, because a new awareness is growing among the people. More and more are waking up every day, and they are spreading the word, as we all should do as often and as loudly as we can, because the masses who are still sleeping really must be woken up to what is occurring, there is quite literally nothing more important than this issue and this plan goes even deeper than the International money Cartels. There truly are deep dark forces at work controlling things here but it is through the manipulation of the money system that global control is maintained and it is that system that must first be addressed
Its all very well for us to all talk about this stuff and to continue learning and gathering more information about it, but the time for merely gathering information is now passed. What is needed now is action, and it is needed very quickly because the prison door is swinging shut.
Please understand that these people plan on depopulating at least 80% of the world and that most likely includes you. This is not a joke and it is not some wild conspiracy theory. It is the absolute truth and this matter seriously needs to be addressed. All the information on how they intend to do this is available in the public domain though of course you are not hearing it reported by the mainstream media because the money cartels own the mainstream media.
A great deal of information regarding this is posted on my youtube channel and I highly recommend that you view it and distribute it to as many people as you are able, because the time for talk really is over. What is truly needed at this time is for the good people of the world to act and to act now. The key is in love and unity among all of mankind because it matters not who you are, what country you are in or where you are from, it makes no difference whether you are black or white or Christian, or Muslim, or Jew, it makes no difference at all what your beliefs are, because the prison that is being constructed affects every one of us equally.
The world that we are allowing to be created for our children to live in is a world that will not be worth living in. and if we just allow the situation to continue along its current path then we are condemning our decendents to hell on earth, but we are many and they are few and it simply must not be allowed to occur.
It is time for the people of the world to stop and realise that the divisions that supposedly exists amongst us are an illusion. There is no division. Its time for everyone to understand the truth of this. Its time to approach the world and each other in a state of love rather than a state of fear. Its time for you to tap into the source and realize your own potential and its time for us all to collectively stand together and address the root cause of the problem. And all of you need to spread this information, its very important that you do. Burn DVD's and hand them out to people. Bring the conversation up at every opportunity. This issue is too important to ignore and if your not part of the solution then your part of the problem, theres simply no middle ground.
Bring all the truth factions of the world together under one banner, the banner of human unity. Set aside your differences and work the finer details out later. Regardless of who or what is the ultimate intelligence behind this plan for global control, everyone needs to understand clearly that the Fascist New World Order that is being introduced and the mass depopulation that is occurring across the globe is being implemented by the criminal banking elite.
The money system is the head of the snake.
Cut the head off the snake and the rest of it will whither and die.
The time for talk is over and the time has come for action. It is now time for the people of the world to stop complying with the system.
Everyone.
Stop complying with it and you will shut it down. And the best form of non compliance is love. Approach every issue with love. Rather than obediently following orders given to you by a commanding officer, and rather than doing what is right for you personally. Do what is actually right. And if a leader wants to send you to war, say no sir, I wont murder other peoples children for you any more. You'll have to go and do it yourself. You will be called coward by the military but such is not the case. It is much easier to fight for principles than to live up to them and it takes a far braver man to stand up for what is right and spit in the face of authority than it does to blindly follow orders due to fear of the consequences. Understand that we are all one and the key to real change and unity in this world lies with love.
There need be no violence, no guns, no banners, no slogans, no group think, just a united act of global non compliance. Non compliance for any thing in conflict with the directives out lined in the universal declaration of human rights would be a good start. Simply stop giving these people the power to control you. Understand that the only power they have is the power the people themselves grant to them. Understand that injustice towards one is injustice towards all. Injustice against him, is injustice against you and there should be no grey area in you mind in regard to that. Everyone needs to stop going along with it and it needs to be done immediately. Its time to cut the head off the snake.
The Revolution is not coming.
The Revolution is now.
*******

*******
The House of Orange
Part 1
By Dennis L. Cuddy, Ph.D.
June 24, 2013
NewsWithViews.com
(Note: Government officials are still saying we need to get to the bottom of what happened in Benghazi. As I have written before, this is like a green light for terrorists to hit us again because we still do not know what went wrong! Can you imagine what would have happened in World War II if we had this same type of incompetence? If the Nazis launched a surprise attack and it took us months to try to find out what went wrong, we might all be speaking German today!
Government officials are also concerned about the recent revelations regarding the National Security Agency program called PRISM and monitoring from whom we have received phone calls, emails, etc. However, intelligence agencies for years have been able to access this type of information via computer software called PROMIS. In an interview with Glenn Krawcyzk in NEXUS magazine (vol. 2, no.12, February-March 1993), Ari Ben-Menashe (personal security adviser to Israeli Prime Minister Yitzhak Shamir for 12 years) said that with PROMIS, one "can essentially get everything about anybody you want to know...including a written record of all the telephone numbers he or she dials." And concerning the modified, enhanced PROMIS, Ben-Menashe said, "This program makes George Orwell's 1984 (book) look like George Orwell was modest....Once you have this technology and you know everything everybody else is doing, or whomever you want to follow,...you can basically control other people that way....They have access to everything.")
Not long ago, I was talking with Bob Goldsborough with whom I co-authored 2 booklets in the past. I mentioned the House of Orange to him, and he said a friend of his years before had told him that he would never completely understand the movement toward a New World Order unless he included the House of Orange.
When William I of Orange became ruler of The Netherlands in 1544, family members began calling themselves "Orange-Nassau," and became known as the House of Orange. Not long thereafter, the Bank of Amsterdam was begun in 1609, and the influence of the bank and Holland extended far beyond the country's borders. The bank funded the revolution of Oliver Cromwell against the Stuarts in England, and Cromwell ruled Britain from 1649 to 1658 when Charles II (a Stuart) became king. During Cromwell's rule, Dutch settlers moved to the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa beginning in 1652 and called themselves Afrikaners.
Meanwhile, there were powerful forces in Britain who did not like the Stuarts' return to power there, so they plotted to overthrow them. In 1677, Sir William Temple (an agent of the Power Elite) helped arrange the marriage of William of Orange (Netherlands/Holland) to Princess Mary (an heir to the British throne). Then, in 1688, another Power Elite (PE) agent, Thomas Wharton, instigated the Revolution of that year, replacing James II (a Stuart) with William and Mary as rulers of Britain in 1689, also with financial backing from the Bank of Amsterdam.
William had the British treasury borrow heavily (one and a quarter million pounds) from the Bank of Amsterdam, and issued them a royal charter to establish the Bank of England in 1694. By 1698, the Bank of England was owed 16 million pounds from the British treasury (and with interest, the debt rose to 885 million pounds by 1815).
I have written before that in the mid-1700s, the American colonies began printing their own scrip (money), and Ben Franklin said that the British reaction (e.g., Stamp Act, etc.) to this led in part to the American Revolution of 1776. During the 1800s, the PE initiated a number of attempts to get the young, independent American republic under its control. One of these was the attempt to renew the charter of the Second Bank of the United States. Just after President Andrew Jackson defeated this effort, John Ruskin matriculated at Oxford University in 1836 and later taught there. He espoused the philosophy that the Anglo-Saxons were "the best northern blood," and this concept was picked up by his student Cecil Rhodes who, in 1891, founded the secret Society of the Elect to "take the government of the whole world," in Rhodes' own words.
In 1880-81, there had already been a minor war against British rule in the Dutch Afrikaner Orange Free State and Transvaal Republic in South Africa. This was called the First Boer War ("boer" is the Dutch word for farmer), and it was followed by a longer second Boer War from 1899 to 1902. The second war was instigated by Cecil Rhodes who for many years had been Prime Minister of Cape Town Colony before moving from South Africa to Rhodesia.
Part 2
By Dennis L. Cuddy, Ph.D.
July 8, 2013
NewsWithViews.com
(Note: The U.S. Supreme Court on June 26 ruled that part of the federal "Defense of Marriage" law denied equal protection to homosexuals. The problem is that is actually a religious view. It is the view of secular humanism, which was declared a religion by the Supreme Court in TORCASO v. WATKINS on June 19, 1961. Therefore, we do not have a separation of church and state with government neutrality. What we really have is the imposition of a particular religious view (secular humanism) on the rest of the nation. Thus, the Supreme Court's decision is itself a violation of its own separation of church and state doctrine!)
In 1897, the Shell Transport and Trading Company was formed under the direction of Marcus Samuel. They had been shipping South Sea crude oil from the Dutch-controlled archipelago known as Indonesia, and in 1907 Shell joined with Royal Dutch Petroleum Company to form the Royal Dutch Shell Company.
Cecil Rhodes' plan to "take the government of the whole world" (in Rhodes' own words) was executed by Lord Alfred Milner after Rhodes' death in the early 20th century. Marcus Samuel's son, Lord Herbert Samuel, was part of the Milner Group. And on May 16 and August 17, 1918 in the House of Lords, he referred to the establishment of a "new world order." Two years later in 1920, he became the first high commissioner (governor) of the British Mandate of Palestine until 1925. During his tenure in that position, he appointed Hajj Amin al-Husseini as political administrator of Arab Palestine. Al-Husseini became a major supporter of Adolph Hitler and the Nazis, who had allied with the Muslim Brotherhood (MB) beginning in the 1930s.
In the early 1930s, a young German aristocrat, Prince Bernhard of Lippe-Biesterfeld, became a member of the Nazi SS for a brief time as a student. On January 7, 1937 he married Julianna of the House of Orange, who would become Queen of The Netherlands in 1948. In 1954, Prince Bernhard formed the Bilderberg Group, which supported the economic integration and unification of the 6 nations of the European Coal and Steel Community. This would become the basis for the European Economic Community and later the European Union.
A key Royal Dutch Shell representative in the eastern part of the United States in the 1960s was Bert Bennett, whom Vice-President Hubert Humphrey reportedly would say was "the Lord God almighty of politics." Among the many young politicians Bennett groomed for leadership was James B. Hunt, Jr. of North Carolina. Hunt's path to national leadership was supposed to be via his "Child Health Plan for Raising a New Generation." Dr. Ursula Anderson, a research consultant in Switzerland for the World Health Organization, came here as a medical consultant for the federal Department of Health, Education, and Welfare (HEW). In August 1977, Dr. Anderson (for HEW) approached the newly-elected Governor Hunt's Division of Health Services to prepare a plan to "regionalize child health care" as part of a national strategy. What it really amounted to was socialized medicine for the nation. My mother discovered this "plot." I wrote an expose about it. And Gov. Hunt was furious.
Given that his avenue to fame using the issue of health was blocked, Hunt next turned to linking education and the economy, writing a relevant article in the April 1984 edition of PHI DELTA KAPPAN. He encouraged David Hamburg, head of the Carnegie Corporation, to fund a project regarding this, and in 1985 the Carnegioe Forum on Education and the Economy was begun. The Forum later changed its name to the National Center on Education and the Economy (NCEE) with Hunt a vice-chairman. In 1987, the National Board for Professional Teaching Standards was begun by Carnegie, and Hunt was chairman of it. During this same general period, Hunt was also chairman of the Mental Health Services for Youth program of the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation.
In November 1992, NCEE president Marc Tucker wrote his infamous letter to board member Hillary Clinton congratulating her on her husband's presidential victory because that would give NCEE the opportunity to put in place their "cradle to grave" plan for all of us! Also in the 1990s, Hunt became chairman of the National Education Goals Panel, the National Commission on Teaching and America's Future, the Pew National Center for Public Policy and Higher Education, and chairman of the National Commission on Asia in the Schools.
This is how the House of Orange exercises its tremendous influence, reaching down through companies like Royal Dutch Shell and its agents like Bert Bennett to control governors like Hunt and many other leading politicians. One of Bert Bennett's sons "coincidentally" bought the condominium next to the one in which I live. John Bennett became a chief aide to Gov. Hunt (so Bert could know what Hunt was doing). Another son, Jimmy, lived in the condominium next to mine, and later went to Australia where there are tremendous deposits of minerals in which Royal Dutch Shell and the House of Orange may be interested.
Other relevant notes of interest are that from 1998 to 2003, the chairman and president of the Bank for International Settlements (the central bank for all the world's central banks) was Willem Duisenberg, president of The Netherlands Bank. Also, Presidents George W. and George H. W. Bush had some Dutch ancestors.
© 2013 Dennis Cuddy - All Rights Reserved
Dennis Laurence Cuddy, historian and political analyst, received a Ph.D. from the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill (major in American History, minor in political science). Dr. Cuddy has taught at the university level, has been a political and economic risk analyst for an international consulting firm, and has been a Senior Associate with the U.S. Department of Education.
Cuddy has also testified before members of Congress on behalf of the U.S. Department of Justice. Dr. Cuddy has authored or edited twenty books and booklets, and has written hundreds of articles appearing in newspapers around the nation, including The Washington Post, Los Angeles Times and USA Today. He has been a guest on numerous radio talk shows in various parts of the country, such as ABC Radio in New York City, and he has also been a guest on the national television programs USA Today and CBS's Nightwatch.
E-Mail: Not Available
*******
 

Will Hillary Clinton be the Next President? (Part 1)

$
0
0
*******
*******
Sorry, Bernie fans, Hillary Clinton’s pre-planned ascension is back on schedule
Dems relieved that she still owns minorities.
By  Robert Laurie -- Bio and Archives 
February 22, 2016
In the beginning, the conventional wisdom said that Bernie was jus a fringe crackpot - a left-wing pipe dream with no real chance of securing the nomination. Clinton had all the money and power on her side so, despite the fact that she’s unlikeable and untrustworthy, she became known as an “inevitability.” ...Then Iowa and New Hampshire happened.
Even though Hillary technically won, Iowa was seen as a victory for Bernie. He came within a hair’s breadth of taking a state that Hillary should have controlled. Then, Bernie parlayed that momentum into a dominating New Hampshire performance.  The left ignored the fact that he was being trounced in terms of pledged delegates and began to argue that “President Bernie” was no longer some crazy, pie-in-the-sky, idea.  Allegedly, he could win.
That notion was pretty much decimated on Saturday night. Team Hillary is now all but unstoppable. As left-wing rage Slate.com reports, “barring a catastrophe, her nomination is,” once again, “inevitable.” Bernie is pretty much finished.
He didn’t just have momentum—he was putting money and people into Nevada, the third state on the Democratic nominating calendar after Iowa and New Hampshire, and expanding his outreach to Latino voters. Suddenly, Nevada was in doubt. So much so that Mook issued a memo downplaying Nevada, focusing on South Carolina, and looking forward to the next swath of contests in March.
It turned out that all of this was unnecessary. On Saturday, Clinton won the Nevada caucuses by a comfortable margin of around 5 points. Yes, the Sanders campaign had made up ground on Clinton, who he noted in his concession speech led him by as many as 25 points in polling in Nevada last month. But that comeback effort wasn’t fast enough to overcome her built-in advantages and deny her a victory. ”The truth is, we aren’t a single issue country” Clinton said in her victory speech, hammering on her most recent line against Sanders. “We need more than a plan for the bigbanks.”
So, how did this happen? Well, it comes down to what Slate calls “the theory of the race.” The idea is that Bernie appeals only to idealistic white hippies and millennials. They pinned their hopes on the belief that he couldn’t corral black voters.
Basically, as a certain Mr. Herman Cain likes to say, all Democrat presidential races rely on keeping black voters “on the reservation.” The official party of race-baiting knows that - should the day come when a Republican (or a non-Democrat like Sanders) can take even a small percentage of “their” black voters - the DNC power structure will be completely undermined.
This is why the DNC elites invest a staggering amount of time and effort into labelling every opponent an “ist.”  Every outsider - regardless of political orientation - is either a sexist, a racist, or some kind of classist. These attacks were tougher to mount against Sanders, but they tried.  Bernie, Hillary claimed, is a borderline sexist who isn’t particularly interested in addressing systemic racism.  This is a little more oblique than what we usually see from team Clinton, but it may have worked.
Hillary won, and - as Slate argues - unless blacks abandon her in droves, she’ll be the Dems’ nominee:
By winning, Team Clinton doesn’t just score delegates—it proves its theory of the race. The Clinton campaign believes that Sanders’ strength and enthusiasm is illusory; that it reflects the peculiar demographics of Iowa and New Hampshire—rural states with few minorities—more than any pro-Bernie tide in the Democratic Party. Nevada, in other words, was a test. If Clinton lost, then it presaged a tighter race in South Carolina and beyond, and possibly one that ended with a Sanders nomination. Now, instead, we have a race that essentially looks like it did in the beginning of the year. Clinton has the advantage, and barring a catastrophic decline with black voters, she’ll march steadily to the nomination.
As I’ve argued before; if the Democrat primaries were functioning solely ‘on the merits’ Hillary would probably have been defeated a long time ago.  However, the DNC is not doing things ‘on the merits.’ Contempt for Sanders has been on display since day one. For evidence, you need look no further than the way the party set the debate schedule to benefit Clinton. The fix was in from the start.
The fact that someone with Hillary’s monumental pile of baggage is still in the race simply boggles the mind. She’s also the Dems’ worst campaigner since Dukakis.  That’s impressive, considering that they previously nominated vintage audio-animatronic figures named John Kerry and Al Gore.
For the party, though, none of that matters. Bernie will never be allowed to be the Democrat nominee - and Saturday’s loss probably sealed his fate.
Robert Laurie’s column is distributed by CainTV, which can be found at caintv.com
Be sure to “like” Robert Laurie over on Facebook and follow him on Twitter. You’ll be glad you did.
*******
Anti-Semitic Ex-Congressman with Ethics Issues Joins Hillary's Team
"That came from Jews and Republicans"
November 30, 2015
Daniel Greenfield
It seemed impossible, but Team Hillary has actually gotten uglier and nastier. The Free Beacon's Alana Goodman has the scoop.
Hillary Clinton has appointed to her leadership team a former congressman who blamed his defeat on “Jewish interests” and the “Jewish media,” her campaign announced earlier this month.
Shortly after his defeat, Earl Hilliard,  gave an interview to the Black Commentator in which he said “Jewish interests” bought the election for Davis.
Does it get worse? It's Hillary. S of course it gets worse.
“The only thing I know for sure, that I saw in black and white, is $1,098,000 that [Davis] reported,” said Hilliard in the July 16, 2002 interview. “You can’t take money from corporations, so that came from Jews and Republicans. There’s no question where that money came from.”
Hilliard said his opponent also received millions of dollars in free media coverage.
“Remember, the Jewish media. They started putting word out, they wanted everybody to know, because … obviously they felt that the money they had, that they put in, that they were going to beat me,” he said.
Hilliard’s campaign was also accused of distributing an anti-Semitic leaflet against Davis in the 2002 race.
“Mr. Davis must simply understand that Jews the world over have never come to the aid of black or dark skin people because it was the right thing to do,” said the flyer.
Hilliard denied any connection to the advertisement. After the election, he warned that his loss would incite “retribution” against Jews.
“I see a future with a great deal of conflict between African-Americans and Jews in this country,” Hilliard told the Associated Press on June 28, 2002. “It’s going to get worse before it gets better. I don’t think African-Americans are going to sit back and let this continue. There will be retribution.”
What's next? Welcoming Cynthia McKinney to the team?
But Hilliard's loss might have had less to do with the Jews and more to do with his ethics issues. That gives him something else in common with Hillary.
The committee found three separate violations, all involving expenditures that were not for legitimate campaign purposes:
From April 1993 through March 1994, the Hilliard for Congress Campaign made at least nine loans totaling $16,205 to three individuals. Two of the recipients were employed in the lawmaker's district offices.
From July 1992 through August 1996 the campaign paid salary and benefits to three individuals working both for the campaign and the private companies. The three "routinely performed administrative, secretarial, bookkeeping and other services" for three private companies, the committee found.
From approximately 1993 through 1996, campaign funds were converted to personal use by Hilliard and used to pay rent and utility costs for the Hilliard family corporations.
The committee found that $13,205 was loaned to Hilliard's niece, Rita Hall Patterson. She held positions in the campaign committee and the family businesses.
Also receiving personal loans were two congressional staff members of Hilliard's Alabama offices, Elvira Williams and Jacqueline Smith.
The campaign committee paid salary and benefits to Elizabeth Turner. While working for the committee, "the majority of her time and efforts were spent in the service of" the Hilliard companies, the ethics committee said.
The firms and the campaign used the same building.
A slow day at the office in Clintonworld.
Daniel Greenfield, a Shillman Journalism Fellow at the Freedom Center, is a New York writer focusing on radical Islam.
*******
Also See:
Days Before the Two Candidates Are Known!
14 January 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/01/days-before-two-candidates-are-known-it.html
and
What Do You Know About The Clintons?
24 December 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/12/what-do-you-know-about-clintons.html
 and
Hillary Clinton, the Wanttabe President!
06 October 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/10/hillary-clinton-want-be-president.html
and
Will Hillary Run For President?
19 April 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/04/will-hillary-run-for-president.html
and
War on Drugs is a Farce!
09 January 2014
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2014/01/war-on-drugs-is-farce.html
and
The Next President of United States - Hillary Clinton!
21 December 2013
and
What's with Recent U.S. Presidents?
27 June 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/06/whats-with-recent-us-presidents.html
and
Hillary Clinton's Testimony on Benghazi!
24 January 2013
and
The Saga of the Benghazi Report!
22 December 2012
and
What Happened in Benghazi?
31 October 2012
and
Bill Clinton was a Great President. Wasn't He?
03 October 2007
*******

Let's Not Forget That Stalin Murdered Millions!

$
0
0
*******
Talking to Joseph Stalin
Reconstruction of the human brain which obviously lacks many things needed for a perfect social order
By Dr. Ileana Johnson Paugh -- Bio and Archives 
February 24, 2016
H.G. Wells, the prolific British sci-fi writer, who self-described to be a socialist left of Stalin, interviewed the infamous Soviet dictator for three hours on July 23, 1934. The interview was recorded by Constantine Oumansky, the chief of the Press Bureau of the Commissariat of Foreign Affairs.
The scope of the interview, after he spoke at length with President Roosevelt, was to find out what Stalin was “doing to change the world.” Wells told Stalin that he tried to look at the world through the eyes of the “common man” not the eyes of a politician or a bureaucrat.
Indicating to Stalin that “capitalists must learn from you, to grasp the spirit of socialism,” Wells stated that a profound reorganization was taking place in the United States, the creation of a “planned, that is, socialist, economy.” He witnessed Washington building offices, new state regulatory bodies, and “a much needed Civil Service.”
Stalin expressed his skepticism about U.S. being able to build a planned economy. It is not possible, he said, because “the Americans want to rid themselves of the [economic] crisis on the basis of private capitalist activity without changing the economic basis.” Stalin was touting the new economic basis that socialism had built. In his view, the existing capitalist system was rooted in anarchy. “A planned economy tries to abolish unemployment.” But a capitalist would never agree to completely abolish unemployment, Stalin said, because capitalists want to maintain a supply of cheap labor.
Stalin was wrong about unemployment under a socialist Soviet economy for three reasons:
Data in general was never accurately kept or reported.
The labor was highly manual with low levels of automation; under a free market economy automation often displaces labor, causing retraining of workers into other skills.
Women who sought employment worked for shorter periods of time and were thus not included in the statistics.
Stalin believed that Roosevelt’s “New Deal” was a very powerful socialist idea
Stalin explained to Wells that planned economies increase output in those “branches of the industry which produce goods that the masses of the people need particularly.”
Having survived for twenty years in such a system Stalin described, I remember precisely all the shortages of goods and services that the economically illiterate central planners created, the long lines, the rationing we had to endure, and the empty shelves everywhere.
Furthermore, to see how wrong Stalin was, just look today at Venezuela under Maduro’s centrally planned socialist policies, a continuation of his mentor’s, Hugo Chavez, and you will see the empty shelves and suffering. Look at Castro’s Cuba after 50 years of central planning and at its decaying infrastructure and decrepit buildings. Fidel “protected” Cuba’s hapless citizens from the “evils” of capitalism and instead gave them a nightmarish socialist economy and a political socialist dictatorship.
Stalin described to Wells that capital flows into those sectors of the economy where the rate of profit is highest.  A capitalist would never agree “to incur loss to himself and agree to a lower rate of profit for the sake of satisfying the needs of the people.” A central planner like Stalin did not understand supply and demand, only saw collectivism, and viewed profit as evil. Who wants to open a business if they are going to lose money?
Stalin admitted that “without getting rid of the capitalists, without abolishing the principle of private property in the means of production, it is impossible to create a planned economy.”  When the “financial oligarchy will be abolished, only then socialism will be brought about,” Stalin added.

He believed that Roosevelt’s “New Deal” was a very powerful socialist idea. But, in Stalin’s opinion, Roosevelt would not be able to achieve his socialist goals for many generations because “the banks, the industries, the large enterprises, the large farms are not in Roosevelt’s hands.”
All the railroads, the mercantile fleet, the army of skilled workers, engineers, and technical personnel are all working for private enterprise, he said. Even though the State offers military defense of the country, maintains law and order, and collects taxes, this private ownership of the means of production, renders the State unable to control everything, “the State is in the hands of capitalist economy.”
Stalin explained that, if the State controlled the banks, then transportation, then heavy industries, industries in general, commerce, an “all-embracing control will be equivalent to the State ownership of all branches of the national economy and this will be the process of socialization.”
I wonder if the Millennials understand that they would lose their smart gadgets, TVs, laptops, and other electronics they love to their socialist utopian dream of social justice. If they can’t get rich then everybody must be equally poor and miserable.
The important question is, are American citizens ready to lose everything they own privately, giving government carte blanche to own the means of the production and to tell them what they can and cannot have, consume, and do?
Stalin argued that Roosevelt made an honest attempt to “satisfy the interests of the proletariat class at the expense of the capitalist class.” Today, we, the taxpayers/capitalist class, are still satisfying the interests of the non-producers who receive welfare at our expense from the heavy taxes we pay. Are we willing supporters of such idle individuals? Roosevelt, with his programs, created a generational welfare class that feels entitled to what they receive, and destroyed the family in the process.
Stalin described the two classes in capitalism, as he saw it through the lenses of a socialist:
 “The propertied class” (the owners of banks, factories, mines, farms, “plantations in colonies,” who chased after the “evil” profit)
“The exploited class” (the class of the poor who existed by selling their labor)
Wells told Stalin that, although he personally saw the need to “conduct propaganda in favor of socialism,” he met many educated people such as “engineers, airmen, military-technical people” who regarded “your simple class antagonism as nonsense.” Additionally, he asked, were there not people who were not poor but worked productively?
Stalin admitted that “small landowners, artisans, small traders” did not decide the fate of a country, but “the toiling masses, who produce all the things society requires.”
We sure have a lot of unemployed and disabled “toiling masses” today that are sitting idle at home and don’t seem to mind one bit, benefitting from the “evil” capitalist spoils.
Calling J.P. Morgan “old Morgan,” Wells described him as “a parasite on society,” who “merely accumulated wealth.” On the other hand, Wells admired Rockefeller whom he described as a “brilliant organizer” who “has set an example of how to organize the delivery of oil that is worthy of emulation,” while Ford was “selfish.”
Further excoriating the capitalist system based on profit that, in his opinion, is “breaking down,” Wells surprised Stalin by saying, “It seems to me that I am more to the Left than you, Mr. Stalin; I think the old system is nearer to its end than you think.”
Stalin corrects him that these capitalist men possess great organizational talent which the Soviet people could learn from. “And [J. P.] Morgan, whom you characterize so unfavorably, was undoubtedly a good, capable organizer.” But people like him who “serve the cause of profit” are not “prepared to reconstruct the world,” they are not “capable organizers of production.”
Reminding Wells, “don’t you know how many workers he throws in the streets,” Stalin added that capitalism will be abolished by the working class, not by the ‘technical intelligentsia’ or the ‘organizers’ of production. If this “technical intelligentsia breaks away spiritually from their employers, from the capitalist world, that will take a long time and only then can they begin to reconstruct the world.” The working class will become the “sovereign master of the capitalist class.”
In reality, this working class Stalin described as the savior of society, was a dumbed-down, poorly paid, miserable majority who could not care less if the factories under-produced, broke down, and were never repaired. They were paid regardless of how much they produced, how many mistakes they made, what shoddy products they sent to the market, how much theft was going on in order to barter with others to survive, and did not own much of anything. This working class pretended to work and the communist organizers and centralized planners pretended to pay them.
The Soviet economic system was a dismal model which failed miserably and eventually collapsed on its own utopian weight while the free market system thrived.
Unfortunately today, the Democrats and Social Democrats are gaining ground in their efforts to resurrect around the world a mummified model of economic failure, inventing new euphemisms, in order to stay in absolute power and control of the population.
Wells described the Royal Society whose president had delivered a speech on “social planning and scientific control.” The Royal Society, he told Stalin, held “revolutionary views and insists on the scientific reorganization of human society. Mentality changes. Your class-war propaganda has not kept pace with these facts.”
“Capitalist society is in a cul de sac,” Stalin responded, and “A devoted and energetic revolutionary minority requires the passive support of millions.”
“Revolution, the substitution of one social system for another, has always been a struggle, a painful and cruel struggle, a life and death struggle,” Stalin admitted. And the process will not be “spontaneous and peaceful, it will be complicated, long, and violent.” And the new world order “revolutionaries” should use the police to support them in the fight against “reactionaries.”
“That is why the Communists say to the working class: Answer violence with violence; do all you can to prevent the old dying order from crushing you, do not permit it to put manacles on your hands, on the hands with which you will overthrow the old system.”
Citing history, both Wells and Stalin described how Cromwell, on the basis of the Constitution, resorted to violence, beheaded the king, dispersed the Parliament, arrested many, and beheaded others; how much blood was shed to overthrow the tsars; how the October Revolution overthrew the old and decaying Russian capitalist system and how the “Bolsheviks were the only way out.”
Explaining the Third Estate (the common people) which existed before the French Revolution, Stalin pointed out that “not a single class has voluntarily made way for another class” and the “Communists would welcome the voluntary departure of the bourgeoisie.”
*******

*******
Wells argued that force must be used within existing laws and “there is no need to disorganize the old system because it is disorganizing itself enough as it is.” In his opinion, “insurrection against the old order, against the law, is obsolete, old-fashioned.” In addition to the educational system which must be radically changed, this is how Wells explained his point of view:
    He supports order.
    He attacks the present system “in so far as it cannot assure order.”
    He thinks that “class war propaganda may detach from socialism just those educated people whom socialism needs.” (H.G. Wells, p. 20 of the interview transcript)
Stalin countered with his own points:
    “The social bulwark of the revolution is the working class.”
    An auxiliary force must exist; the Communists call it a Party.
    Political power is the “lever of change” to create new laws in the interest of the working class.
From my experience, the only interests represented in the socialism/communism of my youth were the interests of the dictatorial ruling elite of the Communist Party. They became the millionaire rulers at that time, and, when disbanded and stripped of power, their heirs became the billionaires of today.
Ending the interview, Wells thanked Stalin for his explanations of the fundamentals of socialism and said that millions around the world hang on to every word Stalin and Roosevelt utter.
Stalin, engaging the infamous and demagogue idea of ‘self-criticism,’ which had sent many honest intellectuals to gulags, replied that much more could have been done by the Bolsheviks, had they been “cleverer.” Wells suggested making human beings “cleverer” by inventing a five-year plan for the “reconstruction of the human brain which obviously lacks many things needed for a perfect social order.”
The idea of mind control, which is not so far-fetched today, brought shivers down my spine. Bombastic and not-ground-in-reality Five-Year centralized plans issued by the Communist Party elites and their apparatchiks who had no idea how the economy should be run, many of whom did not have but an elementary education and could barely read, write, and do simple math, those plans brought the economies in all Soviet satellite countries to unmitigated disaster.
Listen to Dr. Paugh on Butler on Business,  every Wednesday to Thursday at 10:49 AM EST
Dr. Ileana Johnson Paugh (Romanian Conservative) is a freelance writer, author, radio commentator, and speaker. Her books, “Echoes of Communism”, “Liberty on Life Support” and “U.N. Agenda 21: Environmental Piracy,” “Communism 2.0: 25 Years Later” are available at Amazon in paperback and Kindle.
Her commentaries reflect American Exceptionalism, the economy, immigration, and education. Visit her website, ileanajohnson.com
*******
Hitler vs. Stalin: Who Killed More?
Timothy Snyder
March 10, 2011 Issue 
Who was worse, Hitler or Stalin?
In the second half of the twentieth century, Americans were taught to see both Nazi Germany and the Soviet Union as the greatest of evils. Hitler was worse, because his regime propagated the unprecedented horror of the Holocaust, the attempt to eradicate an entire people on racial grounds. Yet Stalin was also worse, because his regime killed far, far more people, tens of millions it was often claimed, in the endless wastes of the Gulag. For decades, and even today, this confidence about the difference between the two regimes—quality versus quantity—has set the ground rules for the politics of memory. Even historians of the Holocaust generally take for granted that Stalin killed more people than Hitler, thus placing themselves under greater pressure to stress the special character of the Holocaust, since this is what made the Nazi regime worse than the Stalinist one.
Discussion of numbers can blunt our sense of the horrific personal character of each killing and the irreducible tragedy of each death. As anyone who has lost a loved one knows, the difference between zero and one is an infinity. Though we have a harder time grasping this, the same is true for the difference between, say, 780,862 and 780,863—which happens to be the best estimate of the number of people murdered at Treblinka. Large numbers matter because they are an accumulation of small numbers: that is, precious individual lives. Today, after two decades of access to Eastern European archives, and thanks to the work of German, Russian, Israeli, and other scholars, we can resolve the question of numbers. The total number of noncombatants killed by the Germans—about 11 million—is roughly what we had thought. The total number of civilians killed by the Soviets, however, is considerably less than we had believed. We know now that the Germans killed more people than the Soviets did. That said, the issue of quality is more complex than was once thought. Mass murder in the Soviet Union sometimes involved motivations, especially national and ethnic ones, that can be disconcertingly close to Nazi motivations.
It turns out that, with the exception of the war years, a very large majority of people who entered the Gulag left alive. Judging from the Soviet records we now have, the number of people who died in the Gulag between 1933 and 1945, while both Stalin and Hitler were in power, was on the order of a million, perhaps a bit more. The total figure for the entire Stalinist period is likely between two million and three million. The Great Terror and other shooting actions killed no more than a million people, probably a bit fewer. The largest human catastrophe of Stalinism was the famine of 1930–1933, in which more than five million people died.
Of those who starved, the 3.3 million or so inhabitants of Soviet Ukraine who died in 1932 and 1933 were victims of a deliberate killing policy related to nationality. In early 1930, Stalin had announced his intention to “liquidate” prosperous peasants (“kulaks”) as a class so that the state could control agriculture and use capital extracted from the countryside to build industry. Tens of thousands of people were shot by Soviet state police and hundreds of thousands deported. Those who remained lost their land and often went hungry as the state requisitioned food for export. The first victims of starvation were the nomads of Soviet Kazakhstan, where about 1.3 million people died. The famine spread to Soviet Russia and peaked in Soviet Ukraine. Stalin requisitioned grain in Soviet Ukraine knowing that such a policy would kill millions. Blaming Ukrainians for the failure of his own policy, he ordered a series of measures—such as sealing the borders of that Soviet republic—that ensured mass death.
In 1937, as his vision of modernization faltered, Stalin ordered the Great Terror. Because we now have the killing orders and the death quotas, inaccessible so long as the Soviet Union existed, we now know that the number of victims was not in the millions. We also know that, as in the early 1930s, the main victims were the peasants, many of them survivors of hunger and of concentration camps. The highest Soviet authorities ordered 386,798 people shot in the “Kulak Operation” of 1937–1938. The other major “enemies” during these years were people belonging to national minorities who could be associated with states bordering the Soviet Union: some 247,157 Soviet citizens were killed by the NKVD in ethnic shooting actions.
In the largest of these, the “Polish Operation” that began in August 1937, 111,091 people accused of espionage for Poland were shot. In all, 682,691 people were killed during the Great Terror, to which might be added a few hundred thousand more Soviet citizens shot in smaller actions. The total figure of civilians deliberately killed under Stalinism, around six million, is of course horribly high. But it is far lower than the estimates of twenty million or more made before we had access to Soviet sources. At the same time, we see that the motives of these killing actions were sometimes far more often national, or even ethnic, than we had assumed. Indeed it was Stalin, not Hitler, who initiated the first ethnic killing campaigns in interwar Europe.
Until World War II, Stalin’s regime was by far the more murderous of the two. Nazi Germany began to kill on the Soviet scale only after the Molotov-Ribbentrop Pact in the summer of 1939 and the joint German-Soviet invasion of Poland that September. About 200,000 Polish civilians were killed between 1939 and 1941, with each regime responsible for about half of those deaths. This figure includes about 50,000 Polish citizens shot by German security police and soldiers in the fall of 1939, the 21,892 Polish citizens shot by the Soviet NKVD in the Katyn massacres of spring 1940, and the 9,817 Polish citizens shot in June 1941 in a hasty NKVD operation after Hitler betrayed Stalin and Germany attacked the USSR. Under cover of the war and the occupation of Poland, the Nazi regime also killed the handicapped and others deemed unfit in a large-scale “euthanasia” program that accounts for 200,000 deaths. It was this policy that brought asphyxiation by carbon monoxide to the fore as a killing technique.
Beyond the numbers killed remains the question of intent. Most of the Soviet killing took place in times of peace, and was related more or less distantly to an ideologically informed vision of modernization. Germany bears the chief responsibility for the war, and killed civilians almost exclusively in connection with the practice of racial imperialism. Germany invaded the Soviet Union with elaborate colonization plans. Thirty million Soviet citizens were to starve, and tens of millions more were to be shot, deported, enslaved, or assimilated.
Such plans, though unfulfilled, provided the rationale for the bloodiest occupation in the history of the world. The Germans placed Soviet prisoners of war in starvation camps, where 2.6 million perished from hunger and another half-million (disproportionately Soviet Jews) were shot. A million Soviet citizens also starved during the siege of Leningrad. In “reprisals” for partisan actions, the Germans killed about 700,000 civilians in grotesque mass executions, most of them Belarusians and Poles. At the war’s end the Soviets killed tens of thousands of people in their own “reprisals,” especially in the Baltic states, Belarus, and Ukraine. Some 363,000 German soldiers died in Soviet captivity.
Hitler came to power with the intention of eliminating the Jews from Europe; the war in the east showed that this could be achieved by mass killing. Within weeks of the attack by Germany (and its Finnish, Romanian, Hungarian, Italian, and other allies) on the USSR, Germans, with local help, were exterminating entire Jewish communities. By December 1941, when it appears that Hitler communicated his wish that all Jews be murdered, perhaps a million Jews were already dead in the occupied Soviet Union. Most had been shot over pits, but thousands were asphyxiated in gas vans. From 1942, carbon monoxide was used at the death factories Chełmno, Bełz˙ec, Sobibór, and Treblinka to kill Polish and some other European Jews. As the Holocaust spread to the rest of occupied Europe, other Jews were gassed by hydrogen cyanide at Auschwitz-Birkenau.
Overall, the Germans, with much local assistance, deliberately murdered about 5.4 million Jews, roughly 2.6 million by shooting and 2.8 million by gassing (about a million at Auschwitz, 780,863 at Treblinka, 434,508 at Bełz˙ec, about 180,000 at Sobibór, 150,000 at Chełmno, 59,000 at Majdanek, and many of the rest in gas vans in occupied Serbia and the occupied Soviet Union). A few hundred thousand more Jews died during deportations to ghettos or of hunger or disease in ghettos. Another 300,000 Jews were murdered by Germany’s ally Romania. Most Holocaust victims had been Polish or Soviet citizens before the war (3.2 million and one million respectively). The Germans also killed more than a hundred thousand Roma.
All in all, the Germans deliberately killed about 11 million noncombatants, a figure that rises to more than 12 million if foreseeable deaths from deportation, hunger, and sentences in concentration camps are included. For the Soviets during the Stalin period, the analogous figures are approximately six million and nine million. These figures are of course subject to revision, but it is very unlikely that the consensus will change again as radically as it has since the opening of Eastern European archives in the 1990s. Since the Germans killed chiefly in lands that later fell behind the Iron Curtain, access to Eastern European sources has been almost as important to our new understanding of Nazi Germany as it has been to research on the Soviet Union itself. (The Nazi regime killed approximately 165,000 German Jews.)
Apart from the inaccessibility of archives, why were our earlier assumptions so wrong? One explanation is the cold war. Our wartime and postwar European alliances, after all, required a certain amount of moral and thus historical flexibility. In 1939 Germany and the Soviet Union were military allies. By the end of 1941, after the Germans had attacked the Soviet Union and Japan the United States, Moscow in effect had traded Berlin for Washington. By 1949, the alliances had switched again, with the United States and the Federal Republic of Germany together in NATO, facing off against the Soviet Union and its Eastern European allies, including the smaller German Democratic Republic. During the cold war, it was sometimes hard for Americans to see clearly the particular evils of Nazis and Soviets. Hitler had brought about a Holocaust: but Germans were now our allies. Stalin too had killed millions of people: but some of the worst episodes, taking place as they had before the war, had already been downplayed in wartime US propaganda, when we were on the same side.
We formed an alliance with Stalin right at the end of the most murderous years of Stalinism, and then allied with a West German state a few years after the Holocaust. It was perhaps not surprising that in this intellectual environment a certain compromise position about the evils of Hitler and Stalin—that both, in effect, were worse—emerged and became the conventional wisdom.
New understandings of numbers, of course, are only a part of any comparison, and in themselves pose new questions of both quantity and quality. How to count the battlefield casualties of World War II in Europe, not considered here? It was a war that Hitler wanted, and so German responsibility must predominate; but in the event it began with a German-Soviet alliance and a cooperative invasion of Poland in 1939. Somewhere near the Stalinist ledger must belong the thirty million or more Chinese starved during the Great Leap Forward, as Mao followed Stalin’s model of collectivization.* The special quality of Nazi racism is not diluted by the historical observation that Stalin’s motivations were sometimes national or ethnic. The pool of evil simply grows deeper.
The most fundamental proximity of the two regimes, in my view, is not ideological but geographical. Given that the Nazis and the Stalinists tended to kill in the same places, in the lands between Berlin and Moscow, and given that they were, at different times, rivals, allies, and enemies, we must take seriously the possibility that some of the death and destruction wrought in the lands between was their mutual responsibility. What can we make of the fact, for example, that the lands that suffered most during the war were those occupied not once or twice but three times: by the Soviets in 1939, the Germans in 1941, and the Soviets again in 1944?
The Holocaust began when the Germans provoked pogroms in June and July 1941, in which some 24,000 Jews were killed, on territories in Poland annexed by the Soviets less than two years before. The Nazis planned to eliminate the Jews in any case, but the prior killings by the NKVD certainly made it easier for local gentiles to justify their own participation in such campaigns. As I have written in Bloodlands: Europe Between Hitler and Stalin (2010), where all of the major Nazi and Soviet atrocities are discussed, we see, even during the German-Soviet war, episodes of belligerent complicity in which one side killed more because provoked or in some sense aided by the other. Germans took so many Soviet prisoners of war in part because Stalin ordered his generals not to retreat. The Germans shot so many civilians in part because Soviet partisans deliberately provoked reprisals. The Germans shot more than a hundred thousand civilians in Warsaw in 1944 after the Soviets urged the locals to rise up and then declined to help them. In Stalin’s Gulag some 516,543 people died between 1941 and 1943, sentenced by the Soviets to labor, but deprived of food by the German invasion.
Were these people victims of Stalin or of Hitler? Or both?
*******
Stalin killed millions. A Stanford historian answers the question, was it genocide?
When it comes to use of the word "genocide," public opinion has been kinder to Stalin than Hitler. But one historian looks at Stalin's mass killings and urges that the definition of genocide be widened.
By Cynthia Haven
Stanford Report, September 23, 2010
Mass killing is still the way a lot of governments do business.
The past few decades have seen terrifying examples in Rwanda, Cambodia, Darfur, Bosnia.
Murder on a national scale, yes – but is it genocide? "The word carries a
powerful punch," said Stanford history Professor Norman Naimark. "In international courts, it's considered the crime of crimes."
Nations have tugs of war over the official definition of the word "genocide" itself – which mentions only national, ethnic, racial and religious groups. The definition can determine, after all, international relations, foreign aid and national morale. Look at the annual international tussle over whether the 1915 Turkish massacre and deportation of the Armenians "counts" as genocide.
Naimark, author of the controversial new book Stalin's Genocides, argues that we need a much broader definition of genocide, one that includes nations killing social classes and political groups. His case in point: Stalin.
The book's title is plural for a reason: He argues that the Soviet elimination of a social class, the kulaks (who were higher-income farmers), and the subsequent killer famine among all Ukrainian peasants – as well as the notorious 1937 order No. 00447 that called for the mass execution and exile of "socially harmful elements" as "enemies of the people"– were, in fact, genocide.
"I make the argument that these matters shouldn't be seen as discrete episodes, but seen together," said Naimark, the Robert and Florence McDonnell Professor of Eastern European Studies and a respected authority on the Soviet regime. "It's a horrific case of genocide – the purposeful elimination of all or part of a social group, a political group."
Stalin had nearly a million of his own citizens executed, beginning in the 1930s. Millions more fell victim to forced labor, deportation, famine, massacres, and detention and interrogation by Stalin's henchmen.
"In some cases, a quota was established for the number to be executed, the number to be arrested," said Naimark. "Some officials overfulfilled as a way of showing their exuberance."
The term "genocide" was defined by the 1948 United Nations Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide. The convention's work was shaped by the Holocaust – "that was considered the genocide," said Naimark.
"A catastrophe had just happened, and everyone was still thinking about the war that had just ended. This always occurs with international law – they outlaw what happened in the immediate past, not what's going to happen in the future."
In his book, he concludes that there was more similarity between Hitler and Stalin than usually acknowledged: "Both chewed up the lives of human beings in the name of a transformative vision of Utopia. Both destroyed their countries and societies, as well as vast numbers of people inside and outside their own states. Both, in the end, were genocidaires."
All early drafts of the U.N. genocide convention included social and political groups in its definition. But one hand that wasn't in the room guided the pen. The Soviet delegation vetoed any definition of genocide that might include the actions of its leader, Joseph Stalin. The Allies, exhausted by war, were loyal to their Soviet allies – to the detriment of subsequent generations.
Naimark argues that that the narrow definition of genocide is the dictator's unacknowledged legacy to us today.
Accounts "gloss over the genocidal character of the Soviet regime in the 1930s, which killed systematically rather than episodically," said Naimark. In the process of collectivization, for example, 30,000 kulaks were killed directly, mostly shot on the spot. About 2 million were forcibly deported to the Far North and Siberia.
They were called "enemies of the people," as well as swine, dogs, cockroaches, scum, vermin, filth, garbage, half animals, apes. Activists promoted murderous slogans: "We will exile the kulak by the thousand when necessary – shoot the kulak breed.""We will make soap of kulaks.""Our class enemies must be wiped off the face of the earth."
One Soviet report noted that gangs "drove the dekulakized naked in the streets, beat them, organized drinking bouts in their houses, shot over their heads, forced them to dig their own graves, undressed women and searched them, stole valuables, money, etc."
A dispossessed kulak and his family in front of their home in Udachne village in Donets'ka oblast', 1930s
The destruction of the kulak class triggered the Ukrainian famine, during which 3 million to 5 million peasants died of starvation.
"There is a great deal of evidence of government connivance in the circumstances that brought on the shortage of grain and bad harvests in the first place and made it impossible for Ukrainians to find food for their survival," Naimark writes.
Shipment of grain from the Chervonyi Step collective farm to a procurement center, Kyivs'ka oblast', 1932. The sign reads 'Socialists' bread instead of kulak's bread.'
We will never know how many millions Stalin killed. "And yet somehow Stalin gets a pass," Ian Frazier wrote in a recent New Yorker article about the gulags. "People know he was horrible, but he has not yet been declared horrible officially."
Time magazine put Stalin on its cover 11 times. Russian public opinion polls still rank him near the top of the greatest leaders of Russian history, as if he were just another one of the powerful but bloodthirsty czars.
There's a reason for Russian obliviousness. Every family had not only victims but perpetrators. "A vast network of state organizations had to be mobilized to seize and kill that many people," Naimark wrote, estimating that tens of thousands were accomplices.
"How much can you move on? Can you put it in your past? How is a national identity formed when a central part of it is a crime?" Naimark asked. "The Germans have gone about it the right way," he said, pointing out that the Germany has pioneered research about the Holocaust and the crimes of the Nazi regime. "Through denial and obfuscation, the Turks have gone about it the wrong way."
Without a full examination of the past, Naimark observed, it's too easy for it to happen again.
Toward the end of his life, Stalin may have had another genocide in his crosshairs. We'll never know whether the concocted conspiracy of Jewish Kremlin doctors in 1952 would have resulted in the internal exile of the entire Jewish population. Whatever plans existed ended abruptly with Stalin's death in March 1953, as rumors of Jewish deportations were swirling.
One of Stalin's colleagues recalled the dictator reviewing an arrest list (really, a death list) and muttering to himself: "Who's going to remember all this riff-raff in ten or twenty years' time? No one. … Who remembers the names now of the boyars Ivan the Terrible got rid of? No one. … The people had to know he was getting rid of all his enemies. In the end, they all got what they deserved."
Who remembers? If Naimark has his way, perhaps we all will: "Every family had people who died. I'm convinced that they need to learn about their own past. There'll never be closure, but there will be a reckoning with the past."
*******
Daily Mail: In 1953, Stalin wanted to murder at least20 millions of Jews in the Soviet Union!
Where did they all come from, after SIX MILLION were killed?
National Journal, for the sake of truth and knowledge
History 2003
According to "World Religions and Cultures" (http://wrc.lingnet.org/russno.htm), on the eve of World War I, the Jewish population in the U.S.S.R was estimated at 5.2 million. The 1941 German invasion of the Soviet Union was particularly horrific for Soviet Jewry. About 2.5 million Jews were, according to official holocaust teachings, annihilated. Between 1959 and 1989, the Jewish population in the Soviet Union declined by about 900,000. In 1989 a majority of the 1.4 million Jews in the Soviet Union lived in the three Slavic republics. So, where did the 20 millions of Jews (tens of millions) come from, Stalin wanted to murder? However, Stalin's Jewish commissars murdered about 50 million non-Jews in the Soviet Union.
WAS STALIN MURDERED?
He planned to slaughter TENS OF MILLIONS of Jews ... Now, a compelling new book suggests he was killed by his own henchmen ... to stop this genocidal plot
It was the summer of 1952 and the heart was that of Andrei Zhdanov, a senior Politburo member who had died four years earlier. Zhdanov had supposedly died of natural causes, but Stalin was determined to suggest that he had been killed by the deliberate negligence of his physicians. It was part of the dictator' sinister attempt to convince the Soviet people and world opinion that a vast network of Jewish doctors, secretly backed by America, was conspiring to topple the U.S.S.R. by systematically killing its leaders. ...
Stalin was planning his own version of the Holocaust to rid the U.S.S.R. of its Jewish citizens. ...
For some time, Stalin had been looking for ways to attack the Soviet Jewish community. He feared they had greater loyalty to America because of family ties or because of U.S. support for Israel. And America's political and military power concerned Stalin greatly following World War II. ...
A man who ruled by the cult of the personality, Stalin could not countenance what he perceived as disloyalty and he had a tried and trusted way of dealing with opposition - he simply eliminated it.
He had already overseen the deaths of at least 43 million people from mass starvation, purges, executions and deaths in the labour camps.  Now, with characteristic ruthlessness, he planned to purge the Soviet Union of Jews.
In 1947, he launched a vicious anti-Semitic campaign. Thousands of Jewish intellectuals, scientists, political leaders and private individuals were interrogated, dismissed from their posts, publicly ridiculed, threatened and imprisoned.
Self-appointed citizen's committees would tour towns and villages to find out who were 'true' Russians and who were not.
All Jewish theatres were closed, and the statue of the Jewish composer Felix Mendelssohn was removed from the Grand Hall of the Moscow Conservatory. On Stalin's direct orders, Solomon Mikhoels, an internationally respected Jewish actor and director, was deliberately crushed beneath the wheels of a lorry and his body abandoned in a side street in a clumsy attempt to make it look like a road accident.
US-Präsident Harry S. Truman praised Stalin in 1948:
"I like old Joe Stalin. He is a nice guy."
DER SPIEGEL (Germany), 30/1999,p.120
By 1950, many other leading Jewish figures had been executed. Stalin was turning public opinion against the Jewish intelligentsia, but if he was to act against the entire Jewish population he would need 'evidence' of a major Jewish conspiracy against the U.S.S.R.
It was then that he remembered the death of Zhdanov and the letter from Dr. Timashuk with her concerns about his treatment. ...
His opportunity came in November 1950 when an eminent Jewish physician, Dr. Yakov Etinger, was arrested for uttering anti-Soviet thoughts to his friends and family. ...
Three months later, Etinger's interrogator wrote to Stalin claiming that Etinger had - conveniently - confessed to 'the villainous murder' of Alesandr Shcherbakov, a relatively minor figure in Stalin's government who had died in 1945. ...
Etinger's dubious confession was never recorded but it was enough for Stalin to sow the seeds of a conspiracy. In the summer of 1951, his underlings set about knitting together the murders of Zhdanov and Shcherbakov to create a plausible picture of a sinister network of Jewish saboteur-doctors. ...
The Soviet public was scandalised by the doctors' alleged crimes. Fantastic rumours circulated that Jewish doctors were poisoning Russian children, injecting them with diphtheria and killing infants in maternity hospitals. ... Public opinion was moving exactly where Stalin wanted it to and he pressed ahead with his plans to purge the Jews. Newly discovered documents show that in February 1953, Stalin authorised the construction of four large prison camps in Kazakhstan, Siberia and the Arctic north. Officially they were for all classes of dangerous criminals, but it is far more likely that Stalin was preparing for a second Great Terror - aimed at the millions of Soviet citizens of Jewish descent.
On March 1, 1953, just two weeks before the accused doctors were due to go on trial, Stalin collapsed at Blizhnaya, a country house near the Kremlin. He had earlier finished a dinner with four members of the Politburo, including his eventual successor, Nikita Khrushchev, and Lavrenti Beria, head of his muchfeared secret police. The party went on until the early hours of the morning and some time after that Stalin fell ill. He died on March 5, 1953, after four days of agony. His death was put down to a brain haemorrhage but has always been surrounded by controversy.
His son Vasily was said to have gone running into the dying man's room shouting: 'They've killed my father, the b*****ds'. Beria supposedly boasted to another Politburo member that he was responsible for Stalin's death, saying: 'I did him in! I saved all of you!' ...
A secret report by the ten doctors who attended Stalin in his last days which has lain unread and unpublished for 50 years reveals that Stalin suffered severe haemorrhaging from his stomach - a fact expunged from the official record at the time, perhaps because it suggested that he had been poisoned by someone slipping rat poison into his drink at that final dinner. Or perhaps Beria simply meant that he and the other Politburo members deliberately delayed calling for a doctor.
Daily Mail, London, May 23, 2003, page 36
"The claim that 5,7 million Jews were murdered, is not true. The number of Jewish victims can only range between 1 and 1,5 million, because there were not more Jews within Hitler's reach." --Ferdinand Otto Miksche, The End of The Present, (Das Ende der Gegenwart) Herbig, Munich 1990, page 107
*******

Will Trump Be Assassinated By The Shadow Government?

$
0
0
*******
*******
Is Donald Trump’s Life In Danger?
By Servando González
February 29, 2016
NewsWithViews.com
Once a government is committed to the principle of silencing the voice of opposition, it has only one way to go, and that is down the path of increasingly repressive measures, until it becomes a source of terror to all its citizens and creates a country where everyone lives in fear. —Harry S. Truman.
A few days ago, NewsWithViews Senior Political News Writer, Jim Kouri mentioned the possibility that somebody may have already carried out the first assassination attempt on Donald Trump.[1] In his article, Kouri mentions how Trump's personal Boeing 757, on its way from New York to Little Rock, Arkansas, had to make an emergency detour and landed at Nashville International Airport after the plane's captain reported he was experiencing problems with one engine. Fortunately, the plane landed safely.

Kouri is not the first to raise the possibility. In a July 2015 article, Dave Hodges mentioned the possibility that Donald Trump would be the victim of an assassination attempt.[2]

I think that the concerns raised by Kouri and Hodges are valid. In the CFR-controlled America, political assassination has become a common occurrence. The CFR conspirators have been very successful in assassinating anybody they see as a potential threat to their globalist designs.

CFR psychopaths inside the U.S. government have actively participated in the assassination of foreign leaders, among them Colombia’s leader Jorge Gaitán, Italy’s oil executive Enrico Mattei and Prime Minister Aldo Moro, the Dominican Republic’s President Rafael Trujillo, Panama’s Omar Torrijos, Chile’s President Salvador Allende, Congo’s Patrice Lumumba, South Vietnam’s Ngo Dinh Diem, Sweden’s Olof Palme, Pakistan’s Ali Bhutto and, more recently, Venezuela’s Hugo Chavez,[3] and Poland’s President Lech Kaczynski.

They also planned and carried out the assassination of American leaders, such as General George S. Patton, Admiral James Forrestal, U.S. Senator Joseph McCarthy, President John F. Kennedy and his brother Robert, civil rights leader Martin Luther King, and probably even FBI Director J. Edgar Hoover.[4]
They also carried out the assassinations of people who, for one or another reason, they have considered a potential threat to their plans. Among them are singer John Lennon, Chief of Naval Operations Admiral Jeremy Boorda, ex-CIA director William Colby, Clinton’s secretary of commerce Ron Brown, San Jose Mercury News’ journalist Gary Webb, George W. Bush’s biographer J.H. Hatfield, editor of George magazine and presidential hopeful John F. Kennedy, Jr., U.S. Army corporal and football star Pat Tillman, computer hacker and activist Aaron Swartz, journalist Michael Hastings, publisher Andrew Breitbart, members of SEAL Team 6, comedian Joan Rivers, and perhaps even authors Tom Clancy and Michael Crichton, just to mention a few.
The CFR globalist conspirators have always use assassination as a tool to control U.S foreign and domestic policy, and the CIA has been their main executor. Proof of this is that in 1976 President Gerald Ford signed Executive Order 11905 banning assassinations. It clearly stated: “No employee of the United States Government shall engage in, or conspire to engage in, political assassination.”
The assassination of General Patton
In the spring of 1944, General George S. Patton crossed the Rhine and pushed his victorious Third Army right up to the heart of Germany. His goal was to take Berlin before the Russians arrived. But CFR secret agents Roosevelt, Eisenhower and Marshall ordered Patton to back a hundred miles to await the arrival of the Red Army so that the Russians could capture Berlin and eastern Germany.
Finally, fearing that Patton may disobey their orders and try to take Berlin, the CFR conspirators cut the Third Army’s fuel and ammo lines and thus paralyzed the Third Army. Patton’s Third Army’s failure to advance into Germany resulted in prolonging the war for more than six months, which cost the U.S. Army the unnecessary deaths of many men. This resulted in the division of Germany into two countries, with East Germany becoming a Soviet-block state and Berlin becoming an international zone completely surrounded by East Germany.
Patton was so furious that he openly criticized his superiors for what he suspected was treason. After the end of the war, he had expressed his intentions of using his political contacts and influence to push for opening an investigation of the persons who gave the orders that paralyzed his Third Army on his route into Berlin. Finally, in December1945, following the CFR conspirators’ orders, OSS Chief General William Donovan (CFR), in complicity with Generals Eisenhower (CFR) and Marshall (CFR), ordered the assassination of Gen. Patton.
For many years, the possibility that his own comrades had assassinated Patton had been the motive of speculation. More recently, however, the suspicions seem to have been proved true. In his book Target Patton,[5] military historian Robert Wilcox provides a wealth of information proving that the death of General Patton was not accidental, and pointing to OSS chief, Gen. William Donovan, a secret CFR agent, as the person who gave the order to assassinate Patton. According to Wilcox, OSS head General William Donovan ordered a highly decorated marksman called Douglas Bazata to silence Patton.
But the most surprising thing about this story is that the essential facts reported by Wilcox are not new, because Bazata himself, perhaps tortured by is own conscience, already had told the story in detail, including the fact that Donovan had ordered the assassination.
On September 25, 1979, ex-OSS officer Douglas Bazata told the whole story in front of 450 invited guests, some of them ex-members of the OSS, in the Hilton Hotel in Washington, D.C. Bazata’s confession was published in a minor, small circulation newspaper.[6]
Unknowingly, at the very beginning of his book Wilcox himself provides the clue to the true motives of Patton’s enemies: Patton had told some trusted aides, … that he was going to resign —not retire as was normal for an exiting officer in order to retain pension and benefits— but resign so he would have no army restraints. He was independently wealthy and did not need the pension or benefits. He would then be free to speak his mind and give his version of the war and what had happened to him —the truth as he saw it. And his side would be a blockbuster. He knew secrets and had revelations, he said, he was sure would “make big headlines.”[7]
Of course, the conspirators realized that they could not run the risk of allowing Patton, a true American hero who gloried in the nickname “Old Blood and Guts,” to go public and destroy their carefully conceived plans. So, following their standard operating procedure, they ordered his assassination.[8]
The assassination of Senator Joseph McCarthy
In 1951 Senator JosephMcCarthy discovered widespread treason at the highest levels of the U.S. government, particularly in the CFR-controlled State Department. He wrote America’s Retreat From Victory, a book in which he accused the traitors. Among them State Department officials Alger Hiss (CFR) and Owen Lattimore (CFR), as well as Harry Hopkins in Franklin Delano Roosevelt’s White House and Harry Dexter White in the Treasury Department. He also accused General George Marshall (CFR) and President Eisenhower of treason.[9] Unfortunately, he made the mistake common at the time of accusing them of being Communists, not CFR agents.
As if on cue, President Eisenhower (CFR), Secretary of State Dean Acheson (CFR), John McCloy (CFR) and journalist Edward Murrow (CFR), joined forces in defending the traitors and vilifying McCarthy. The result was that, despite of the fact that most of the people he accused eventually were proven traitors, McCarthy’s gross mistake cost him his career and his life.[10]
Senator McCarthy was admitted at the Bethesda Naval Hospital April 28, 1957 for a knee injury he suffered while serving in World War II. He was put into an oxygen tent from which he was removed soon after because, though still serious, his condition was improving. Then his health took a turn for the worse, whereupon he died on May 2, with the official cause of death given as “hepatitis, acute, cause unknown” of a “noninfectious type”
Some authors, however, have offered a quite different explanation of his death. According to them, an assassin impersonating a nurse placed McCarthy again in an oxygen tent, through which he was administered carbon tetrachloride, and thus murdered.[11]
The assassination of President John F. Kennedy
In January 20 1961, John F. Kennedy (not a CFR member) was inaugurated President of the United States. His inaugural address was a patriotic call for advancing America socially and economically. In it, he challenged the Soviets to use the “wonders of science” for economic progress and space exploration instead of militarism.
As soon as he got into the White House, Kennedy began an aggressive program to “get America moving again,” (not too different to Trump’s current “Make America great again”) and declared that the 1960s would be the decade of development, stressing the importance of creating an abundant and growing supply of cheap energy.
Unfortunately, however, Kennedy ignored that the CFR conspirators had already decided that the 1960s would be the decade that would mark the beginning of energy scarcity, deindustrialization and non-development in America. Soon after, his own Secretary of State Dean Dusk (CFR), as well as Chester Bowles (CFR) and other CFR agents in the State Department and in the White House, publicly expressed their displeasure with the new policies.
The CFR conspirators’ irritation with Kennedy grew to a point that in July 1962 LIFE magazine featured an unusual exchange of letters between CFR honcho David Rockefeller and President Kennedy. In his critical letter, David showed his hostility to JFK by pointing to the president’s economic policies as the source of the country’s problems.
The true reasons, however, were because after he was sworn in as president Kennedy ignored the National Security Council’s structure. Then, after the Bay of Pigs debacle he not only fired CIA Director Allen Dulles, a senior CFR conspirator, but also told some close friends that he wanted to smash the CIA “into a thousand pieces and scatter [it] to the winds.”
Finally, he made what probably were his two biggest mistakes.
The first one was authorizing the Secretary of the Treasury to issue currency backed by the U.S. Treasury Department, not the Federal Reserve Bank. After Kennedy was assassinated, one of the first measures taken by PresidentLyndon Johnson after he was sworn was to order the recall and destruction of the bills.
Kennedy’s second biggest mistake was that, contrary to his CFR advisors’ opinion, he began taking measures to end the war in Vietnam. On October 11, 1963, he ordered his National Security Advisor McGeorge Bundy (CFR) to implement plans to withdraw 1,000 U.S. military personnel by the end of the year. This was believed to be the first step to a complete withdrawal of American troops from Vietnam
Firing Allen Dulles and mentioning that he wanted to smash the CIA into a thousand pieces was a slap in the Rockefellers’ face and JFK knew it. That was his not-so-subtle way of telling them that he was the one in command — or so he believed. Ignoring the NSC, and later creating his own Ex-Comm (Executive Committee of the NSC) during the Cuban missile crisis was another direct attack on the Rockefeller’s power. Finally, just the fact that he signed an Executive Order authorizing the U.S. Treasury Department to print silver certificates, that is, real money, not fiat certificates like the ones printed by the Federal Reserve Bank, and ordering the withdrawal of troops from Vietnam, were serious transgressions the CFR conspirators would never tolerate.
As several authors have shown, everything indicates that the main suspects for the assassination of President Kennedy were the Wall Street bankers and oil magnates whose interests JFK had been attacking.[12] According to Professor Donald Gibson, evidence indicates that from an unwitting tool of the CFR conspirators, after the Bay of Pigs[13] JFK turned himself into one of their strongest enemies.[14]
This explains why the one who got destroyed was not the CIA, but John F. Kennedy.
Trump’s threat to the globalist conspirators
Currently, Donald Trump has become not simply a potential threat, but a real and present danger to the globalist conspirators. Proof that Trump has become a nightmare for the conspirators is that he has been a subject of discussion at the recent secret meetings of the Council on Foreign Relations, the Bilderberg Group, and the World Economic Forum.[15] Just recently, the Washington Post’s Editorial Board called for the GOP leaders “to do everything in your power to stop Trump.”[16] One may wonder if “everything” includes assassination.
The fact that Trump has been consistently attacking George W. Bush for his handling of the 9/11 events indicates the possibility that, if elected president, he would reopen an investigation of the role of the Saudis in the event. But the Saudis are intimately linked to the Bushes and Cheney. A truly independent investigation would open a dangerous can of worms. To top it off, Trump has recently said that, it elected he would prosecute Hillary Clinton for her use of a private email server[17] — which most likely would lead to a new investigation of the Benghazi affair.
Moreover, we must remember that, like many Americans, Trump suspects that Obama is an impostor. He even went to the point of offering a 50 million dollar reward to Obama if he presented his birth certificate as proof of being a natural born American.[18] If he pursues this issue, it would open another can of worms very dangerous to the conspirators who put Obama in power.
Even worse, everything indicates that, if elected president, Trump plans to approach Putin and stop the current U.S. and NATO aggressive anti-Russian policies. This would mark a catastrophic defeat to the conspirators’ globalist designs. No wonder they are horrified about the possibility of Donald Trump becoming the next President of the United States.
Recently, Twitter has been awash with threats on Trump’s life.[19] But those have not been the only threats. In October, after an unidentified woman called the Worcester Telegram & Gazette mentioning the intentions of the “Worcester gangsters” to “Kill Donald Trump” in Massachusetts, the Secret Service began providing protection to Trump.[20]
The most recent threat to Trump came from New York Times’ columnist Ross Douthat, who tweeted about how an assassination attempt could end Donald Trump’s presidential campaign. The tweet included a link to a video clip from the 1983 movie The Dead Zone, which features a character played by Christopher Walken attempting to gun down a political leader played by Martin Sheen.[21]
So, it seems that the only way the globalist conspirators can get rid of Donald Trump is by killing him. But how?
How will the CFR conspirators try to assassinate Trump?
We must discard up front the lonely nut assassin technique involving a Manchurian candidate psychologically programmed to kill. After the assassinations of JFK, his brother Bobby and Martin Luther King, it has become very difficult to fool the American people with that type of assassination.
Also, the type of suicide by shooting yourself 4 times in the head has become so evidently false that I don’t think that they will try it again.
Another option may be friendly fire. One of Trump’s Secret Service “protectors” may kill Trump accidentally while trying to save his life from an assassination attempt in which the would be assassin would also be killed — dead men don’t tell tales.
Would they resort to the oldest trick in the book: a heart attack? That would be an interesting possibility. But recent efforts to open an investigation on the death of J. Edgar Hoover — a powerful CFR enemy — and the current reaction of the public asking to open an investigation on the “natural death” of Justice Scalia indicates that this option would not work anymore.
So, given the circumstance, they may be forced to resort to a technique they have used over an over with great success: the airplane “accident”.[22] The best thing about an airplane “accident” is that it will take a long time to prove it was actually an assassination, and if someday it is proven, it will be too late to do anything about it.
Donald Trump, America’s last hope
Donald Trump is America’s last hope to solve in a peaceful, legal, civilized way the conundrum into which the CFR globalist conspirators have put our country and the world. As Americans who love this country, we must consider it a cardinal moral duty to defend and protect Trump’s life. But how can we do it? I think that the most effective way is to tell the CFR conspirators that things have changed in America and warning them that killing Trump is not a good idea.
We must tell them that we hate their New World Order. We must tell them that we will protect the Constitution against all enemies, foreign and domestic. We must tell them that we will defend our borders. We must tell them that we have discovered that the two parties are the two sides of the same coin. We must tell them that we have finally realized that their War on Terror is a hoax. We must tell them that we are sick and tired of sending our young men and women to fight unwinnable wars to protect the interests of corporations that are not even American anymore.
Finally, we must tell them in a clear way that we know who they are, we know where they are, we know what they are planning, and warn them that if they try to assassinate Trump there will be dire consequences to pay.
Send your e-mails telling them what we think to:
 
Servando is the uthor of Psychological Warfare and the New World Order and I Dare Call It Treason, and the DVDs Treason in America and Partners in Treason, all of them available at NewsWithViews.
© 2016 Servando Gonzalez - All Rights Reserved
Footnotes:
1. Jim Kouri, “Is Donald Trump in Mortal Danger?” NewsWithViews.com, February 6, 2016
2. Dave Hodges, “Will Donald Trump Be Assassinated By a Man with a Diary?” The Common Sense Show, July 23, 2015
3. Servando Gonzalez. “Hugo Chavez: Another Victim of Castro’s High-Tech Political Assassinations?” also “DID CASTRO KILL CHAVEZ?” Karanja’z Place
4. Peter Finn, “Sleuth Suspects J. Edgar Hoover's Murder,” The Washington Post, November 2, 1997
5. Robert Wilcox, Target Patton: The Plot to Assassinate General George S. Patton (Washington, D.C.: Regnery, 2008).
6. The Spotlight, October 15, 1979, p. 16
7. Wilcox, op. cit., p. 12, quoting Patton’s diaries, August 29, 1945.
8. For a more detailed account of Gen. Patton’s assassination see, Servando Gonzalez, Psychological Warfare and the New World Order (Oakland, California: Spooks Books, 2010), pp. 103-107.
9. Senator Joseph R. McCarthy, America’s Retreat From Victory: The Story of George Catlett Marshall (Boston: Western Islands, 1951). McCarthy and Patton were not the only ones who accused Eisenhower of treason. In his book 1963 The Politician, Robert Welch provided a wealth of information on how the CFR conspirators helped Eisenhower’s military career by pushing him up from being and unknown lieutenant colonel without much military experience to becoming the Supreme Commander of the largest military force ever organized. The CFR conspirators feared a Patton president for the same reasons they now fear Trump.
10. Medford Evans, The Assassination of Joe McCarthy (Boston: Western Islands, 1970), p. 113.
11. Rosemary Pennington, “The Destruction of Joe McCarthy,” National Vanguard, October 3rd, 2015, also, Dave Martin, “James Forrestal and Joe McCarthy,” rense.com, September 29, 2011
12. See, i.e., Jim Marrs, Crossfire: The Plot That Killed Kennedy (New York: Carroll & Graf, 1989).
13. Contrary to common belief, the CIA’s Bay of Pigs operation was a total success. Its true goals were to destroy the opposition against Castro, consolidate him in power and thus convince the reluctant Soviets that he was the anti-American Communist he claimed to be. See, Servando Gonzalez, “The Disinfo History of the CIA.” The Bay of Pigs PsyOp is studied in more detail in my book Psychological Warfare and the New World Order (Oakland, California: Spooks Books, 2010), pp. 193-200.
14. Donald Gibson, Battling Wall Street: The Kennedy Presidency (New York: Sheridan Square Press, 1994), p.72.
15. Jon Rappoport, “Trump catches attention of CFR, Bilderberg, Trilateral,” August 24, 2015
16. Editorial Board, “GOP leaders, you must do everything in your power to stop Trump,” The Washington Post, February 24, 2016
17. Anna Giaritelli, “Trump: As president, I would prosecute Clinton,” The Washington Examiner, February 22, 2016
18. Bob Unruh, “Donald Trump: Obama Rejected $50 Million For His Birth Records,” WorldNetDaily, May 28, 2015
19. Paul Joseph Watson, “‘Kill Donald Trump’: Twitter Explodes With Violent Threats,” InfoWars, September 22, 2015
20. Kristinn Taylor, “EXCLUSIVE: Secret Service Investigates Donald Trump Worcester Death Threat,” The Gateway Pundit, November 19 2015
21. Paul Joseph Watson, “NY Times Columnist Jokes About Assassination Attempt Ending Trump’s Campaign." Good news guys I've figured out how the Trump campaign ends,” InfoWars, February 25, 2016
22. See Sherman H. Skolnick , “The Secret History of Airplane sabotage,” [Part One], [Part two], [Part Three], [Part Four]
Servando Gonzalez, is a Cuban-born American writer, historian, semiologist and intelligence analyst. He has written books, essays and articles on Latin American history, intelligence, espionage, and semiotics. Servando is the author of Historia herética de la revolución fidelista, Observando, The Secret Fidel Castro: Deconstructing the Symbol, The Nuclear Deception: Nikita Khrushchev and the Cuban Missile Crisis and La madre de todas las conspiraciones: Una novela de ideas subversivas, all available at Amazon.com.
He also hosted the documentaries Treason in America: The Council on Foreign Relations and Partners in Treason: The CFR-CIA-Castro Connection, produced by Xzault Media Group of San Leandro, California, both available at the author's site at http://www.servandogonzalez.org
His book, Psychological Warfare and the New World Order: The Secret War Against the American People is available at Amazon.com. Or download a .pdf copy of the book you can read on your computer, iPad, Nook, Kindle or any other tablet. His book, OBAMANIA: The New Puppet and His Masters, is available at Amazon.com. Servando's book (in Spanish) La CIA, Fidel Castro, el Bogotazo y el Nuevo Orden Mundial, is available at Amazon.com and other bookstores online.
His most recent book, I Dare Call It treason: The Council on Foreign Relations and the Betrayal of the America, just appeared and is available at Amazon.com and other bookstores online.
Servando's two most recent books in digital versions only are The Swastika and the Nazis: A Study of the Misuse of the Swastika by the Nazis and the first issue of the political satire series OBSERVANDO: American Inventors.
E-Mail: servandoglez05(at)yahoo(dot)com

*******
Conspirators, the Next American President and Donald Trump
By Servando Gonzalez
September 14, 2015
NewsWithViews.com
“It’s tough to make predictions, especially about the future.” —Yogi Berra (attributed)
I know that making predictions is very difficult. I am also aware that most historical predictions have failed to materialize. On the other hand, I think that, for people who are not seers and don’t have a crystal ball, when you make a prediction, and it happens, it only shows that you have a closer-to-truth explanation of events.
So, knowing the pitfalls of making predictions, particularly about the future, I am making a prediction about the next President of the United States — if there is a next one, but that would be another story.
The next president of the United States has been already selected at the recent Bilderberg meeting in Austria. He will be a not-to-clever, but corrupt politician under the control of the bankers, oil magnates and CEOs of international corporations ensconced at the Council on Foreign Relations. He will be a member of the Republican Party.
Why do I think that the coming president will be a Republican? Because one of the most important things the CFR conspirators need to accomplish before turning the United States into a full-fledged totalitarian society is taking the guns from the hands of law-abiding American citizens.
 Granted, puppet impostor Barry Soetoro has advanced the cause of totalitarianism in America by leaps and bounds. Unemployment has grown, the economy is in shambles, and a veritable invasion of illegal aliens is making things worse. The so-called Obamacare — created to benefit Big Med and Big Pharma —will tax even more the limited resources of American workers.
Other valuable accomplishments of Soetoro’s are the success of CFR-backed gay politics: gay marriage, gays in the military, gays in Boys Scouts, and appointing more openly gay officials than any other president in the U.S. history. Of course, this is very difficult to understand if you ignore that the gay movement has wittingly become a spear point, a fifth column of the New Gay World Order the globalist conspirators are working hard to impose upon us.[1]
But there is something Soetoro, or any “progressive” Democrat cannot do: taking the guns from Americans. It he/she/it tries to ban and confiscate guns, it would trigger a shooting war. Therefore, as it happened after Katrina,[2] this has to be done by a “conservative” Republican as the reaction to a 9/11-like catastrophic event.
Of the many Republican candidates currently trying to get the Republican nomination, the only one willing and capable to do this job is Jeb Bush. Most likely he is the one already selected at the last secret Bilderberg meeting in Austria. So, the CFR conspirators, using the mainstream media which is under their full control, already had begun a pervasive brainwashing campaign to convince gullible Americans to give their votes to the presidential candidate they had already selected.
Of course, there’s nothing new about this. Those have been the hidden rules of the game for many decades, and now it was working again to perfection. But then, to the globalist conspirators’ utter surprise, an unexpected phenomenon arrived attempting to destroy their carefully crafted plans. This phenomenon, this anomaly, this disturbance in the Dark Force, is Donald Trump, and it seems that, knowingly or unknowingly, his main goal is to overturn the CFR’s apple cart. No wonder the CFR conspirators are so angry.
CFR agent John McCain provided the first indication that, contrary to the rest of the malleable candidates, Trump was a clear and present danger to the CFR conspirators. Just a few days after Trump began gaining popularity among American voters, McCain declared that Trump had fired up “the crazies” in Arizona with his immigration talk.[3]
McCain’s words opened the gates to a concerted attack on Trump. Since then, both CFR-controlled branches of the Repucratic Party and the CFR-controlled mainstream media are fiercely and tirelessly attacking him.
In just a few weeks, Trump displaced Putin as the focus of the conspirators’ hatred. In his detractors’ words, Trump’s followers are: the crazies, the fearful and the frustrated, the ones who feel themselves betrayed by the politicians and victimized by a changing world, the religious ultraconservatives, extremist white-rights groups, white nationalists, outright racists, the xenophobics, the haters, the intolerants.
A more accurate description of Trump’s followers, however, may be that they are the Americans who have awakened from their media-induced dream state and have become ware of the CFR conspirators’ secret, evil plan to destroy America and enslave the American people. And they are angry about it.
For reasons I have mentioned in a previous article,[4] I will never give my vote to an incumbent or to a candidate running for any of the two factions of the Repucratic Party. Trump is not an incumbent, but he is trying to get the Republican nomination. Now, if he loses the nomination[5] and, despite his promise to support the selected candidate,[6] decides to run as an independent he will surely get my vote. Why? For a few simple reasons:
First, he is a private citizen, he is not an incumbent, and he is not a professional politician.
Secondly, he is not a member of the Skull & Bones cult, the Council on Foreign Relations, or the Trilateral Commission. Moreover, he has never attended the secret conciliabula at the Bohemian Grove, the Bilderberg Group, or the World Economic Forum.
Thirdly, contrary to the Bushes, the Clintons, Soetoro and the rest of the globalist crowd, it doesn’t seem that Trump is eager to send young Americans to kill and die in foreign lands protecting the interests of transnational corporations who don’t see themselves as American anymore.
Finally, as far as I know, Trump is not gay, lesbian, transgender or bisexual, and he has never expressed his support for the New Gay World Order.
Even more important, I think that Donald Trump is the last hope we Americans have to solve this conundrum in a civilized, peaceful way.
I am aware of Donald Trump’s personal flaws, which, if anything, makes him more human. But we don’t need a saint in the White House. What we need is an American who loves his country and has the courage and integrity to faithfully execute the office of President of the United States, and will to the best of his ability, preserve, protect, and defend the Constitution of the United States. That’s all.[7]
According to a common belief created by the CFR conspirators, if Trump runs as an independent he will give Hillary the presidency. Actually, however, if Trump runs as an independent and Hillary is elected —which I doubt— it would not be because of Trump, but because of the votes of “conservative” Republicans who have more love for their treasonous party than for their country. I this happens, they, and only they, would be the ones to blame.
© 2015 Servando Gonzalez - All Rights Reserved
Footnotes:
1. One of the globalist conspirators’ goals is the destruction of the family as the ultimate social nucleus, and this is actually the secret goal of the gay marriage PsyOp. To learn it from some gay ideologues’ words, see, Urvashi Vaid, Lisa Duggan, Tamara Metz and Amber Hollibaugh, “What’s Next for the LGBT Movement? With victory in the fight for marriage equality in sight, what should LGBT activists focus on now?” The Nation, June 27, 2013.
2. After the hurricane Katrina devastated New Orleans in 2005, police and military thugs went door-to-door confiscating legally owned guns, mostly owned by Republicans. The gun-grabbers, however, didn’t have to pry the guns from their owner’s dead fingers. Like obedient sheeple, they peacefully surrendered their guns to their beloved President Bush’s storm troopers.
3. Allah Pundit, “McCain: Trump really fired up “the crazies” in Arizona with his immigration talk,” HotAir, July 16, 2015.
4. , Servando Gonzalez, “Voting is Treason,” NewsWithViews.com, November 15, 2014
5. I would rather say when he loses the nomination, because I am convinced that the treasonous Republicans will rather lose a presidential election than elect a President who may oppose the CFR’s secret agenda.
6. If Trump decides to run as an independent, the first thing he must to is to end his Republican affiliation. Once he is not a Republican anymore, there is no reason to honor his promise of supporting the Republican candidate.
7. I am not alone in my appraisal of Donald Trump. According to some of his supporters, “It's not that they are willing to look past Trump’s flaws to fix what they believe ills the country. It’s that those flaws are exactly what makes him the leader America needs.” See, Jill Colvin, “Fed-up and angry supporters let Trump defy political gravity,” AP, September 6, 2015.
Servando Gonzalez, is a Cuban-born American writer, historian, semiologist and intelligence analyst. He has written books, essays and articles on Latin American history, intelligence, espionage, and semiotics. Servando is the author of Historia herética de la revolución fidelista, Observando, The Secret Fidel Castro: Deconstructing the Symbol, The Nuclear Deception: Nikita Khrushchev and the Cuban Missile Crisis and La madre de todas las conspiraciones: Una novela de ideas subversivas, all available at Amazon.com.
He also hosted the documentaries Treason in America: The Council on Foreign Relations and Partners in Treason: The CFR-CIA-Castro Connection, produced by Xzault Media Group of San Leandro, California, both available at the author's site at http://www.servandogonzalez.org.
His book, Psychological Warfare and the New World Order: The Secret War Against the American People is available at Amazon.com. Or download a .pdf copy of the book you can read on your computer, iPad, Nook, Kindle or any other tablet. His book, OBAMANIA: The New Puppet and His Masters, is available at Amazon.com. Servando's book (in Spanish) La CIA, Fidel Castro, el Bogotazo y el Nuevo Orden Mundial, is available at Amazon.com and other bookstores online.
His most recent book, I Dare Call It treason: The Council on Foreign Relations and the Betrayal of the America, just appeared and is available at Amazon.com and other bookstores online.
Servando's two most recent books in digital versions only are The Swastika and the Nazis: A Study of the Misuse of the Swastika by the Nazis and the first issue of the political satire series OBSERVANDO: American Inventors.
E-Mail: servandoglez05(at)yahoo(dot)com
*******
Also See:
Are Suspicious 'Suicides' Really Government Murders?
(Part 1)
21 January 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/01/are-suspicious-suicides-really.html
and
(Part 2)
25 March 2013
and
What Happens in Iowa, Stays in Iowa!
08 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/what-happens-in-iowa-stays-in-iowa.html
and
Days Before the Two Candidates Are Known!
14 January 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/01/days-before-two-candidates-are-known-it.html
and
 Best Candidate for President? Donald Trump, Hands Down!
04 November 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/11/best-candidate-for-president-donald.html
and
 Will Donald Trump be the Next President?
(Part 1)
06 June 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/06/blog-post.html
and
(Part 2)
19 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/will-donald-trump-be-next-president.html
*******

What Do You Know About The Cold War?

$
0
0
*******
How Ronald Reagan Won the Cold War
by Lee Edwards and Elizabeth Edwards Spalding
29 Feb 2016
When he took office in January 1981, President Ronald Reagan looked around the world and was greatly troubled by what he saw. For more than three decades, the United States and its allies had striven to contain communism through a series of diplomatic, economic, and sometimes military initiatives that had cost hundreds of billions of dollars and tens of thousands of lives. And yet communism still controlled the Soviet Union, Eastern and Central Europe, China, Cuba, Vietnam, and North Korea and had spread to sub-Saharan Africa, Afghanistan, and Nicaragua.
Whatever its early success, it was clear that the policy of containment no longer worked. The president determined that the time had come to defeat communism based on a simple premise: “We win and they lose.” In his first presidential press conference, Reagan stunned official Washington by denouncing the Soviet leadership as still dedicated to “world revolution and a one-world Socialist-Communist state.” As he wrote in his official autobiography, “I decided we had to send as powerful a message as we could to the Russians that we weren’t going to stand by anymore while they armed and financed terrorists and subverted democratic governments.”
Based on intelligence reports and his lifelong study, Reagan concluded that Soviet communism was cracking and ready to crumble. He first went public with his prognosis of the Soviets’ systemic weakness at his alma mater, Eureka College, in May 1982. He declared that the Soviet empire was “faltering because rigid centralized control has destroyed incentives for innovation, efficiency, and individual achievement.”
One month later, in a prophetic address to the British Parliament at Westminster, Reagan said that the Soviet Union was gripped by a “great revolutionary crisis” and that a “global campaign for freedom” would ultimately prevail. He boldly predicted that “the march of freedom and democracy … will leave Marxism-Leninism on the ash-heap of history as it has left other tyrannies which stifle the freedom and muzzle the self-expression of the people.”
He directed his top national security team to develop a plan to end the Cold War by winning it. The result was a series of top-secret national security decision directives that:
–Committed the U.S. to “neutralizing” Soviet control over Eastern Europe and authorized the use of covert action and other means to support anti-Soviet groups in the region.
–Adopted a policy of attacking a “strategic triad” of critical resources—financial credits, high technology, and natural gas—essential to Soviet economic survival. The directive was tantamount, explained author-economist Roger Robinson, to “a secret declaration of economic war on the Soviet Union.”
–Determined the U.S. would no longer coexist with the Soviet system but would seek to change it fundamentally. The language, drafted by Harvard historian Richard Pipes, was unequivocal–America intended to “roll back” Soviet influence at every opportunity.
Taking its lead from these directives, the administration pursued a multifaceted foreign policy offensive that included covert support of the Solidarity movement in Poland, an increase in pro-freedom public diplomacy (through instruments like the National Endowment for Democracy), a global campaign to reduce Soviet access to Western high technology, and a drive to hurt the Soviet economy by driving down the price of oil and limiting natural gas exports to the West.
A key element of Reagan’s victory strategy was the support of anti-communist forces in Afghanistan, Nicaragua, Angola, and Cambodia. The “Reagan Doctrine” (a name coined by syndicated columnist Charles Krauthammer) was the most cost-effective of all the Cold War doctrines, costing the United States less than a billion dollars a year while forcing the cash-strapped Soviets to spend some $8 billion annually to deflect its impact. It was also one of the most politically successful doctrines in Cold War history, resulting in a Soviet pullout from Afghanistan, the election of a democratic government in Nicaragua, and the removal of 40,000 Cuban troops from Angola and the holding of UN-monitored elections there.
And then there was SDI—the Strategic Defense Initiative—dismissed as “Star Wars” by U.S. skeptics but which put the Soviet military in a state of fear and shock. A decade later, a top Soviet strategist revealed what he had told the Politburo at the time: “Not only could we not defeat SDI, SDI defeated all our possible countermeasures.”
By the time Reagan left office in January 1989, the Reagan Doctrine had achieved its goal: Mikhail Gorbachev, the last leader of the Soviet system, publicly acknowledged the failures of Marxism-Leninism and the futility of Russian imperialism. In Margaret Thatcher’s words, Ronald Reagan had ended the Cold War without firing a shot.
Lee Edwards, a distinguished fellow at The Heritage Foundation, and Elizabeth Edwards Spalding, professor of government at Claremont McKenna College, are co-authors of A Brief History of the Cold War.
*******
What was the Cold War?
Citation: C N Trueman "What was the Cold War?"
historylearningsite.co.uk. The History Learning Site, 25 May 2015. 19 Feb 2016.
The Cold War is the name given to the relationship that developed primarily between the USA and the USSR after World War Two. The Cold War was to dominate international affairs for decades and many major crises occurred – the Cuban Missile Crisis, Vietnam, Hungary and the Berlin Wall being just some. For many, the growth in weapons of mass destruction was the most worrying issue.
Cold War
A clash of very different beliefs and ideology – capitalism versus communism – each held with almost religious conviction, formed the basis of an international power struggle with both sides vying for dominance, exploiting every opportunity for expansion anywhere in the world.
Note that USSR in 1945 was Russia post-1917 and included all the various countries that now exist individually (Ukraine, Georgia etc) but after the war they were part of this huge country up until the collapse of the Soviet Union (the other name for the USSR).
Logic would dictate that as the USA and the USSR fought as allies during World War Two, their relationship after the war would be firm and friendly. This never happened and any appearance that these two powers were friendly during the war is illusory.
Before the war, America had depicted the Soviet Union as almost the devil-incarnate. The Soviet Union had depicted America likewise so their ‘friendship’ during the war was simply the result of having a mutual enemy – Nazi Germany. In fact, one of America’s leading generals, Patton, stated that he felt that the Allied army should unite with what was left of the Wehrmacht in 1945, utilise the military genius that existed within it (such as the V2’s etc.) and fight the oncoming Soviet Red Army. Churchill himself was furious that Eisenhower, as supreme head of Allied command, had agreed that the Red Army should be allowed to get to Berlin first ahead of the Allied army. His anger was shared by Montgomery, Britain’s senior military figure.
So the extreme distrust that existed during the war, was certainly present before the end of the war……..and this was between Allies. The Soviet leader, Joseph Stalin, was also distrustful of the Americans after Truman only told him of a new terrifying weapon that he was going to use against the Japanese. The first Stalin knew of what this weapon could do was when reports on Hiroshima got back to Moscow.
So this was the scene after the war ended in 1945. Both sides distrusted the other. One had a vast army in the field (the Soviet Union with its Red Army supremely lead by Zhukov) while the other, the Americans had the most powerful weapon in the world, the A-bomb and the Soviets had no way on knowing how many America had.
So what exactly was the Cold War?
In diplomatic terms there are three types of war.
Hot War: this is actual warfare. All talks have failed and the armies are fighting.
Warm War: this is where talks are still going on and there would always be a chance of a peaceful outcome but armies, navies etc. are being fully mobilised and war plans are being put into operation ready for the command to fight.
Cold War: this term is used to describe the relationship between America and the Soviet Union 1945 to 1980. Neither side ever fought the other – the consequences would be too appalling – but they did ‘fight’ for their beliefs using client states who fought for their beliefs on their behalf e.g. South Vietnam was anticommunist and was supplied by America during the war while North Vietnam was pro-Communist and fought the south (and the Americans) using weapons from communist Russia or communist China. InAfghanistan, the Americans supplied the rebel Afghans after the Soviet Union invaded in 1979 while they never physically involved themselves thus avoiding a direct clash with the Soviet Union.
The one time this process nearly broke down was the Cuban Missile Crisis.
So why were these two super powers so distrustful of each other?
America                                                  Soviet Union
Free elections                                           No elections or fixed
Democratic                                               Autocratic / Dictatorship
Capitalist                                                  Communist
‘Survival of the fittest’                               Everybody helps everybody
Richest world power                                  Poor economic base
Personal freedom                                      (secret police)                                
This lack of mutually understanding an alien culture, would lead the world down a very dangerous path – it led to the development of weapons of awesome destructive capability and the creation of some intriguing policies such as MAD – Mutually Assured Destruction.
*******
The Cold War Hoax
Part 1
By Servando Gonzalez
August 15, 2014
NewsWithViews.com
You lost the Cold War, get over it. —CFR agent John Kerry to Russians
Some Council on Foreign Relations’ secret agents are frantically calling for the beginning of a new Cold War with Russia. Unfortunately, most of America’s enemies in both branches of the Repucratic Party as well as some misguided patriots are very happy with the idea. Apparently they don’t realize that, despite disinformation on the contrary the Cold War actually was the most peaceful time in America’s recent history, because it was a carefully planed hoax. Actually, the Soviet Union was never a threat to the U.S. The USSR was nothing but an artificially created pseudo-enemy fully under the control of the CFR conspirators.
The creation of the USSR
The Soviet Union was an artificial creation of international bankers and oil magnates. Their purpose was to put Russia into an economic freezer —which they did for 60 long years— and curtail Tsar Nicholas II’s intentions of turning the country into a major oil competitor in the free market.
The main problem the conspirators had with Russia, apart from its efforts to become and industrialized nation, was that the Russians had discovered a large amount of oil in Baku, near the Caspian Sea in Azerbaijan. At the time, the Baku oil field was considered the largest known oil deposit in the world. By the early 1880s, Russian crude production reached 10.8 million, almost a third of U.S. production.[1]
At the time, Tsar Nicholas II had initiated the implementation of a series of reforms directed to change Russia from a medieval into a modern society, which included the emancipation of the serfs, the creation of a Duma —a national assembly—, and rural communes. These reforms would have encouraged the Russian people to think about the possibility of a benign government in which the people would democratically participate.
But some influential Wall Street bankers and oil magnates were not happy with these changes in Russia, and conceived another plan. In order to proceed with
their plan, John D. Rockefeller, together with fellow conspirators, like bankers
Mellon and Morgan and steel magnate Andrew Carnegie, plus several of America's robber barons, joined their resources for up to $50 million (an enormous sum at the time), and created the American International Corporation(AIC), a powerful cartel allegedly devoted to stimulate world trade. The truth, however, is that the AIC was created to fund the overthrow of Tsar Nicholas II by a small group of professional revolutionaries: the Bolsheviks.[2]
As expected, Rockefeller and his criminal associates of the American International Corporation (AIC), Andrew Mellon, J.P. Morgan and Andrew Carnegie, were deeply alarmed about the Russians challenging their ambitions of controlling the world oil supply, and they began conspiring to develop a plan to stop the Russians in their tracks.[3] They concluded that the only way to achieve their goal was to depose Czar Nicholas II, and the only way to accomplish that was through a “revolution.”
To this effect, between 1907 and 1910 the conspirators met several times with Russian revolutionary Leon Trotsky, already living in exile in New York, and with Vladimir I. Lenin, another Russian revolutionary living in exile in Zurich. Eventually the arch-capitalists struck a deal with the arch-anti-capitalists: in exchange for financing their “revolution,” the capitalists would be allowed to have a hidden hand in designing the economy of what was soon to become the Soviet Union —allegedly the staunchest anti-capitalist nation in the world.
With the help of the conspirators, Lenin returned to Russia with plenty of gold in his famous “sealed” train, and, soon after Trotsky, under the protection of President Wilson and Colonel House, followed Lenin path with more gold. This gold made possible the Russian “revolution.”
So, contrary to common myth, the ones who had disseminated the Communist plague were bankers from England, Europe and the U.S., among them the Rothschilds, Sir George Buchanan and Lord Alfred Milner (members of the Round Table, who had been instrumental in the creation of the CFR), the Warburgs, the Rockefellers and J.P. Morgan. With their investment, the conspirators had created a pseudo-enemy they controlled —to some extent. Soon after, the Soviet Union became the bogeyman the conspirators used for many years as a credible threat to manipulate and control the U.S. and other Western countries. The rest is history.
The Globalist Conspirators Keep Artificially Alive the Monster They Have Created 
The conspirators failed to foresee that Communism and Marxist economy are such a total disasters that, since the very beginning, the monster they had created never managed to provide for its own sustenance, and was always teetering on the verge of collapse. So, while ostensibly fighting to destroy it, they had to put all their ingenuity on keeping the Soviet communist monster artificially alive and kicking. To this effect, they injected him with trillions of dollars in aid.
In his massive scholarly work, Western Technology and Soviet Economic Development, and later in his National Suicide: Military Aid to the Soviet Union, and finally in The Best Enemy Money Can Buy,[4] professor Antony Sutton extensively documented how, militarily, the Soviet Union was kept alive thanks to massive technology transfer, mostly from the United States. Moreover, this technology transfer was not the result of the good work of Soviet spies, but of the treachery of CFR agents at the highest levels of the U.S. government.
Probably the two most outstanding accomplishments of the CFR conspirators were giving the Soviets the technology for producing, first, nuclear weapons and, later, for building better intercontinental ballistic missiles.
According to the official story, Soviet spies Ethel and Julius Rosenberg stole and gave the Soviet Union in 1950 the scientific documents necessary to create an atomic bomb. But this is simply not true.[5] Most likely the Rosenbergs, true Communist fanatics, ignored that their true role was paying with their lives to disinform the American people.] The Soviets didn’t have to steal the atomic bomb secrets because CFR secret agents infiltrated into the U.S. government gave the information to them in 1943 disguised under the Lend Lease program.[6]
Actually the Rosenbergs belonged to what Sun Tzu called “expendable agents,”[7] foolish spies designed to be caught. One of the uses of expendable agents is to distract the enemy’s attention from the real spies. The CFR conspirators at the highest levels of the U.S. government knew that the Rosenbergs were fake spies —which perhaps explains Truman’s rush to destroy the evidence by callously ordering their unnecessary execution.
Professor Sutton has also documented in detail the second case, the willful transfer of American technology to make Soviet ICBMs more accurate.[8] According to Sutton, the threat of annihilation of the United States and the West by intercontinental Soviet nuclear missiles would have never existed,
if President Richard Nixon and National Security adviser Henry Kissinger had heeded warnings in 1970 from its own Department of Defense and outside experts that the Soviets were lagging in missile production technology and required specific technologies from the West to MIRV[9] their fourth generation ICBMs.[10]
Sutton failed to mention, however, that both Nixon and Kissinger were CFR members. They failed to pay attention to the warnings not because they were ignorant or fools, but because the conspirators’ plan required that, in order to make the Soviet threat more credible, they have to give them this advanced technology.
The CFR Conspirators Give Eastern Europe to the Communists
General William Donovan, the man who the Wall Street bankers and oil magnates selected to direct the Office of Strategic Services (OSS), the US intelligence agency during WWII, was a millionaire Wall Street corporate lawyer. In 1929 he created his own law firm, Donovan, Leisure, Newton and Lumbard.
His right hand, Allen Dulles, was a Wall Street lawyer and senior member of the Rockefellers’ Council on Foreign Relations. Through his OSS office in Bern, Switzerland, Dulles kept an eye in the protection of the interests of CFR members. Sullivan & Cromwell, the law firm Dulles had worked for since 1926, had strong business ties with the I.G. Farben. It also represented the United Fruit Company and other Rockefellers’ interests. John Foster Dulles, Allen’s brother and partner in Sullivan & Cromwell, had close ties to Carmel Offie, William Bullitt, George Kennan, Paul Nitze and James Forrestal, all of them CFR agents or assets.
Most of the senior OSS members were secret CFR agents. Many of them later played important roles in the development of U.S. intelligence and national security policy for many decades.
Contrary to the prevalent myth, however, the OSS was not an intelligence agency working for the benefit of the American public. Actually it was the conspirators’ fifth column infiltrated into the U.S. armed forces to sabotage the efforts of true patriots like Patton to destroy the Nazi German war machine and win the war as soon as possible to save the lives of American soldiers.
But the CFR conspirators had other plans. Forced to fight the Nazi war machine because the monster they had contributed to create had turned into a Frankenstein’s monster, their secret plan was to substitute it with another monster they also had created: Soviet Russia.
It seems that the OSS’s true secret mission was to prevent the American military from winning the war too quickly and capture Nazi war criminals before the OSS provide ways for them to escape.[11] Their secondary mission was to make favorable conditions for the Soviets to get control over most of Eastern Europe. This perhaps explains why leftists and outright communist militants so extensively composed the OSS.
But there were some obstacles in the path of their plan. Despite of the fact that the CFR conspirators controlled a few senior Army officers like Eisenhower, Marshall and Ridgway, most of them were true American patriots who firmly believed that their mission was defeating the Nazis. Unfortunately, they were wrong. They ignored that the true goal of the war was protecting the conspirators’ investments in Germany and allowing the top Nazi criminals to escape justice.
At the time, not all ranking members of the U.S. military were under the control of the CFR conspirators, and Donovan immediately won several enemies, among them Major General George V. Strong, chief of the Army’s G-2, who openly expressed his lack of confidence in the new organization and proceeded to set up his own competing clandestine intelligence service.[12] Another enemy, probably most powerful than Gen. Strong, was J. Edgar Hoover, the director of the Federal Bureau of Investigation. The FBI was the government agency responsible for counterespionage, and Hoover, who had been doing a good job, was protecting his turf.
While most of the American military men were risking their lives fighting what they considered a just war for the noble purpose of liberating Europe from the Nazi scourge, the conspirators’ secret army, the OSS, was working in the shadows to protect the conspirators’ interests in Germany and helping high rank Nazi leaders to escape to South America with the help of the Vatican. And Donovan and his OSS men were there, not only to protect the Nazis, but also to keep an eye on loyal American officers to see they could not accomplish too early what they considered their war mission: defeating the Nazis.
The fact that some OSS members were also true American patriots who firmly believed their main role was fighting the Nazis is irrelevant. They had been recruited under a false flag and, wittingly or unwittingly, were helping American pro-Nazis in the U.S. government to help the Nazi thugs avoid paying for their war crimes.
Since the very creation of the OSS, Donovan was criticized by his tendency to hire leftists, fellow travelers and outright militant communists. Donovan dismissed these criticisms by insisting that the sole objective of his organization was defeating the Axis powers. “I’d put Stalin on the OSS payroll if I thought it would help us defeat Hitler,” he told one of his assistants.[13] But the evidence shows that, for some reason, the OSS seemed to have a soft spot for Communists. Donovan himself was known for saying that political leftists were among the most valiant OSS field officers in his espionage and sabotage branches.[14] His most trusted aide, Duncan Lee, was later found to have been a KGB spy all the time.[15]
On one occasion, FBI Director J. Edgar Hoover’s presented Donovan with dossiers containing factual evidence showing that three OSS employees had fought with the Abraham Lincoln Brigade during the Spanish Civil war and were affiliated with the Communist Party. When Hoover demanded their separation from the organization, Donovan dismissed the issue by answering, “I know they are Communists; that’s why I hired them.”[16]
It would be a mistake, however, to conclude that Donovan himself had any sympathy for leftists or communists. Following a policy carefully planned at the Harold Pratt House, the General was using leftists and communists as unwitting tools in preparation for the coming Cold War. Though in theory the OSS was simply an intelligence agency, it played an important role in helping the CFR conspirators implement their foreign policy decisions. As author R. Harris Smith noticed, the OSS was fully under the control of the CFR conspirators,
While Donovan diligently sought left-wing intellectuals and activists for the operational and research branches of the OSS, he saw no incongruity in appointing corporate attorneys and business executives as OSS administrators.[17]
© 2014 Servando Gonzalez - All Rights Reserved
Footnotes:
1. Daniel Yergin, The Prize: The Epic Quest for Oil, Money and Power, Part I (New York: Pocket Books, 1991), p. 59.
2. John Christian Ryter, “The Secret Life of AIC,” NewsWithViews.com, March 31, 2009.
3. Ryter, op. cit.
4. Antony C. Sutton, The Best Enemy Money Can Buy (Billings, Montana: Liberty House, 1986).
5. Most likely the Rosenbergs, true Communist fanatics, ignored that their true role was paying with their lives for unwittingly allowing the U.S. government to disinform the American people.
6. For a detailed account of the treachery see George Racey Jordan, From Major Jordan’s Diaries (Boston: Western Islands, 1965), pp. 72-106. Major Jordan’s accusations seem to have been substantiated many years later in a novel written in 1980 by Franklin Roosevelt’s son James Roosevelt. See, James Roosevelt A Family Matter (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1980).
7. Sun Tzu, The Art of War [translated by Samuel B. Griffith] (London: Oxford University Press, 1963), p. 146.
8. Sutton, The Best Enemy Money Can Buy, pp. 101-111.
9. MIRV, the capability of an intercontinental missile to fire more than a single warhead.
10. Sutton, op. cit., p. 101.
11. Actually, this was not a difficult mission for the OSS. Most OSS officers had links to corporations that traded with the Nazis or had cartel agreements with German companies. For a detailed study of how the OSS helped Nazis avoid punishment, see, Thomas M. Bower, The Pledge Betrayed: America and Britain and the Degasification of Post-War Germany (New York: Doubleday, 1982), especially Part 4.
12. Lyman Kirkpatrick, The Real CIA (New York: Macmillan, 1968), p. 15.
13. R. Harris Smith, OSS: The Secret History of America’s First Intelligence Service (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1972), p. 10.
14. Ibid., p. 11.
15. Robert Wilcox, Target Patton: The Plot to Assassinate General George S. Patton (Washington, D.C.: Regnery, 2008), pp. 139-140.
16. Smith, Ibid., p. 11. For detailed information about the OSS penetrated by leftists and Communists, see Smith, pp. 9-15.
17.  Ibid, p. 15.
Part 2
By Servando Gonzalez
August 29, 2014
NewsWithViews.com
A characteristic common to all intelligence officers, East and West, is that they have a special open-mindedness. For them nothing is impossible just because it is improbable. —Thomas Powers
The Bogotazo Riots and the Launching of the Cold War Hoax
Most books and articles about the CIA mention the Agency’s first two successful covert operations: the overthrowing of Premier Mossadegh of Iran in 1953 and the overthrowing of President Arbenz of Guatemala in 1954. Some of them spare a few paragraphs to mention the CIA’s alleged first mistake: its failure to predict the Bogotazo riots. But there is more about the Bogotazo affair than the CIA, Fidel Castro, and his CFR masters want us to know.
On April 9, 1948, Bogotá, the capital of Colombia, was the scene of violent riots, later known as the Bogotazo. The event that apparently unleashed the riots was the assassination of Colombia’s populist leader Jorge Eliécer Gaitán. The events coincided with the celebration in Bogotá of the Ninth International Conference of American States, which had opened its sessions on March 30, 1948, chaired by U.S. Secretary of State and Secret CFR agent General George C. Marshall.
The murder of Gaitán unleashed a frenzied, senseless orgy of killing, burning, and looting that destroyed most of the center of Bogotá and virtually cut it off from the rest of the world for two days. The riots took the lives of more than a thousand people. Before the riot ended 150 buildings had been burned down or severely damaged.
What none of the books about the CIA mention, however, is that the Bogotazo actually was the CIA’s first successful large-scale psychological warfare operation (PSYOP)[1] carried out on behalf of the CFR conspirators. In it they tested new covert warfare, propaganda and mind control techniques later employed in operations ranging from the assassination of President Kennedy to the 9/11, 2001 PSYOP.
Moreover, the Bogotazo operation was the event where the conspirators used for the first time their newly recruited secret agent: Fidel Castro
In early 1948, CIA’s talent spotters at the U.S. Embassy in Havana decided to recruit Fidel Castro as an agent provocateur and send him to Bogotá, Colombia, on a sensitive mission. Apparently Castro’s already impressive record as a gangster, assassin and psychopath convinced them that he was the right person they were looking to perform a delicate and important job.
In a book self-published in 1995,[2] Ramón B. Conte, a man who used to do some minor contract work for the CIA as a heavy,[3] mentions in detail how the Castro’s recruitment took place in early 1948, during a meeting at the mansion of Mario Lazo. Lazo was a U.S.-educated Cuban lawyer who represented most American interests in Cuba. Conte and another CIA operative were on a stakeout in a car parked across the street in front of Lazo’s house. They were armed and ready to intervene if Castro, known for his flaring temper and love for firearms, refused the offer and turned violent.
Castro attended the meeting accompanied by his friend Rafael del Pino Siero, a CIA asset who had been in the U.S. Army during WWII. Among the people who attended the secret meeting were Lazo himself, CIA officer Richard Salvatierra, CIA agent Isabel Siero Pérez,[4] former U.S. ambassador to Cuba Willard Beaulac, and two other Americans. Conte only identified them as Col. Roberts and a CIA officer known as Mr. Davies.
Some years after Conte published his book, I interviewed him over the phone. In the interview he added to the list of people who attended the meeting at Lazo’s home an important name he failed to mention in his book: William D. Pawley.[5]
At the time of the meeting Pawley, a millionaire businessman close friend of President Eisenhower, Allen Dulles, Dean Acheson and Robert Lovett (all of them CFR members) was U.S. ambassador to Peru and Brazil. He had been closely linked to the U.S. intelligence services since the times of the OSS, and was one of the main organizers of the Ninth Inter-American Conference that was planned to take place in April in Bogotá.[6]
According to Conte, a week after the initial meeting, Castro and del Pino met again with CIA’s Salvatierra, who had been assigned the job of Castro’s controller. In this second meeting Castro was assigned the code name Alex and told about his first assignment. It consisted in traveling to Bogotá, Colombia and, acting as an agent provocateur, participate in the assassination of Gaitán, which would be used as a pretext to provoke the riots known as the Bogotazo. The secondary goal of his mission was to plant false clues that would be used later to blame the Communists for the riots. The riots would help Secretary Marshall use the fear of communism as a threat to convince the delegates attending the Conference that the Communist menace was real.[7]
The Bogotazo PSYOP and the Cold War
Most Colombians who have studied the Bogotazo believe that the event was just a violent outburst in Colombia’s national politics. But, as I will show below, they are wrong. The Bogotazo was a typical false flag operation.[8] It was part of a large psychological warfare operation that had nothing to do with Colombia’s internal affairs. Indeed, a secret report about the riots made by Naval Attaché Col. W. F. Hausman, of the U.S. Office of Naval Intelligence, mentions that the riots had been initially planned to occur during the Pan American Conference in Rio de Janeiro in 1947, but the Brazilian police did a good job and dispersed the rioters before they did any harm.[9] The Bogotazo was the event that triggered the beginning of a PSYOP of enormous proportions: the Cold War Hoax.
An important clue to the disinformation techniques used in the Bogotazo operation is the fact that, though the CIA allegedly failed to inform Marshall about the possibility of riots, CFR secret agents in the field kept the Colombian press well informed in advance about that possibility. As Francisco Fandiño Silva, a known Colombian journalist, later recalled, “The American Embassy informed me that it had received reports that a bomb attack was to be made against the General [Marshall].”[10]
Following the same pattern of disinformation, on March 24, Gaitán received a disingenuous warning from Ambassador Beaulac, telling him that the Communists were planning to break up the Conference and that, if they succeeded, Gaitán’s Liberal Party most likely would be blamed for the events.[11]
Just a few hours after the Bogotazo riots erupted, General Marshall, CIA Director Adm. Hillenkoetter, U.S. Ambassador to Colombia Willard Beaulac, Colombia’s President Dr. Mariano Ospina, Secretary of the Presidency Rafael Azula, and other important witnesses concluded that the Bogotazo was a Communist operation instigated by the Soviet Union.
Puzzled by the Agency’s first intelligence “failure,” CIA officer Russell Jack Smith telephoned to a contact in Secretary Marshall’s office in the State Department and asked,
Where did the Secretary get the information that the rioting in Bogotá was a communist plot?” “Oh,” his contact said casually, “he just looked out of the window in his villa six or seven miles away and said, “The communists did it.”[12]
A few days later, on April 13, 1948, the Philadelphia Inquirer published an article under the title “Marshall Blames World Communism for Bogotá Revolt,” providing more elements in an effort to convince the American public that the assassination of Gaitán and the Bogotazo riots had been a work of the Colombian Communists with the support of the Soviet Union. In the days following the Bogotazo events, the CFR-controlled U.S. mainstream media launched a pervasive disinformation campaign to brainwash the American public into believing that the Bogotazo had been a Soviet-Communist operation and must be prepared to face similar events at home.
The Agent Provocateurs
On their way to Colombia, Castro and del Pino stopped first in Panama, where they were introduced to President Enrique Jiménez, where del Pino gave a violent anti-American speech.[13] Argentina’s president Juan Domingo Perón, who acted as a cutout to hide the true source of the money, provided the funds for Castro and Del Pino’s trip. Perón’s pro-Nazi activities have been extensively documented, and he was a personal friend of CFR senior agent Allen Dulles.
Fulfilling their role as agent provocateurs, once in Bogotá, Castro and del Pino openly distributed pro-Communist literature just a few days before the Bogotazo and kept Communist literature in their hotel room.
Some witnesses claim that about 4:00 p.m., just a few hours after Gaitán had been assassinated, they saw a street mob, leaded by Fidel Castro, shouting “A Palacio” [“To the Palace,” meaning the Presidential mansion]. According to the witnesses, Castro was carrying a rifle and boasted that he just had killed two priests. But, if he really said so, he was lying. No priests were killed during the Bogotazo.
In a effort to add credibility to the allegation that Castro was a Soviet agent, William D. Pawley, U.S. Ambassador to Brazil and a Conference delegate, declared to a U.S. Senate investigation that, while he was riding an official Embassy car the day the riots begun, he heard somebody on the radio saying,
This is Fidel Castro from Cuba. This is a Communist revolution. The President has been killed. All the military establishments are now in our hands. The Navy has capitulated to us and this revolution has been a success.[14]
Some authors have used Pawley’s words as the ultimate proof that at that early time Fidel Castro already was a Communist. But, as I mentioned before, this goes against the evidence. In the first place, because, according to Conte, Pawley had attended the meeting at Lazo’s home where the CFR conspirators recruited Castro. Secondly, because ten years later, Pawley played a key role as President Eisenhower’s personal envoy in trying to persuade Cuba’s President Batista to leave the country, thus opening the way for Castro grabbing power in Cuba in 1959.
Planting False Clues
Since their arrival at Bogotá, Castro and del Pino devoted an inordinate amount of time to plant false clues in an effort to implicate the Colombian Communists and the Soviet Union in the coming assassination of Gaitán and the riots.
On April 3, a few days before the opening of the Conference, Colombia’s President, Mariano Ospina and other foreign leaders were attending the evening performance a the Colon Theatre. Suddenly, a shower of leaflets dropped over the attendees. According to a report by one of the Colombian detectives who were present,
“These had been printed in abroad, were definitely Communist in style and revolutionary in phraseology and contrary to the democratic principles of our country, England and the United States.”[15]
With two other detectives, he proceeded to the gallery where he caught the two Cubans in the act of showering “the boxes and orchestra of the Colón Theatre with their revolutionary propaganda.” Detective number 6 took Fidel Castro and del Pino into custody and proceeded to their lodgings —room 33 of the Hotel Claridge. There the two Cubans voluntarily showed the detectives various documents linking him to various Latin American Communist leaders, and various Communist or leftwing books.[16]
According to the Report, the detectives asked for written authorization from their superiors to pick up Castro and del Pino’s passports and summon them to the Bureau of Detectives of the National Police for further interrogation on their Communist activities. Strangely, the permission was denied.[17] It seems that some important people needed Castro and del Pino free to continue doing their job uninterrupted.
Indeed, there are many things pointing to the fact that the Bogotazo riots were not spontaneous, but had been planned way in advance. Probably the most clear was that, a few hours before the assassination of Gaitán took place, the newspaper El Popular, of Barquisimeto, Venezuela, printed on its edition of April 9, 1948 (logically prepared the night before it was printed) the news of the assassination and the riots and released it to the public.[18]
The amazing fact was noticed and mentioned by other publications. A few days later, in April 14, another Venezuelan publication, El Gráfico de Caracas, reproduced a photocopy of the El Popular’s issue with the information. On April 29, a Colombian newspaper, El Siglo of Bogotá, also reproduced El Popular’s information.[19]
It was not a coincidence that the Bogotazo riots erupted while the Ninth Conference was taking place. In 1945, after the end of WWII, the American military-industrial complex and its Wall Street associates were desperately looking for a way to continue producing armaments and saw Latin America as a potential market for their products. They kept active the military bases the U.S. has acquired south of the border with the pretext of the war against the Axis, continued training officers from Latin American countries, and moved to standardize South and Central American military equipment along U.S. lines, in an effort to add the military field to Latin America’s economic dependency to the United States.
CFR conspirators infiltrated in the U.S. government emphasized Latin America’s importance as a safe source of basic materials from a geographic area where foreign powers could not interfere. The plan was to use the Latin American military as their praetorian guard to protect the natural resources that, according to their reasoning, rightly belonged to the CFR conspirators. The first step in that direction was the signing of a military alliance between the United States and the Latin American countries (with the exception of Uruguay, which refused to sign), the Rio Pact of 1947.
Most Latin Americans governments had signed the Pact with the hope that the U.S. would give them the economic help they badly needed — of which corrupt politicians hoped to steal a great part — in return for their political and military cooperation. But, a year later, the economic aid had not materialized, and the politicians were not happy. Now the U.S. had asked then to meet again in Bogotá to sign new treaties.
Cardinal among them was the creation of a new tool for political and economic domination, the Organization of American States (OAS), as well as a commitment to fight the new artificially created enemy: Soviet communism. A secret memorandum dated March 22, 1948, signed by George Kennan (CFR), Director of Political Planning at the State Department, mentions that the problem of Communism must be considered at the Ninth Conference, as well as anticommunist measures that will be prepared and implemented in the interamerican system.[20]
But, given their previous experience, most leaders of the Latin American countries were not eager to help the U.S. to reach its goal. This was evidenced during the first days of the Conference by the delegates’ reluctance to cave in to Marshall’s pressures. Particularly concerning to the delegates was the inclusion of a dangerous loophole in the OAS proposed Charter of Article 15, which stated: “No State or group of States has the right to intervene, directly or indirectly, for any reason whatsoever, in the internal or external affairs of any State.” This principle was supposed to apply not only to armed force, but also to any other form of interference or attempted threat. But the loophole specified that “measures” could be “adopted for the maintenance of peace and security in accordance with existing treaties.”
With the addition of this loophole, the CFR conspirators controlling the U.S. government guaranteed their right to intervene at will in Latin America, and the Latin American delegates were not pleased. But the sight of the angry mobs in the streets, the burning of the buildings, and the indiscriminate killing, proved to be more persuasive than Marshall’s arguments. The last day of the Conference the delegates not only unanimously approved the Charter creating the OAS, but also unanimously approved a document condemning international communism.[21]
After they had approved the creation of the OAS, some of the scared delegates still had the audacity to ask Marshall if there was any possibility of a “Marshall Plan” for Latin America. But, adding insult to outrage, Marshall answered that it was beyond the possibilities of the United States to finance such a plan. The capital required, he added, “must come from private sources.”[22]
The OAS Charter provided the legal mechanism for upholding the Monroe Doctrine. The U.S. controlled the majority in the OAS, including several Latin American votes, and this would guarantee their right to legally militarily intervene in the affairs of the OAS member countries. If the votes did not give the CFR conspirators the legal right to intervene, they reserved the right to do it unilateral just the same.
Most people who have studied the Bogotazo agree that the event that unleashed the riots was the assassination of populist leader Jorge Eliécer Gaitán, head of the Liberal party, by a mentally deranged young man, Juan Roa Sierra.
Just by chance, at the moment Gaitán was assassinated, Castro and del Pino were seated at a café just across the street. Conveniently, a few minutes after the assassination, an angry mob killed the suspect. Some time later is was known that Castro and del Pino had given him the money to buy the gun allegedly used in the assassination.
But just a perfunctory analysis of the Bogotazo events from the point of view of counterintelligence shows that it was a by-the-book false flag operation of the type carried out by the OSS and later the CIA on behalf of their CFR masters. Actually, Roa Sierra was a Manchurian candidate, a psychologically programmed assassin, similar to Lee Harvey Oswald and Sirhan Sirhan. Like in the cases of Oswald and Sirhan, most likely Roa Sierra didn’t shoot the gun.
Actually, the Bogotazo was a key part of a larger psychological warfare operation (PSYOP), whose ultimate goal was to scare the American and Latin American people with the fear of the Communism —an artificially created enemy to substitute the artificially created previous enemy that has just disappeared: Nazism.
The propaganda and sabotage techniques used during the Bogotazo — broadcasting fake reports inciting the rioters, distribution of leaflets implicating the Communists, etc. —, seem to have been carried out following the OSS guidelines for psychological warfare operations as specified by the OSS Morale Operations Branch.[23] The main goal of the OSS Morale Operations Branch was to create unfounded panic, intimidate, demoralize, and spread confusion and distrust among enemy civilians and military forces. A secondary goal was to stimulate feelings of resentment and rebellion among occupied populations. Morale Operations used “black”[24] propaganda, in which the source of the information is disguised.
Adding weight to that suspicion is the fact, ignored by most authors who have studied the Bogotazo, that two weeks before the event the FBI office in Colombia had been dismantled. According to a secret document, all FBI officers (FBI officers worked at the U.S. embassies under the cover of “legal attachés”) were recalled to the U.S. and would not to be replaced.[25]
Before the creation of the CIA, the FBI was the U.S. agency in charge of espionage and counterespionage in Latin America, and it was doing a good job. Despite his personal shortcomings, Hoover was a patriot that always worked for America. Proof of it is that the FBI was one of the few key agencies of the U.S. government the CFR conspirators were unable to penetrate. Therefore, dismantling the FBI office at the U.S. Embassy on Colombia most likely was a precautionary measure to avoid non-controlled, inquisitive minds witnessing an event they would easily have found out was a CIA dirty trick.
Soon after the riots, the Colombian government asked the British Scotland Yard to investigate the events. To this effect, the British authorities sent to Colombia a team of investigators, formed by Chief-Inspector Peter Beveridge, Chief-Inspector Albert Tansil, and Sir Norman Smith, ex-Chief of the British Police in India. Despite some inexactitudes, mostly due to lack of support from the Colombian authorities, poor knowledge of the language and the country, as well as the short time provided for the investigation, the report is a valuable source of information about the Bogotazo and the assassination of Gaitán.
When Dr. Jordán, Chief Investigator of the Colombia’s Justice Minister first met the Scotland Yard investigators, he presented them with a written summary of the salient facts of his investigation as well as his tentative conclusions. According to Jordán, he was in the possession of documentation implicating the Communists in the assassination of Gaitán. But, when Dr. Jordán finally gave the documents to the British, “they proved to consist of two files, of scanty material, without opinion or nothing,” proving little about the Communists’ participation in the events.[26]
Despite Dr. Jordan’s efforts to implicate the Communists in Gaitán assassination, the British investigators categorically stated that, “We are fully convinced that no political party, as such, had any part in the murder.”[27] They reached that conclusion based, on the patent lack of readiness of the political parties, whether Conservative, Liberal, or Communist, to suppress or to take full political advantage of the revolt which flared up after the murder. “We state, therefore, our definitive opinion, that no political Party, can have had any connection with the murder.”[28]
In conclusion, everything indicates that that the riots, which apparently were spontaneously provoked by the assassination of Gaitán, had been planned and prepared in advance, and the assassination was only a cover to hide its true causes. The assassination of Gaitán and the Bogotazo were the result of a carefully planned psychological warfare operation carried out by the CIA on behalf of its CFR masters. This explains why so many known key participants in the Bogotazo were linked to the CFR, the OSS or the CIA. The known ones were:
Gen. George C. Marshall (CFR), U.S. Secretary of State, Chief U.S. delegation to 9th Conference.
Gen. Matthew B. Ridgway (CFR), military advisor to U.S. delegation to 9th Conference
Averell Harriman (CFR), U.S. Secretary of Commerce.
William Wieland, protégé of Sumner Welles (CFR), probably intelligence liaison between CIA and State Dept., later Castro supporter
Roy Rubbotom, U.S. State Department, later Castro supporter
William Pawley, friend of Allen Dulles, links to CIA, attended Lazo meeting.
Willard Beaulac, U.S. ambassador to Colombia, ex-US. Ambassador to Cuba, suspected of attending Lazo meeting.
Norman Armour (CFR, OSS), Assistant Secretary of State, U.S. delegate to 9th Conference.
Richard Salvatierra, CIA officer, attended Lazo meeting.
John Mepples Spiritto, CIA officer, project ARTICHOKE, previously had tried to buy Gaitán.
John C. Wiley (CFR, OSS), former U.S. Ambassador to Colombia.
Robert Lovett (Skull & Bones), U.S. Acting Sec. of State, close links to CFR.
Rafael del Pino Siero, U.S. intelligence asset, attended Lazo meeting
Fidel Castro Ruz, CIA agent, later became an important CFR asset.
Apart from the information I have provided above, the activities during the Bogotazo of so many people linked to the U.S. intelligence services and the CFR is a strong indication that the Bogotazo was not a random outburst of violence but a false flag operation, the key element of a carefully planned and executed major PSYOP called the Cold War —the first of many to be carried out by the CIA and the CFR conspirators in their long battle against the American people and the peoples of the world in the pursuit of their goal of world domination.
The methodology used in this PSYOP followed the Hegelian principle of thesis-antithesis-synthesis,[29] in which the Bogotazo operation was the scaring antithesis used as a threat to force the American and Latin American people into accepting the scaring new synthesis called the Cold War.
The Bogotazo operation was the pretext used by the CFR conspirators to initiate what is known as “the War Scare of 1948,”[30] a PSYOP that marked the true beginning of the Cold War in the Western Hemisphere. The Cold War proved to be extremely beneficial to CFR’s oil magnates, Wall Street bankers and CEOs of transnational corporations who, as they had done with Nazi Germany, now were making money selling their goods to both parts of the Cold War conflict.
Just a few years later, CFR conspirator Nelson Rockefeller was frantically selling the idea of building nuclear shelters in every American building,[31] and American schoolchildren were hiding under their desks rehearsing for a coming nuclear attack. The time for Americans to live under a permanent state of fear had arrived.
[For a full, detailed analysis of the Bogotazo PsyOp, see my Psychological Warfare and the New World Order: The Secret War Against the American People.]
© 2014 Servando Gonzalez - All Rights Reserved
Footnotes:
1. Psychological warfare operations (PSYOPs: Operations to convey selected information to foreign or domestic audiences to influence their emotions, motives, objective reasoning, and ultimately the behavior of foreign governments, organizations, groups, and individuals. The purpose of PSYOPs is to induce or reinforce attitudes and behavior favorable to the originator's objectives.
2. Ramón B. Conte, Historia oculta de los crímenes de Fidel Castro (Self-published, n.p., 1995), pp. 15-30.
3. Heavy, a.k.a. slag. CIA vernacular for assets of girth and muscle the Agency uses in situations where brute force is more important than wit.
4. In his book Inside the Company: CIA Diary (New York: Bantam, 1989), CIA defector Philip Agee identifies Isabel Siero Pérez, del Pino’s aunt, as a CIA’s Miami station agent, p. 396.
5. You may read a transcript of Conte’s interview (in Spanish) in my website. There is a link at the end to the interview’s recording.
6. Information on Pawley in Mario Lazo, Dagger in the Heart: American Policy Failures in Cuba ( New York: Twin Circle, 1968), pp. 144-145, 170-171.
7. CFR member George Marshall already had experience in the creation of the Communist menace: he was instrumental in the implementation of a plan developed by the CFR conspirators to betray Chiang Kai-Shek was betrayed and give China in a silver plate to Mao Tse-tung and his “agrarian reformers.”
8. False flag operation: an operation designed to be untraceable to the sponsor due to misrepresentation or disguise. Usually, false clues are planted to implicate another group or country as the perpetrator of the operation.
9. Hausman’s Report mentioned in Gonzalo Sánchez, (ed.), Grandes potencias: El 9 de abril y la violencia (Bogotá: Planeta, 2000), p. 47.
10. Francisco Fandiño Silva, La Penetración Soviética en América y el 9 de abril, (Bogotá: Nuevos Tiempos, 1949).
11. U.S. News & World Report, April 23, 1948, pp. 13-14.
12. Russell Jack Smith, The Unknown CIA: My Three Decades with the Agency (Washington, D.C.: Pergamon-Brasseys, 1989), p. 38.
13. Confidential Dispatch No. 336, April 26, 1948. Embassy, Havana.
14. Activities of Wieland, Rubbotom and Castro in Bogotá, Colombia, in Hearings, Communist Threat to the U.S. Through the Caribbean, Senate Internal Subcommittee, 86th-87th Congress, Parts 1-12, pp. 725, 756, 806; also in Mario Lazo, Dagger in the Heart (New York: Twin Circle, 1968), pp. 144-145).
15. Nathaniel Weyl, Red Star Over Cuba (New York: Hillman/MacFadden, 1960), p. 75.]
16. Ibid
17. Ibid
18. In the same fashion, a TV reporter was giving the news of the collapse of WTC building 7 while the building was seen standing in the background.
19. Angel Aparicio Laurencio, Antecedentes desconocidos del nueve de abril (Madrid: Ediciones Universal, 1973), p. 39.
20. Kennan’s memorandum mentioned in Gonzalo Sánchez, (ed.), Grandes potencias: El 9 de abril y la violencia (Bogotá: Planeta, 2000) p. 50.
21. See, The Final Act of Bogotá, Foreign relations of the United States (FRUS), 1948, Volume IX. http://www.icdc.com/~paulwolf/gaitan/finalactofbogota.htm.]]]
22. Marshall quoted in Peter H. Smith, Talons of the Eagle: Dynamics of U.S. – Latin American Relations (New York: Oxford University Press, 1996), p. 148. Nelson Rockefeller (CFR) was the main promoter of using private sources of capital for Latin American economic “aid.”
23.  See, OSS Sabotage Instructions, May 7, 1943.
24. Black: Said of any operation whose true source is hidden or falsely attributed to another source. In the case of propaganda, “black” also means that the content is mostly fake or forged. Black propaganda could be either true or false. For morale operations purposes, the truth or falsity was irrelevant. It was the effect on the target’s mind that mattered.
25. FBI office dismantled, in Secret, No Distribution, Memo of March 6, 1947.
26. Sir Norman Smith, Scotland Yard Report, p. 6.
27.  Ibid., p. 7.
28. Ibid., p. 8.
29. German philosopher Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel (1770-1831) made change the cornerstone of his philosophical system, which he called Dialectics. According to Hegel, an idea or principle — which he called the thesis— is challenged by its opposite —the antithesis. Eventually, from this conflict emerges a new idea or principle, which is a synthesis of both.
30. One of the best sources of the War Scare is Frank Kofsky’s, Harry S. Truman and the War Scare of 1948 (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1993).
31. After a visit to India in 1973, Jawaharlal Nehru told some friends, “Governor Rockefeller is a very strange man. All he wants to talk about is bomb shelters.” Nehru quoted in Newsday, December 12, 1973.
Part 3-A
By Servando Gonzalez
October 11, 2014
NewsWithViews.com
You can either start with fiction or with documentary. But whichever one you start with, you will inevitably find the other. —Jean-Luc Goddard.
The event known as the Cuban missile crisis, to many people the greatest of all Cold War crises, is a milestone in the history of the Cold War. “Generations to come,” praised Time magazine, “may well count John Kennedy’s resolve as one of the decisive moments of the 20th Century.” Yet there is perhaps no single event in recent history as contradictory and puzzling as this one.
The Missile Crisis That Never Was
The official story, parroted over and over in most books and articles about the Cuban missile crisis, tells that on October 15, 1962, CIA’s top photo interpreter Dino Brugioni analyzed the pictures taken by a U-2 flying over Cuba and discovered that the Russians were building what looked like long-range missile sites on Cuban soil. It was not until October 16, however, that President Kennedy was shown the U-2 photos that, according to CIA officers and Kennedy’s close advisors, provided irrefutable proof that the Soviets were installing ground-to-ground missile bases with nuclear capability in the Island.
There is, however, a big problem with that theory. Despite most of what has been written, about the Cuban missile crisis, some key questions about the crisis have never been properly answered. I am offering below a few pieces of the puzzle that are still missing, but these are not the only ones.
Question 1. Soviet Premier Nikita Khrushchev wrote in his Memoirs that the idea of placing nuclear missiles in Cuba to defend the Castro government from an imminent American attack came during a trip he made to Bulgaria from 14 to 20 May, 1962. But this is difficult to believe, because just a few days earlier, on May 5, Cuban Ambassador Faure Chomón definitely had returned from Moscow and his successor, Carlos Olivares, who was appointed twelve days later, still remained in Cuba without presenting his credentials to the Soviet government. The unexpected replacement of Chomón and his urgent return to Cuba coincided with the discovery and subsequent neutralization by Fidel Castro of a coup attempt to overthrow him. The failed coup had been coordinated by the Soviet ambassador in Havana, Sergei Kudryavtsev, and seconded by several key members of the traditional pro-Soviet Cuban Communist Party.
Ambassador Kudryavtsev, whom John Barron in his book KGB calls a “master of subversion,” had another job besides being ambassador. His real mission was to act as a senior Soviet KGB intelligence officer in Havana and prepare the conditions for a takeover by the Russians after overthrowing Castro. But Castro discovered the plot and summarily expelled Kudryavtsev from Cuba along with a group of his embassy officials and KGB agents on 20 May 1962. However, as senior Soviet intelligence officers never act motu proprio, but strictly by-the-book, one can safely surmise that Kudryavtsev’s anti-Castro activities followed orders from the top Soviet leadership, most likely from Khrushchev himself.
In diplomatic language, when two countries respectively withdraw their ambassadors, it means that the relations are at a very low point, usually close to a breakup. Why was precisely after a failed attempt to overthrow Fidel Castro and when relations between the two countries were so unfriendly, that Khrushchev got the wild idea of placing nuclear missiles in Cuba allegedly to protect Castro from an American attack? Was Khrushchev crazy?
Question 2. According to most American authors who have studied the crisis, a key element in its successful solution by President Kennedy was the important role played by Oleg Penkovsky, a colonel in Soviet military intelligence (GRU), who had been recruited by the CIA. It was a remarkable coincidence, these authors said, that a few months before the crisis Penkovsky had provided the CIA with a copy of the operating manual of exactly the same type of missiles that the Soviets later emplaced in Cuba. Penkovsky was arrested by the Soviet authorities a day before the beginning of the crisis and allegedly sentenced to death and executed some months later. Even today, the recruitment of Penkovsky is considered one the CIA’s greatest successes, which contributed greatly to restoring the lost prestige after the resounding failure of the Bay of Pigs invasion.
But top officials of the MI6, the British intelligence service, had a very different opinion about Penkovsky. To them, who were those who made the first contacts with the Soviet officer and then passed him on to the CIA, Penkovsky was the main element of a disinformation operation of the Soviet intelligence. Apart from the irregular way in which Penkovsky was recruited — Penkovsky tried on several occasions to be recruited by British intelligence, but they always refused because they suspected he was an agent provocateur — there is strong evidence indicating that, from their first contact with the British, Soviet intelligence was aware of Penkovsky’s activities.
For this and other reasons, Peter Wright, the famous British spy hunter and former deputy director of MI5 (the British FBI), was convinced that Penkovsky was a key element in a Soviet disinformation operation.
So if, as it appears, Penkovsky actually worked for the Soviet intelligence services, or they had him under surveillance because from the beginning they knew of his treachery, why did they allow Penkovsky to give the CIA such detailed information about exactly the type of missiles they planned to deploy in Cuba, which later helped the CIA to identify them on Cuban soil?
Question 3. According to secret Soviet government documents, made available to researchers a few years ago, Soviet officers in Cuba had complete autonomy over the use of nuclear missiles, to the point where they can fire them at will without the express permission of Moscow. If true, this would have violated all procedures established by the Soviet army on the use of nuclear weapons.
The Soviets had always been very careful in the control of their nuclear weapons, to the point that, although the Army officers had control over rocket artillery missiles with conventional warheads, the nuclear warheads remained apart, controlled by special units of the KGB Spetsnaz. According to their standard operating procedure, the mating of nuclear warheads to missiles was made only following express orders strictly validated by the Soviet high command after having been authorized by the Prime Minister. These regulations were in place before the crisis and maintained thereafter. So, why the Soviets, as alleged in the case of the missiles in Cuba, so drastically violated strict security procedures established by the Soviet military doctrine on the use of nuclear weapons?
Question 4. In its issue of November 24, 1990, the French magazine Le Monde published parts of a secret speech that Fidel Castro addressed to the Central Committee of the Cuban Communist Party in 1968, in which he confessed his "immense love" for the nuclear missiles the Soviets had deployed on Cuban soil. It is known that, on October 22, at a critical moment of the crisis, Cuban army units assaulted and occupied for several hours a battery of Soviet anti-aircraft missiles in the eastern part of Cuba, until Soviet special units outmanned them, with heavy casualties on both sides. That was the battery that shot down a U-2 during the crisis. The unusual fact was later published in the Washington Times by Daniel Ellsberg, then an intelligence analyst for the U.S. Defense Department, and later confirmed by Adrian Montoro, ex-director of Radio Havana Cuba, in an article he wrote for the New York Times.
Those who participated in the crisis on the U.S. side repeatedly mentioned Khrushchev's inexplicable folly of placing nuclear missiles in Cuba. All agreed that just a single nuclear missile fired from Cuban territory to the United States would have caused a devastating U.S. military response directed not only against Cuba, but also against the Soviet Union. Why Khrushchev, who was no fool and knew perfectly well the extraordinary love that trigger-happy Fidel felt for the nuclear missiles, placed so dangerously close to Castro the nuclear trigger that could have brought the total destruction of the Soviet Union?
Question 5. According to the official story, what finally convinced Castro, who at first was not all happy with the idea of accepting the missiles, was the confirmation that President Kennedy was planning an attack on the island. The ultimate proof was shown to him in the confidential notes of a conversation that Soviet journalist Alexei Adzhubei, Izvestia’s editor and Khrushchev’s son-in-law, had with President Kennedy a few days earlier while he was vacationing in Hyannis Port, Massachusetts. According to Adzhubei, Kennedy had brought up the subject of the Soviet invasion of Hungary in 1956, reminding him that at that time the United States had not intervened. This, according to the Soviets, was a clear warning that when the Americans invaded Cuba, the Soviets, in return, should refrain from intervening.
The problem with this theory is that some people who were at the meeting have denied time and again that Kennedy had mentioned Hungary during the interview, much less that the U.S. had plans for an invasion of Cuba. All information in this regard seems to confirm the veracity of the American version. Apparently the secret report was a lie specially designed by Adzhubei to convince Castro to accept the missiles. Apparently, Khrushchev was so eager to convince Castro into accepting the missiles that he went to the point of lying about an impending American attack that did not really exist. But, why?
Question 6. Available evidence shows that what Fidel Castro really wanted at the time was that the Soviet Union admitted Cuba to the Warsaw Pact or at least sign a separate military treaty with the Cuban government. But, if one is to believe Premier Khrushchev, the best solution to protect the government of Fidel Castro from a U.S. invasion was installing nuclear missile bases in Cuba.
According to secret Soviet documents brought to light a few years ago, when Americans discovered what looked like strategic missile bases on Cuban soil, the missiles were ready to be fired, and nuclear warheads were already in the island, ready to be mated with the missiles. But, surprisingly, as the crisis went on, Khrushchev gave in to U.S. pressure and withdrew the missile bases from Cuba. In his memoirs, the Soviet leader claims that his decision was because he had received concrete evidence that Kennedy had decided to launch an attack on Cuba.
So, according to his logic, Khrushchev placed nuclear missiles in Cuba to deter or repel an American attack on the island, and then withdrew them when he was told that the U.S. was going to attack Cuba. Khrushchev’s strange behavior cannot be explained by cowardice or incompetence, because the Soviet military often demonstrated its courage and military expertise of war technology in the war against the Nazis. Why, then, Khrushchev withdrew the missiles at the precise moment when they could have been used for the purpose for which they allegedly were installed in Cuba? This explanation does not make any sense.
Question 7. Most American authors who have studied the crisis believe that Khrushchev made a huge miscalculation when he placed nuclear missiles in Cuba, because instead of discouraging an American attack, actually encouraged it. But there are elements that suggest that, contrary to what these authors’ claim, Khrushchev did not commit any error in calculation.
In its National Intelligence Estimate (NIE) circulated in September 1962, just a few days before the crisis, CIA intelligence analysts, despite all the rumors that the Soviets were building strategic missile bases in Cuba, refused to consider this possibility. The main reason, experts and intelligence analysts from the CIA concluded, was that the Soviets had never transferred nuclear warheads beyond its borders. Another important reason was that Khrushchev had to be aware that the installation of nuclear missile bases in Cuba would trigger a devastating U.S. attack on the island. Soviet secret documents and references made in Khrushchev's own memoirs seem to confirm this view. If this is true, why did Khrushchev order building what looked like strategic nuclear missile bases in Cuba in the knowledge that, far from discouraging a U.S. attack, this would surely provoke it?
Question 8. One aspect that caught the attention of CIA’s intelligence analysts was that the Russians had not tried to conceal or camouflage the missile bases. In photos taken by U-2s, the bases are perfectly defined, without any camouflage concealing them. This is very strange, because the Soviets were known experts at masking and disguising. Maskirovka always constituted an important aspect of Soviet military tactics, and camouflaging techniques always received special attention in Soviet military schools. However, it was not until October 23, a day after Kennedy announced on television the discovery of strategic missile bases on Cuban soil, that the Soviets began hastily attempting to camouflage them.
The fact that the Soviet officers used no camouflage to mask the missile bases caused deep unease among some senior Cuban officials, including Che Guevara. In a secret speech delivered months later to senior members of his “Communist” party,” Castro mentioned the unexplainable fact that the Soviets didn’t try to camouflage the missile bases, and said that he thought the Soviets had done it on purpose. If, as it appears, this is true, why did the Soviets want the Americans to discover the missile bases?
Question 9. The facilities that looked like strategic nuclear missile bases were surrounded by real anti-aircraft missile batteries (SAMs), whose primary purpose was to protect the bases against air raids, particularly from spy planes. But engineering students at the University of Havana, who had been assigned as advisers to the radar units of the Soviet SAM bases, observed how their radar screens showed the U-2 flying unmolested over the bases without Soviet officials making the minimum attempt to shoot them down.
This Soviet behavior angered the Cuban students, who did not understand the cause of the Soviet’s lack of interest in shooting down the spy planes. This anger grew to the point that on some bases it reached almost to the level of a revolt. Only the presence of Che Guevara, called urgently to the SAM batteries, managed to calm them down. However, when he in turn informed Castro about the situation on the batteries, Guevara told him that he himself did not understand the Soviet’s behavior. Why did the Soviets not attempt to shoot down American spy planes with the very anti-aircraft missile batteries whose sole purpose was to bring down American spy planes?
Question 10. According to the official U.S. version of the facts, what sparked the crisis were the photos taken by a U-2 spy plane flying over the western part of Cuba on October 14. The truth, however, is that since August the U.S. intelligence services were certain that there were installations that looked like strategic Soviet missile bases on Cuban soil. Between August 31 and October 10, Senator Kenneth Keating had made fourteen public statements and ten speeches in the Senate, denouncing the inaction of the Kennedy administration about the existence of missile bases in the western part of Cuba. Cuban refugees, who were flying from Cuba to Florida by the hundreds, commented on the strange activities of the Russians in the western part of the island.
However, despite all the evidence pointed towards the west, Kennedy suddenly banned the U-2 from flying over the western part of Cuba, and flights were concentrated in the eastern region. It was not until the pressure of public opinion stirred by Senator Keating became intolerable that Kennedy ordered to resume flights over the western part of the island. It was in this first flight after the restart of the flights that a U-2 plane photographed what looked like strategic missile bases. Why did Kennedy not want the U-2s to discover the Soviet missiles in Cuba?
Question 11. According to the official U.S. version of the crisis, the high definition photographs taken by a U-2 plane on October 14 provided incontrovertible evidence of the presence of nuclear missiles in Cuba. But the fact remains that nobody actually saw the missiles, much less touched them. What we have seen are photos of some construction sites that CIA analysts thought were similar to what they believed were strategic missile sites appearing in photographs taken by U-2s flying over the Soviet Union.
However, in his book The Soviet Army, former Soviet officer Victor Suborov tells how, in the early Sixties, nuclear missiles that paraded through Red Square were actually dummies. The Russian tradition in the art of maskirovka and disinfomatzia to mislead goes back to the times of Grigori Aleksandrovich Potemkin. During WWII, they built a large factory west of the Ural Mountains exclusively dedicated to the manufacture of all kinds of war material of props, from inflatable rubber tanks to wooden MiGs and dummy missiles.
The CIA subsequently admitted that it had no agents in the field that might have physically verified the existence of the strategic nuclear missiles on Cuban soil. When the Soviets were shipping back to the Soviet Union what they claimed were strategic nuclear missiles, Kennedy had an excellent opportunity to order the Navy to board the ships and physically verify the withdrawal of the missiles, but he did not. Why did Kennedy decide not to verify the existence of the missiles and their actual withdrawing from Cuba?
Furthermore, the U-2 photos, which allegedly provided incontrovertible proof of the existence of nuclear missiles on Cuban soil, have been published in high resolution and are available on the web.[1] Surprisingly, such photos only show long objects covered with tarps and a few concrete bunkers which allegedly contained the nuclear warheads. But the nuclear missiles do not appear anywhere. So, why do most books and articles about the crisis continue to maintain the theory that the U-2 pictures provided irrefutable proof that there were medium-range strategic nuclear missiles on Cuban soil in 1962?
Moreover, given the Soviet’s expertise in military deception, even if the U-2 photos would have shown what seemed like nuclear missiles it would not have proved anything. A photo of a missile — or what looked like a missile— is not a missile.
Question 12. According to documents declassified after the fall of the Soviet Union and accounts of some Soviet officers who participated in the operation, when the missiles were discovered by the U-2s, their nuclear warheads were already in Cuba, and were later returned to the Soviet Union together with the missiles. However, despite the fact that all U.S. documents of the crisis assumed that the nuclear warheads were on Cuban soil, this was never proved. Moreover, as Kennedy refused to authorize offshore in situ verification, the presence of nuclear warheads on the Soviet ships was never confirmed.
But there is something even more important. From the early Sixties the U.S. had the technology for the remote detection of gamma radiation from nuclear warheads. By the time of the missile crisis, the U.S. had installed in the Dardanelles some powerful equipment that can detect radiation and the presence of nuclear warheads on Soviet submarines sailing through the Strait. However, none of the official documents produced during the crisis has revealed information that these teams had registered radiation from Soviet ships crossing the Strait supposedly carrying nuclear warheads to Cuba.
Many of the photos taken during the crisis show U.S. Navy aircraft flying over Soviet ships only a few feet above the masts. Presumably, some of these aircraft carried equipment capable of detecting gamma radiation. But no information whatsoever has been offered about detecting radiation from nuclear warheads on the ships allegedly carrying missiles and nuclear warheads back to the Soviet Union. So, if the Soviets really had nuclear warheads in Cuba, why had nobody ever detected radiation from them?
© 2014 Servando Gonzalez - All Rights Reserved
Footnotes:
1. See this link. The ever-lying Wikipedia has published a U-2 photo claiming that “This U-2 reconnaissance photo showed concrete evidence of missile assembly in Cuba. Shown here are missile transporters and missile-ready tents where fueling and maintenance took place.” The photo, however, actually shows nothing resembling Soviet strategic nuclear missiles on Cuban soil. Also, how did they know that fueling and maintenance of the missiles took place under the tents?
Part 3-B
By Servando Gonzalez
October 17, 2014
NewsWithViews.com
More Questions Than Answers
Some professional disinformation specialists have conspired to make us believe that, with regard to the missile crisis, all has been said and explained. The first book about the missile crisis was written by CFR agent Elie Abel. Then Graham T. Allison (CFR), wrote Essence of Decision, a book that most people still consider the ultimate analysis of the decision-making process during the crisis.
According to Allison, the Soviet failure to camouflage the missiles may have had a simple answer: stupid bureaucratic procedures in the Soviet Army. Missile sites had never been camouflaged in the Soviet Union, so the construction crews at the sites did what they usually do: build the missile sites according to the installation manuals because somebody forgot to retrain them before they went to work on this mission.
But, knowing the operational procedures of the Soviet Army this explanation seems a bit too simplistic to be credible. First of all, the officers and enlisted men assigned to the job of missile emplacement are normally not common soldiers, but specially trained personnel. Secondly, even with the existence of stupid bureaucratic procedures common to all armies, it is difficult to believe that they had made such a gross mistake, particularly if they were trying to place the missiles in Cuba using deception and stealth as the American official version claimed. Finally, Allison contradicts himself when, just two paragraphs before advancing his theory, he mentions that “The clandestine manner in which the missiles were shipped, unloaded, and transported to construction sites reveals the hand of Soviet intelligence agencies. Secrecy is their standard operating procedure.”
Talking to journalists at a news conference on February 1963, CFR agent Robert McNamara mentioned the so-called “photographic gap” that occurred between September 5 and October 14. According to McNamara, the U-2 missions during that period “didn’t relate” to the areas where the Russian missiles were eventually found. That was short of a tacit admission that the CIA had failed to photograph the western half of the Island — the area where all evidence pointed that the missiles were most likely to be — during the six weeks preceding the flight that allegedly discovered the strategic missile bases.
Those who needed to know had been assured that any missile emplacements would have been discovered by the U-2 reconnaissance flights over Cuba. But they were not told that these flights were bypassing the important areas allegedly to avoid antiaircraft batteries or SAMs already installed by the Soviets. But, after being ordered to fly over the suspect areas in Cuba, early in October the U-2 flights were inexplicably canceled.
After the crisis, the White House justified this decision by saying that Hurricane Ella had prevented air surveillance, but we know that Ella did not form until October 16. Even before the crisis was over, suspicions arose that the U-2 flights over Cuba had not been scheduled in an optimal manner. Later, in early 1963, the Stennis Committee examined the possibility of a “photographic gap” in U-2 coverage of Cuba in detail, but the charges were rejected as “unfounded.” However, the Stennis Report curiously ignored the critical questions of the U-2 paths over the Island between September 5 and October 24, merely observing that these flights “completed the coverage of those areas of Cuba which had been spotlighted as required early attention.” Yet, during cross examination by Congressmen Minshall and Ford in early February, 1963, Defense Secretary McNamara (CFR) admitted to the “photographic gap” of some 38 days in U-2 coverage of western Cuba.
Though in his book Collision Course author Henry Pachter makes no reference to the “photographic gap,” but he somewhat admits its existence in references to vague hints by administration sources that, because of the threat of Soviet SAM antiaircraft missiles in Cuba, reconnaissance flights during September had been limited to “side ways approaches.” In the same fashion, Roger Hilsman’s (CFR) in a 1964 article on the missile crisis gives no further explanation or of the “photographic gap.”
Even more significantly, in his now-classic study of the alleged failures in national intelligence estimates, author Klaus Knorr (CFR) didn’t mention the “photographic gap” or even the role played by the U-2 in the intelligence gathering during the crisis. Some years later Theodore Sorensen (CFR) remarked that U-2 incidents elsewhere in the world led to a “high-level reexamination of that airplane’s use” over Cuba and “some delay in flights,” but gave no additional information. Later in 1965 Roberta Wohlstetter (CFR) suggested that the Kennedy administration knew the Soviets had operational SAM sites in western Cuba, so they may have been extremely cautious in scheduling U-2 flights over the Island for fear of losing a plane.
Elie Abel (CFR) and Roger Hilsman (CFR) made additional disclosures concerning a change in policy concerning U-2 flights over Cuba. Not even Graham T. Allison (CFR) gave a clear explanation for the failure of U.S. intelligence, due to a “photographic gap,” to discover the missiles earlier.
Therefore, the fact remains that on September 10 a high-level decision was made and express orders were given, prohibiting direct overflights of western Cuba —the part of the Island where all evidence pointed to the presence of strategic missile sites. This unexplainable decision led to the now-famous “photographic gap.”
In 1991, however, CIA photo interpreter Dino Brugioni offered a much more credible explanation in his book Eyeball to Eyeball: The Inside Story of the Cuban Missile Crisis: According to Brugioni, It was not hurricane Ella that kept the U-2 from flying over the western part of Cuba, “but rather the dereliction, bumbling, and intransigence of [Secretary of State Dean] Rusk (CFR) and [Assistant to the President for National Security Affairs McGeorge] Bundy (CFR).” “Because of Bundy’s and Rusk’s stalling actions, there had been no U-2 photos of Cuba for over two weeks.”
As expected, Foreign Affairs, the CFR conspirators’ main disinformation organ, has published on some articles basically centered on the “lessons” of the Cuban missile crisis and its applicability to future crises. Now, given the fact that the “lessons” are based on the CFR conspirators’ false narrative of the events, one has to conclude that these “lessons” are wrong.
Nevertheless, the fact remains that, 50 years later, none of the above questions I have asked above have been satisfactorily answered. Moreover, I believe that the CFR professional disinformers will never provide a coherent answer to these questions because the answers will show us a very different picture than the one they are still trying hard to make us believe.
Finally, why did President Kennedy fail to seize the opportunity to get rid of his supposed archenemy? Why he didn’t authorize the U.S. Navy to board the Soviets ships allegedly bringing out of Cuba the missiles and their nuclear warheads, and verify it? Did Kennedy know something we don’t? These are the real questions to be answered in order to solve this historical riddle called the Cuban missile crisis.
Moreover, a logical question comes to mind: Why do these professional disinformers, most of them CFR members, spend so much time and effort muddying the historical waters? The answer is relatively simple: because, true to the Orwellian principle that he who controls the past controls the present and the future, giving credibility to false past fears such as the Cold War, the CFR disinformers can lend credence to current false fears such as the War on Terror.
Nevertheless, my theory about the Cuban missile crisis is that Khrushchev’s purpose was two-fold: first, getting rid of the troublesome Fidel without being blamed for it himself. Secondly, placing Americans in a very difficult position before the world and their own consciences, after an attack by the U.S., a big and powerful nation, against such a small country as Cuba. Even more important, the eventual discovery after an American invasion that there were no nuclear warheads in Cuba, and that the missiles were actually dummies, would have left the Americans with egg smeared all over their faces, instantly making them the laughingstock of the whole world.
An American invasion of Cuba could have solved Khrushchev’s Fidelista problem and, making good use of the American discredit on his behalf, he would have inherited Fidelismo, but without the troublesome Fidel — exactly the same way that, some years later, Fidel himself got rid of Che Guevara and inherited Guevarismo without the troublesome Guevara. Unfortunately, Khrushchev did not get rid of Castro, but David Rockefeller got rid of Khrushchev less than two years after the crisis.
In 1964 David visited the Soviet Union and had a two and half hour conversation with the Soviet Premier. We don’t know what the subject of subject of the conversation was, but we may safely surmise that David dressed down Khrushchev for his unauthorized attempt to get rid of David’s secret agent Fidel Castro. Barely two months later, David’s secret agents in the Soviet Politburo deposed Khrushchev.
Explaining my theory in detail, however, would take too long and is beyond the scope of this article. To understand it you may have to read my book The Nuclear Deception: Nikita Khrushchev and the Cuban Missile Crisis.
© 2014 Servando Gonzalez - All Rights Reserved
Servando Gonzalez, is a Cuban-born American writer, historian, semiologist and intelligence analyst. He has written books, essays and articles on Latin American history, intelligence, espionage, and semiotics. Servando is the author of Historia herética de la revolución fidelista, Observando, The Secret Fidel Castro: Deconstructing the Symbol, The Nuclear Deception: Nikita Khrushchev and the Cuban Missile Crisis and La madre de todas las conspiraciones: Una novela de ideas subversivas, all available at Amazon.com.
He also hosted the documentaries Treason in America: The Council on Foreign Relations and Partners in Treason: The CFR-CIA-Castro Connection, produced by Xzault Media Group of San Leandro, California, both available at the author's site at http://www.servandogonzalez.org.
His book, Psychological Warfare and the New World Order: The Secret War Against the American People is available at Amazon.com. Or download a .pdf copy of the book you can read on your computer, iPad, Nook, Kindle or any other tablet. His book, OBAMANIA: The New Puppet and His Masters, is available at Amazon.com. Servando's book (in Spanish) La CIA, Fidel Castro, el Bogotazo y el Nuevo Orden Mundial, is available at Amazon.com and other bookstores online.
His most recent book, I Dare Call It treason: The Council on Foreign Relations and the Betrayal of the America, just appeared and is available at Amazon.com and other bookstores online.
Servando's two most recent books in digital versions only are The Swastika and the Nazis: A Study of the Misuse of the Swastika by the Nazis and the first issue of the political satire series OBSERVANDO: American Inventors.
E-Mail: servandoglez05(at)yahoo(dot)com
*******

Days Before the Two Candidates Are Known! (Part 2)

$
0
0
*******
Why Cruz and Rubio Lie to Donald Trump and Their Globalist Agenda
By Kelleigh Nelson
March 3, 2016
NewsWithViews.com
“The biggest criminals that I have met in life are working for the government. They make mass murderers look like amateurs.” —Steven Magee
Donald Trump - 'Illegitimi non carborundum' - It means, Don't Let the Bastards Get You Down
The above phrase originated during World War II, Lexicographer, Eric Partridge attributes it to British army intelligence very early in the war. The phrase was adopted by US Army general "Vinegar" Joe Stillwell, as his motto during the war. It was later further popularized in the US by 1964 presidential candidate Barry Goldwater.
No matter the cost we must fight for the truth.
Why Cruz and Rubeo Lie:
Senators Cruz and Rubio are deliberately using lies and innuendos to anger Mr. Trump, not only on the stage during debates, but every time they appear on TV they repeat the same lies. Personally, I think it was so obviously childish and wicked, and hope most Americans see through it.
Donald Trump resents and detests liars and dishonesty. It's his Achilles heel. He's not only said it publically, but in his books. Liars make him angry, and in business he refuses to work with dishonest people. So, these two senators use exactly what they know angers Mr. Trump, to get under his skin and irritate him.
The antidote to this vile attack is not to resent them, but to take a deep breath, and then let the anger/resentment go. Relax, and then God will give him the right words to say. He needn't let their antics and foolishness get him upset.
Cruz's Conservative Talk and Liberal Walk 
Ted Cruz is a puppet for the New World Order's UN Agenda 21. Yes, Cruz is pushing the Wildlands Project. From The Marshall Report, "He is coming in through a partial truth - that states want their federal confiscated lands returned. He then is on your side. Then he says - states have to maintain these, and if they can't, they can sell them. So the land will be sold to foreign entities for minerals and logging, etc. We the people lose our resources and our land. This is all part of the Wildlands Project to aggregate the land into NWO globalists' hands and steal it from the people. Read the article here and Agenda 21 in One Easy Lesson.
Heidi a Cruz sits on the advisory board of the faith based, Living Waters International. It is funded by the United Nations. [Link]
On the CFR website, Ted's wife, Heidi Cruz, is listed as one of 31 members of the Task Force on the Future of North America. She helped to write the sovereignty destroying North American Union. Ted said she was the lone dissenting author, however on page 33-34 of the Task Force's report, Heidi writes, "I support the Task Force report and its recommendations aimed at building a safer and more prosperous North America." [Link]
Politico confirmed with an unnamed CFR official that Heidi Cruz was an active CFR member at the time under a five-year “term membership," even though Ted Cruz has stated the CFR is a pit of vipers. [Link]
Watch Rick Well's video on the NAU, and SPP.
Cruz joined the George W. Bush presidential campaign in 1999 as a domestic policy adviser, advising then-Governor George W. Bush on many topics.
After Bush took office, Cruz served as an associate deputy attorney general in the U.S. Justice Department and as the director of policy planning at the U.S. Federal Trade Commission. Cruz is a Bush establishment candidate.
Ted Cruz met his wife, Heidi, while both were working on the George W. Bush presidential campaign of 2000. She worked for CFR member and National Security Advisor Condoleezza Rice.
Ted Cruz is bashing Supreme Court Justice, John Roberts, after years of praising him. "As an individual, John Roberts is undoubtedly a principled conservative, as is the president (George W. Bush) who appointed him,"Cruz wrote at the time in the National Review. According to a 2005 Sun-Sentinel report, Cruz once praised Roberts as "one of the best constitutional minds in the country." With the decisions of the Supremes, Cruz is now back peddling big time on his support of Roberts. [Link]
Two years ago, Cruz proposed amendments to a bill sponsored by four Republican senators—Marco Rubio, John McCain, Lindsey Graham, and Jeff Flake—and four Democrats. The bill would have tightened border security and employee screening. But it also would have allowed undocumented immigrants to apply, eventually, for legal status. [Link]
Cruz has been described by the Cato Institute's Center for Trade Policy Studies as a "free trader" [Link] and as a "free-trade advocate" by the Wall Street Journal. [Link] All these trade deals have destroyed America's jobs and middle class.
Why is the alleged conservative Cruz in support of TPP, otherwise known as Obamatrade? [Link], [Link]
Cruz supported giving Fast Track to President Obama for Trans Pacific Partnership (TPP).
Here's the video.
*******

Cruz Supports Giving Fast Track Authority on Trade to Obama
Published on Jan 29, 2015
At the Citizens United Iowa Freedom Summit, I asked Sen. Ted Cruz (R-TX) whether or not he would support giving Fast Track Authority on the Trans-Pacific Partnership trade deal to Obama despite his mistrust of the president.
*******
Here's what Sen. Sessions says about Fast Track and the TPP. According to Sessions:“The predictable and surely desired result of the TPP is to put greater distance between the governed and those who govern. It puts those who make the rules out of reach of those who live under them, empowering unelected regulators who cannot be recalled or voted out of office. In turn, it diminishes the power of the people’s bulwark: their constitutionally-formed Congress.” Shocking, this is what this phony Christian (Cruz) supports. [Link]
Cruz has stated he's against amnesty, but even visited the southern border with Glenn Beck to welcome illegal aliens. [Link] He has flip flopped and lied about where he really stands on amnesty. [Link] Watch Megyn Kelly question him in the January 28, 2016 debate sans Donald Trump. See: Video
Ted Cruz has stated he would support a Constitutional Convention. The phony right, and George Soros' leftist organizations all support a new Convention, which would destroy our founding document. [Link]
Cruz calls for strengthening background-check system for gun sales - "One of the things we could do is we could improve the quality of the federal database," Cruz said in an interview on "Fox News Sunday.""Right now a lot of states, a lot of local jurisdictions, are not reporting criminal convictions, not reporting mental health barriers to ownership. And so the federal database is not nearly as good as it should be. That would be a common-sense improvement."
As a lawyer, Ted Cruz knows he is not eligible to be president. Watch this short 12 minute video by retired attorney and Constitutional and federalist paper expert for the clearest explanation of Natural Born Citizen.
The questions can be answered by looking at the very reason why only natural born citizens can be President—foreign influence. As much as conservatives refuse to believe it or even discuss it, Ted Cruz is not a natural born citizen as outlined by the Constitution. (For a very detailed and vetted/sourced explanation, read this article.)
More people are researching Cruz's Canadian birth and citizenship...but all his records are sealed, and FOIA requests are denied...one has to wonder why and who gave the order.
Thanks to the diligence of Paul Walter, CEO of NewsWithViews, many ideas for my articles have come from him. Paul immigrated from communist Yugoslavia, providence of Slovenia, and therefore he sees more clearly the dangers to our Republic than those who have always known free America as home. Please support NewsWithViews.com
[P.S. In order to help Mr. Trump we need to increase the hits to reach more people. Please use this material, and call into talk radio programs and mention NewsWithViews.com on the air while discussing the content of this article, write letters to newspaper editors, and speak to your friends. Spread the word, and in doing so, we have a chance to save America.]
Click Here For Mass E-mailing
© 2016 Kelleigh Nelson - All Rights Reserved
Kelleigh Nelson has been researching the Christian right and their connections to the left, the new age, and cults since 1975. Formerly an executive producer for three different national radio talk show hosts, she was adept at finding and scheduling a variety of wonderful guests for her radio hosts. She and her husband live in Knoxville, TN, and she has owned her own wholesale commercial bakery since 1990. Prior to moving to Tennessee, Kelleigh was marketing communications and advertising manager for a fortune 100 company in Ohio. Born and raised in Chicago, Illinois, she was a Goldwater girl with high school classmate, Hillary Rodham, in Park Ridge, Illinois. Kelleigh is well acquainted with Chicago politics and was working in downtown Chicago during the 1968 Democratic convention riots. Kelleigh is presently the secretary for Rocky Top Freedom Campaign, a strong freedom advocate group.
*******
Marco Rubio, the Aspen Institute, and the CFR
By Kelleigh Nelson
February 24, 2016
NewsWithViews.com
The NWO Establishment: If we can't get Jeb, well take Rubio
The liberties of our country, the freedom of our civil Constitution, are worth defending at all hazards; and it is our duty to defend them against all attacks. We have received them as a fair inheritance from our worthy ancestors: they purchased them for us with toil and danger and expense of treasure and blood, and transmitted them to us with care and diligence. It will bring an everlasting mark of infamy on the present generation, enlightened as it is, if we should suffer them to be wrested from us by violence without a struggle, or to be cheated out of them by the artifices of false and designing men. —Samuel Adams
Caricature by DonkeyHotey flic.kr/p/Ct4G4K
Marco Rubio Affiliations
The Aspen Institute is sort of an American Bilderberger Group. In addition to the globalist Aspen and Brookings Institutes, there are a staggering number of private groups that shape and command American policy, including the CFR, and Trilateral Commission, etc. Nearly every elected official is influenced by them, and this includes Marco Rubio. The Aspen Institute is largely funded by one world government foundations such as the Carnegie Corporation, The Rockefeller Brothers Fund and the Ford Foundation, none of whom have freedom and liberty as their top priorities.
Surely most folks remember that UN Agenda 21 author and promoter, Maurice Strong, was the Director of the Aspen Institute for some years. If you like Smart Growth and the elimination of property rights, you'll love Agenda 21 and the Aspen Institute.
Aspen Institute named Marco Rubio as one of the top young elected officials to its third class of Aspen-Rodel fellows. The Institute's Rodel Fellowships in Public Leadership program brings together bipartisan groups of public officials judged to be the rising stars of American politics. Isn't that just lovely?
Aspen Institute President, Walter Isaacson, said the Rodel Fellows "represent the best hope for America's future—upcoming leaders committed to working together for the common good." The "common good" is code for the globalist socialist agenda of destroying free market growth and leveling all the playing fields.
Scroll down in the article to see the list of names including Marco Rubio, along with the photo of Rubio as Aspen Inst. Rodel fellow. [Link]
Walter Isaacson is the former head and CEO of CNN and the Managing Editor of Time Magazine. Aspen participates in the Ethical Globalization Initiative (EGI), headed by former UN official Mary Robinson, who calls the International Criminal Court, which could prosecute and imprison US citizens, "a great legal enterprise." Isaacson serves on the EGI board, along with global tax supporter, Jeffrey Sachs, an advisor to U.N. Secretary-General Kofi Annan. George Soros is extremely involved in the Aspen Institute. [Link] Sure doesn't make me feel warm and cozy. And there you have Marco Rubio...
Marco Rubio and the CFR
The Washington Post reported on Marco Rubio's speech at the Council on Foreign Relations in May of 2015. He was invited to speak on foreign policy with member Charlie Rose, and was introduced by the president of the CFR, Richard Haass.
The American Conservativebelieves Rubio's speech was pretty lame, but you can decide for yourself. He stated that America's role in the world is as a security guarantor. Rubio also claimed as president, he would "use the American power to oppose any violations of international waters, airspace, cyberspace, or outer space. This includes the economic disruption caused when one country invades another, as well as the chaos caused by disruptions in chokepoints such as the South China Sea or the Strait of Hormuz."
Personally, I do not believe we have any business being the world's policeman, and neither do I believe the president has the right to use any military power without Congress's approval.
The New American article on Rubio's CFR speech, stated, "Were the 2016 election to be a contest between Marco Rubio and Hillary Clinton, the future of U.S. foreign policy would be clear. It would mean a continuation of the same policies that have dominated our nation since the onset of World War II — interventionism, more war, and more casualties."
Rubio's Liberal Voting Record
Is it any wonder Rubio has been named an Aspen-Rodel fellow, or invited to speak at the Council on Foreign Relations? Take a look at his voting record and you'll see why these organizations love Senator Rubio.
Amnesty and Refugees - The Rubio-Schumer Gang of Eight amnesty billlikely would not have passed the Senate had Rubio not been such a prolific supporter. [Link], [Link] He's now waffling on the fact that he is a great supporter of illegal aliens gaining citizenship.

Senator Rand Paul wanted to restrict the amount of Muslims entering our country, and his amendment would have suspended visas to 30 Muslim countries with Jihadist populations. Rubio, on the other hand stated that he would "hate" to block funding for Obama's refugees. (Yes they're Obama's, they're certainly not main stream American's ideas of good immigrants.) Rubio even stated he felt limiting Muslim migration might be unconstitutional. Excuse me lawyer Rubio, but you obviously haven't read any of our immigration laws lately. Needless to say, Rubio joined the rest of the Ryan moderate (euphemism for socialist) Republicans in voting down Rand Paul's amendment.
Rubio has been one of the most ardent champions for increasing Muslim migration. The U.S. has admitted roughly 1.5 million migrants from Muslim countries since 9/11 on a permanent lifetime basis. Yet Rubio has sought to grow that number vastly. In 2015, Rubio introduced an immigration bill which would have allowed for an unlimited increase in Muslim migration. [Link]
One wonders if Rubio's love of amnesty is payback. His grandfather was ordered deported by a judge after flying in from Cuba without a visa. [Link]
Trade Agreements - Remember Ted Cruz voting for Fast Track for the TPP trade agreement? Well guess who cast the deciding 60th vote to give Obama Fast Track?
Yep, it was Marco Rubio!
The entire purpose of fast-track is for Congress to surrender its power to the Executive for six years. Legislative concessions include: control over the content of legislation, the power to fully consider that legislation on the floor, the power to keep debate open until Senate cloture is invoked, and the constitutional requirement that treaties receive a two-thirds vote. Legislation cannot even be amended.
By contrast, without fast-track, Congress retains all of its legislative powers, individual members retain all of their procedural tools, and every single line, jot, and tittle of trade text is publicly available before any congressional action is taken. [Link]
Tell me again how Republicans are the stop gap to Obama's destruction of America!
Food Stamp Reform - Marco Rubio is almost the only republican to take the democrat’s side on this bill. The bill would have saved taxpayers about 10 billion a year by blocking families with substantial assets from receiving food stamps.
When Rubio served as speaker in the Florida House, he stopped bills from coming to the floor that would have deported illegal immigrants in state prisons and that would have denied food stamps to illegal immigrants.
He even stopped a bipartisan proposal that would have allowed the deportation of about 5,000 illegal immigrants in Florida prisons, provided they had served half their sentence and agreed to be deported. Similar legislation saved $141 million and $13 million in prison costs in New York and Arizona.
Cap and Trade - As Florida speaker, Marco Rubio aggressively pushed for Florida to adapt to the inevitable federal "cap and trade program." Cap and trade is an environmental system that hardcore liberals including former Vice President Al Gore support. A federal cap and trade program would be centered around a carbon tax.
Watch Rubio Back Cap and Trade:

Worst Attendance Record - Rubio's attendance record for votes is one of the worst in Senate history. His seat is regularly empty for floor votes, committee meetings and intelligence briefings. He even missed the vote on Obama's Omnibus bill which he probably would have voted for anyway, although he stated the outcome was predetermined.
That outrageous $1.1 Trillion Omnibus Bill funds the most horrendous programs, which also locks in huge spending increases!
• funds entirely Obama's 2012 executive amnesty for “DREAMers”—or illegal immigrants who came to the country as minors and has granted around 700,000 illegal aliens with work permits, as well as the ability to receive tax credits and federal entitlement programs
• funds sanctuary cities (remember Kathryn Steinle)
• funds all refugee programs
• funds illegal alien resettlement
• quadruples H-2B foreign worker visas
• funds the release of criminal aliens
• funds tax credits for illegal aliens, and much more
Political Influence
While the Majority Whip of Florida House, Rubio used his official position to urge state regulators to grant a real estate license to his brother-in-law, a convicted cocaine trafficker who had been released from prison 20 months earlier, according to records obtained by The Washington Post. [Link]
Marco Rubio's brother-in-law was the 'front man' for a multi-million dollar cocaine-smuggling ring headed by a drug kingpin who ran the operation from an exotic animal sanctuary, it has been revealed.
Orlando Cicilia was arrested for his part in the illicit operation in 1987 during Miami's narcotics heyday when Republican presidential hopeful Rubio was just 16. Cicilia, 58, who is now working as a real estate agent, served just 12 years in prison despite being sentenced to 35 for his part in the scheme.
Conclusion
American Bridge put out a Marco Rubio Report in 2012. It is 500 pages long, but tells a great deal about Rubio. Take a gander at it...really telling.
It appears as though we have a socialist Democrat running as a conservative on the GOP ticket....again.
Stay tuned, there's more to come, soon.
[P.S. We need to increase the hits to reach more people. Please use this material, and call into talk radio programs and mention NewsWithViews.com on the air while discussing the content of this article, write letters to newspaper editors, and speak to your friends. Spread the word, and in doing so, we have a chance to save America.]
Please, click on "Mass E-mailing" below and send this article to all your friends.
Click Here For Mass E-mailing
© 2016 Kelleigh Nelson - All Rights Reserved
Kelleigh Nelson has been researching the Christian right and their connections to the left, the new age, and cults since 1975. Formerly an executive producer for three different national radio talk show hosts, she was adept at finding and scheduling a variety of wonderful guests for her radio hosts. She and her husband live in Knoxville, TN, and she has owned her own wholesale commercial bakery since 1990. Prior to moving to Tennessee, Kelleigh was marketing communications and advertising manager for a fortune 100 company in Ohio. Born and raised in Chicago, Illinois, she was a Goldwater girl with high school classmate, Hillary Rodham, in Park Ridge, Illinois. Kelleigh is well acquainted with Chicago politics and was working in downtown Chicago during the 1968 Democratic convention riots. Kelleigh is presently the secretary for Rocky Top Freedom Campaign, a strong freedom advocate group.
*******
Also See:
Days Before the Two Candidates Are Known!
(Part 1)
14 January 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/01/days-before-two-candidates-are-known-it.html
and
Who is This Guy in the Oval Office?
(Part 24)
01 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/who-is-this-guy-in-oval-office-part-24.html
and
 Who's Pushing For The New World Order?
15 January 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/01/whos-pushing-for-new-world-order.html
and
Agenda 21 Comes to Canada!
30 December 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/12/agenda-21-comes-to-canada.html
and
Agenda 21! The Death Knell of Liberty!
(Part 1)
02 March 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/03/agenda-21-and-death-knell-of-liberty.html
and
(Part 2)
22 January 2012
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/01/agenda-21-death-knell-of-liberty-part-2.html
and
(Part 3)
21 May 2012
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/05/agenda-21-death-knell-of-liberty-part-3.html
and
(Part 4)
07 January 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/01/war-against-u_7.html
and
United Nations Oversees Over 830 World Heritage Sites
25 December 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2010/12/this-video-by-dr.html
and
Who is Maurice Strong?
14 May 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2010/05/who-is-maurice-strong.html
and
Best Candidate for President? Donald Trump, Hands Down!
04 November 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/11/best-candidate-for-president-donald.html
and
 Will Donald Trump be the Next President?
(Part 1)
06 June 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/06/blog-post.html
and
(Part 2)
19 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/will-donald-trump-be-next-president.html
and
Will Hillary Clinton be the Next President?
(Part 1)
24 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/will-hillary-clinton-be-next-president.html
and
What Do You Know About The Clintons?
24 December 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/12/what-do-you-know-about-clintons.html
 and
Hillary Clinton, the Wanttabe President!
06 October 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/10/hillary-clinton-want-be-president.html
and
Will Hillary Run For President?
19 April 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/04/will-hillary-run-for-president.html
and
War on Drugs is a Farce!
09 January 2014
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2014/01/war-on-drugs-is-farce.html
and
The Next President of United States - Hillary Clinton!
21 December 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/12/the-next-president-of-united-states.html
and
What's with Recent U.S. Presidents? 27 June 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/06/whats-with-recent-us-presidents.html
and
Hillary Clinton's Testimony on Benghazi!
24 January 2013
and
The Saga of the Benghazi Report!
22 December 2012
and
What Happened in Benghazi?
31 October 2012
and
Bill Clinton was a Great President. Wasn't He?
03 October 2007
and
Bernie, the Socialist, Says Everything is Free! Is He Right?
12 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/bernie-socialist-says-everything-is.html
*******

Cashless Society, Micro Chips, What's Next?

$
0
0
*******

Central Bankers Are Now Pushing The Public To Accept A Cashless Society - Episode 895a
Published on Feb 16, 2016
*******

REVEALED! Why They Want To Ban Cash
Published on May 19, 2015
*******

ECONOMY COLLAPSE: What Will Happen To Your Savings in the Bank?
Published on Jan 21, 2015
*******
Warning! Coming Soon to a Bank Near You - a Cashless Society
By Marilyn MacGruder Barnewall
March 6, 2016
NewsWithViews.com
And With It - A Negative Interest Rate
According to Treasury Secretary Jack Lew who recently signed and sealed America’s current audited financial statements, as of 2015 the United States has $3.2 trillion in assets.
As other corporations do, the United States also listed its liabilities: $21.5 trillion. One does not need to be a mathematical genius to figure out that America’s net worth is a negative $18.3 trillion. We have $3.2 trillion in assets minus $21.5 trillion in liabilities.
In 2014, our negative net worth was $17.7 trillion and in 2013 it was $16.8 trillion. In other words, the United States is bankrupt. If you or I had five or ten times more debt than we had in assets, we would be in bankruptcy court.
Another thing corporations do is have their annual financial statements audited by an independent source... usually one of the major accounting firms. The federal government’s annual financial statement is audited by the General Accounting Office (GAO). This is done so people will more readily trust the numbers provided in the financial statements. Though it is part of the government, the GAO maintains a certain independence from governmental control.
Re the 2015 financials, the GAO told the federal government that it was on “an unsustainable fiscal path.” They also said that the federal government (that would be Congress which approves spending, the President whose policies are reflected in money approved to be spent, and the Department of the Treasury which generates the financial statements) often fails to provide “reliable and complete financial information – both for individual federal entities and for the federal government as a whole.”
Anyone who has been awake and who listens to statistical data about unemployment, job creation, inflation, cost of living and other data could have told them that.
Most of us remember that the Department of Defense in 2015 announced that it had over the past 20 years “misplaced” $8.5 trillion of our money. That’s your money and my money... and our children’s and our grandchildren’s and great grandchildren’s money -- and on and on for many generations.
Thus it will not surprise anyone to learn that the Defense Department was one of the government departments that failed to provide complete and accurate financial information for the financial statements. Until they find the missing $8.5 trillion, or until new people and procedures are put in place to track money spent, no additional funds should be sent to the DoD. Republican crowds attending presidential candidates’ functions loudly cheer when the words "rebuilding our military" are used. It does need to be rebuilt – but not until the system used to track costs has been audited and changed to keep honest records. If you'll recall the day before 9/11, then Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld announced that $3.1 trillion had been lost. To my knowledge, it's never been found.
The GAO evaluated Social Security and Medicare and other programs wherein Congress has told the American people that reductions will be made to save the programs. GAO says the weaknesses (meaning errors) they found in the stated reductions total $27.9 trillion. That means we are in much worse financial shape than they are letting on – and the debt they willingly admit to defines bankruptcy without the detected errors.
There are those reading this article who will respond by saying “Oh, they’ll just print more money. Nothing will change.” There are many who won’t read this article who would respond that way if they did read it. They represent the “something for nothing” crowd. They simply cannot conceptualize the idea that irresponsible federal spending – mostly designed to buy the votes of the poor and the disenfranchised (and illegal aliens and other non-hegemonic portions of society as described by Antonio Gramsci) – has bankrupted this once healthy economy. They cannot see in their minds the idea that when you borrow something, it must some day, some way be repaid.
The truth is, they are about to stop printing money so those who say “they’ll just print more money to cover the debt” are wrong.
The truth is, your bank is about to stop paying you the pittance they’ve been paying for your deposit dollars, calling it “interest.” They are about to start charging you money for the money in your bank accounts. It’s already being done in Europe and other parts of the world.
Bank of Japan’s Governor Haruhiko Kuroda recently opted for negative interest rates. It is not a new idea. In the 1970s the Swiss government implemented negative interest rates because its currency was driven up in value and was causing inflation. Sweden used negative interest rates in 2009-10. Denmark used the concept in 2012. In 2014, the European Central Bank implemented a negative interest rate policy.
What is about to descend on your head is Negative Interest Rate Policy (NIRP). NIRP means that banks, rather than paying you interest on your deposits, will charge you a fee (probably a percentage of your deposit amount) for managing your money.
“Managing my money?” you may ask. “I manage my money; not my bank.”
Your reaction is likely: “I’ll just take my money out of the bank.” No. You won’t. Why? Because they are about to remove currency – actual money – from the marketplace. I believe we are about to switch to a digital currency -- and no, not Bitcoin.
Our economy is not recovering from the longest recession in history – some would call it a depression, but that would be too close to an honest assessment for this government to admit. The economy is going into a deflationary spin which would put us into a depression that would make the 1930s look like child’s play. When an economy deflates, there is no growth – no new business start-ups, no new jobs. People do not borrow and spend. Well, some people do – those who often have no alternative but credit cards to buy food and other survival items... like rent or car payments. People who use credit as a desperation move can seldom repay it and that does not bode well for the near-term future. There is a slowdown in real production of all kinds.
Until the 2007 economic debacle, we lived in an inflationary rather than a deflationary economy. During inflationary economies, people borrow money to invest in everything from the stock market to new business start-ups or company expansions. Consumers borrow to buy everything from cars and refrigerators to new homes and lawn mowers. Jobs are created even though the cost of everything is inflating. America’s horrendous debt burden combined with the real estate devaluation which led to the foreclosure debacle sent us into a deflationary period.
The Federal Reserve decided to fight deflation with an inflationary solution – quantitative easing – and it failed. Miserably failed. A lot of already rich people got richer, but no benefits to the economy or the people were realized. That’s the difference in crony capitalism and capitalism. This “mistake” was not an accident. It was planned.
When negative interest rates are imposed, it is a desperation move to avoid the failed government policies that have pushed the world into non-repayable debt. The greed of central banks worldwide has led to the coming demise of that system. The Keynesian model has proven to be a failed system. The central banks tried zero interest rates, then quantitative easing, and now negative interest rates. Nothing has worked. Hail Mary passes seldom do. In his book Currency Wars: The Making of the Next Global Crisis, Jim Rickards envisions the emergence of a world central bank as a result of central bank follies internationally.
I believe Rickards is correct. I further believe it has been the plan from the start. People tend to forget that for ten years I have been saying the objective of those seeking one world government is to put in place a world economic system because until that happens it is impossible to implement one world government. Once the international economic system is in place, creating a world government is child’s play. All that needs to be done once world monetary issues have been defined and implemented is which nations control which land.
To review, we have a nation that is bankrupt thanks to irresponsible and greed-based policies which utilized a zero-based Federal Reserve funds cost and that failed, quantitative easing which failed to stimulate the economy, and the powers that be will now very likely implement NIRP – negative interest rates on funds deposited in America’s banks... which will also fail. It is intended to fail.
Why is it intended to fail? There is little doubt in my mind that many who read this will call me a conspiracy nut. They called me that when in 2006 I predicted (in writing) the derivative mess, the 2007 resultant foreclosure mess that would result from MERS, the 2008 stupidity of zero-based central bank lending rates, TARP and quantitative easing, and now what I think they are about to do: The cashless society.
What is a cashless society? Here is a link to an article about the cashless society recently implemented in Ecuador. What negative interest rate policies will lead to is precisely what they have implemented (perhaps as a test?) in Ecuador.
Like everything else “they” do, this has been tested in various ways. The debit card issued to those receiving welfare benefits was part of the testing process. It was begun in the late 1990s. This article explains how it all began.
Rather than issuing a check or directly depositing welfare funds into a checking account, an amount is credited onto a computer system – we can call it "cybercash," -- no real cash involved. It's just digital money. It can be overseen by banks (though independent banks will fall by the wayside) or it can be overseen by the Department of the Treasury... or even the Federal Reserve System. The recipient of the funds uses the debit card to pay for food, clothes, etc. If it sounds like the government controls what may be purchased with the card that is correct. And now they are ready to expand the program from welfare recipients to you.
Bitcoin, another form of cybercash, was part of the test. Would people accept and use a non-currency form of “money”? Not only did they accept it, it took off like a rocket... until (as I said would happen) some controls were put in place that limited the use of Bitcoin and its stock fell in value as rapidly as it had risen. The test was a huge success.
There will be no cash. If you leave a tip for a waitress, it will have to be placed on the signed receipt which will be deducted from your bank account... or placed on a credit card. Your bank will automatically transfer you tip to the waitress to her bank account... and she will pay taxes on it. If you pay someone for mowing your lawn, it will be via check (no cash) or credit card (or your checking account debit card)... and it will be automatically placed in the mower’s bank account... and he or she will pay taxes on it. When you buy groceries, you will use a check, credit card, or the debit card. The government will have a complete record of your purchases (including cigarettes, alcohol, and other highly personal articles).
I repeat, there will be no cash. Everything you buy or sell will be done via your bank account and it will be tracked for tax purposes. If you can see a clear road to a barter system and an active black market, you’ve got the idea of what I’m explaining.
As I said, it is a desperation move made by a failed central banking system the greed of which convinced those who run it to believe the debt era could last forever.
If this does not give you a clear picture of just how far over the cliff the United States economy is, nothing will. Go to the beginning of this article and read about our debt. Read the article about the cashless society in Ecuador. Then prepare for the only logical future that can result from these economic circumstances. Start a new business that lends itself to being a good source for bartering for food, clothes and shoes.
NIRP and the cashless society will be about as successful as quantitative easing was. If you are prepared, you will make it through. If you are not prepared, you will curse yourself for not paying more attention.
© 2016 Marilyn M. Barnewall - All Rights Reserved
Marilyn MacGruder Barnewall began her career in 1956 as a journalist with the Wyoming Eagle in Cheyenne. During her 20 years (plus) as a banker and bank consultant, she wrote extensively for The American Banker, Bank Marketing Magazine, Trust Marketing Magazine, was U.S. Consulting Editor for Private Banker International (London/Dublin), and other major banking industry publications. She has written seven non-fiction books about banking and taught private banking at Colorado University for the American Bankers Association. She has authored seven banking books, one dog book, and two works of fiction (about banking, of course). She has served on numerous Boards in her community.
Barnewall is the former editor of The National Peace Officer Magazine and as a journalist has written guest editorials for the Denver Post, Rocky Mountain News and Newsweek, among others. On the Internet, she has written for News With Views, World Net Daily, Canada Free Press, Christian Business Daily, Business Reform, and others. She has been quoted in Time, Forbes, Wall Street Journal and other national and international publications. She can be found in Who's Who in America, Who's Who of American Women, Who's Who in Finance and Business, and Who's Who in the World.
*******
*******
Commentary: The View from Europe: The cashless society
By David Jessop
Published on March 5, 2016
(Left: David Jessop) If you read the Financial Times, the Wall Street Journal, the Washington Post or some of the world’s other heavyweight newspapers, you may have seen in recent months, articles discussing the abolition of currency.
However, little if anything has been said about the negative consequences this startling possibility could have for all developing economies or the myriad small enterprises and individuals that live in them and who provide services of all kinds for cash.
A cashless society is an idea that has increasing support among senior figures in international financial institutions, central bankers, security agencies, and many of the governments in the world’s wealthiest nations.
They suggest that the process should begin first by first phasing out paper currency, starting with large-denomination bills such as the Euro 500 banknote and the US$100 bill.
The thinking behind this is that major economies should eventually replace actual currency with electronic money in the form of card payments, electronic wallets on mobile phones, and online transactions.
Those who believe that the future is cashless do so for a number of reasons.
Firstly, they believe that it will address criminality. According to the Financial Action Task Force, the Paris based group that is deeply engaged in anti-money laundering issues in the Caribbean, criminals prefer high value bank notes because they are easier to transport across borders without detection.
Secondly, supporters of the idea believe that it will increase the ability of governments to halt tax evasion and will optimise their tax take and ability to provide social services; the idea being that electronic transfers will enable end-to-end traceability of income and expenditure, information on where individual or business income originates and goes to, and how our money is spent or utilised.
Thirdly it is said that it would enable states to track and even destroy money being moved or used for the purposes of terrorism or by organised crime.
And fourthly it is suggested that a cashless society would address a number of technical financial management issues such as the increasing introduction of negative interest rates on deposits, for example in countries like Switzerland and Sweden, and the consequent flight of deposits into cash.
In addition, a related approach, recently explored in an interesting if sometimes technical speech by the deputy governor of the Bank of England, Ben Broadbent, is the idea that central banks should consider adopting their own digital currencies.
Mr Broadbent’s point is that since central banks issue paper money, there may be a case for them also to issue digital currencies. This would have the effect of enabling central banks to provide directly through settlement technology the verification and recording of transfers with, as an option, individuals being offered the ability to hold some or all of their balances with their central bank rather than, as at present, their retail bank.
This would, he observed, have the effect of making commercial banks safer given their deposits are to a significant extent partially backed in illiquid assets, but could, less helpfully, result in customers’ deposits migrating to central banks, making commercial banks more reliant on wholesale markets, possibly reducing their lending into the real economy.
There are of course many arguments against any move to end the role of physically held currency.
The most important of these is that such an approach would profoundly challenge the liberty of the individual by enabling a state to know exactly where and how individuals are obtaining their income and disposing of it. But there are also other more practical arguments about how individuals would react, let alone the political and psychological implications of a government or central bank telling voters they no longer have physical control of their own money.
Although these are at present just ideas, the fact that they are being explored by influential figures like the deputy governor of the Bank of England suggest that it is an issue that over the next decade we are likely to hear much more about.
When it comes to a region like the Caribbean, however, cashless transactions could potentially become economically challenging.
It would mean that in countries where large numbers are unbanked and depend on cash through tips, fares, purchases of food or other items, many would suffer.
Moreover, any diminution in the use of cash in the Caribbean’s less formal sectors would most likely be anti-developmental, reducing the sums of money that informally enter the economy.
Although any such measures are unlikely to affect directly hotels or the formal tourism sector, which tends to rely on electronic transactions, it could, if it became the norm in feeder markets in North America and Europe, marginalise those who drive taxis, waiting staff, water sports providers, vendors and others in the grey economy who depend on cash.
Cashless transactions are in effect yet another indication of the profound ways in which economic globalisation and information technology are changing the world in a manner that potentially threatens small economies, especially where significant number of citizens are unbanked.
As this column recently noted, there are already moves by the big international banks to cease correspondent banking operations with Caribbean financial institutions; a threat so severe in its implications that Caribbean Community (CARICOM) heads gave it priority at their recently concluded inter-sessional meeting in Belize.
There they agreed to establish a high-level advocacy group to express internationally how so-called ‘de-risking’ by the world’s biggest banks threatens to impact remittance transfers, international trade, and the facilitation of credit card settlements for clients in the region; matters that Belize’s prime minister, Dean Barrow, the present chair of CARICOM, described as ‘existential’ if not addressed internationally at the highest levels.
So far, bringing the use of currency to an end is no more than an idea. But the fact that some government related agencies and financial institutions are now putting considerable thought into how a cashless society might operate, suggests that the implications require consideration.
The idea of virtual currencies cannot be left just to developed nations to debate. The idea has significant negative implications for all developing nations. It requires central banks in regions like the Caribbean to form a view and make clear the practical implications on cash driven economies that for the foreseeable future will continue to depend to a significant extent on banknotes and coins.
David Jessop is a consultant to the Caribbean Council and can be contacted at david.jessop@caribbean-council.org. Previous columns can be found at www.caribbean-council.org
*******
*******
Salvation Army donations suffer in 'cashless society'
Charitable church fundraising efforts suffering in Toronto this season
CBC News
Posted: Dec 12, 2013
The Salvation Army is facing new challenges this season in its annual holiday fundraising campaign.
The Christian church and charitable organization says people are giving less to their Santa Claus fundraisers because there is less opportunity to drop money into the iconic red kettles.
"We think there are a couple reasons," said spokesperson Andrew Burditt to CBC Radio’s Here and Now. "Society is becoming much more cashless; people just don't carry cash anymore."
He said often people will walk up to the kettle, reach into their pockets to give, and can't find any coins or bills.
But that’s only if there is a kettle to begin with.
"Salvation Army has had a very good historic relationship with retail outlets," said Burditt. "For whatever reason in 2013, we’re having some challenges. Either we can’t get in at all, or we’re very limited in the number of opportunities in the venue."
Union Station, for instance, has been a hub for the charity that has been collecting donations for the poor for more than 130 years.
It has sent as many as 10 fundraising teams there every holiday season for 50 years. But it then has had space limited from 10 fundraiser teams to four.
This year they were only allowed one — and that’s only because another vendor cancelled.
Burditt says the Salvation Army, which often has a band playing Christmas music, was "deemed to be too loud."
That has quantifiably lowered the donations. Burditt said one kettle will gather an average of $1,000 per hour in Union Station. With 10 kettles over two hours, that’s $20,000. Much of those donations are missed in 2013.
"We’re continuing to evolve," said Burditt, explaining the organization has begun taking online and text message donations in recent years. This year, it launched fillthekettle.com, a new donation vehicle online.
"We don’t know whether we will achieve the goal of $3 million," he said. “But if for some reason we don’t make it, we’ll figure it out."
*******
Also See:
Venezuela Is Out of Food! Who's Next?
15 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/venezuela-is-out-of-food-whos-next.html
and
A Better Way? Barter System vs. National Currency!
26 December 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/12/better-way-barter-system-vs-national.html
and
Food Shortage, Then Anarchy!
25 July 2012
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/07/food-shortage-then-anarchy.html
and
What to Expect when the Economic Collapse Occurs!
17 May 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/05/what-to-expect-when-economic-collapse.html
and
Disasters Happen! Be Prepared!
(Part 1)
31 March 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/03/disasters-happen-be-prepared.html
and
(Part 2)
30 August 2012
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/08/disasters-happen-be-prepared-part-2.html
and
The Collapse of the Entire World’s Economic System has Begun!
18 March 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/03/the-collapse-of-entire-worlds-economic.html
and
Economic Collapse! How Did We Get Here?
27 February 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/02/economic-collapse-how-did-we-get-here.html
and
Are We Facing a Global Financial Crisis?
31 May 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/05/are-we-facing-global-financial-crisis.html
and
Financial Crunch! Economic Collapse!
(Part 1)
31 July 2008
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2008/07/financial-crunch-economic-collapse.html
and
(Part 2)
20 November 2008
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2008/11/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 3)
25 January 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/01/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 4)
17 April 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/04/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 5)
23 June 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/06/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 6)
23 August 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/08/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 7)
30 November 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/11/xxxx.html
and
(Part 8)
23 February 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/02/debt-dynamite-dominoes-coming-financial.html
and
(Part 9)
28 August 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/08/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 10)
13 January 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/01/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 11)
29 April 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/04/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 12)
28 July 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/07/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 13)
04 April 2012
(Part 15)
02 November 2012
and
Recession? ... Depression? ... What is Going On?
(Part 1)
06 October 2008
(Part 2)
02 February 2009
and
(Part 3)
19 April 2009
and
(Part 4)
02 August 2009
and
(Part 5)
17 September 2010
and
(Part 6)
17 September 2010
and
Jobs, Jobs, Where are the Jobs?
(Part 1)
20 April 2010
 *******

When It Comes To Climate Change, Fake Science Baffles Brains!

$
0
0
*******

Climate Change Townhall  – featuring Dr. Tim Ball
Published on Nov 29, 2015
Join your local community members for a Public Townhall event on Climate Change featuring keynote speaker Dr. Tim Ball. We Are Change Victoria is honour to host this important community event at Gorgeous Coffee on Sunday, Nov.22 @ 7:00pm. Dr. Tim Ball will be discussing environmentalism and the climate in advance of the COP21 Climate Change Conference in Paris, France.
*******
The National Geographic’s War On Science
By Servando Gonzalez
November 23, 2015
NewsWithViews.com
The cover of the March 2015 issue of the National Geographic magazine depicts in big letters the title "The War on Science," as well as the subtitles, "Climate Change Does not Exist,""Evolution Never Happened,""The Moon Landing Was Fake,""Vaccinations Can Lead to Autism," and "Genetically Modified Food is Evil." The cover is expanded in an article by Joel Achenbach, “The Age of Disbelief,” with the subtitle "Skepticism about science is on the rise, and polarization is the order of the day. What's causing reasonable people to doubt reason?"
The overall tone of the heavily-slanted article indicates that the author is not trying to provide strong arguments to prove his point, but that he is preaching to a choir of people who see themselves as intellectually superior to the cave men troglodytes who don’t believe in science.
Nevertheless, an analysis of the article shows that, despite his claims of support for science, the author doesn’t seem to know much about it. A cardinal example of this is evidenced in the fact that, in a seven-page article about science, the author mentions the word “consensus” nine times. Even worse, the author shows his ignorance when, on page 40, he mentions Galileo as a hero of science. Apparently it escaped the author’s comprehension that in the early 17th Century, Galileo defied the consensus when he claimed that the Earth rotated on its axis and orbited around the sun.
A cardinal feature of science is that it is not based on the opinion of the majority but on facts. Actually, most things that today we accept as scientific fact began as a negation of the consensus of the time.[1] It is highly revealing, though, that the very people who allegedly are for diversity in race, culture and sexual practices, do not accept diversity in scientific theories.
On the same page, the author quotes geophysicist Marcia McNutt, current editor of Science magazine, as saying: “Science in not a body of facts. Science is a method for deciding whether what we choose to believe has basis in the laws of nature or not.” [Emphasis mine] So, according to this lady, science is not knowledge based on facts, but just a way to give substance to our beliefs. A better definition of science as religion cannot be made.

Is the National Geographic magazine part of a PsyOp against the American people? I don’t know, but the ties between the American Geographical Society and the globalist conspirators go deep.

Is the National Geographic magazine part of a PsyOp against the American people? I don’t know, but the ties between the American Geographical Society and the globalist conspirators go deep. We should remember that The Inquiry, a proto-intelligence agency created by Colonel Edward Mandell House on behalf of the globalist bankers, was composed mostly of American socialist-oriented intellectuals who worked in secret out of the American Geographical Society, doing historical research and writing position papers with plans for the upcoming peace settlement in Paris. The Inquiry was the de facto first formally-sanctioned civilian U.S. central intelligence agency, created by the globalist conspirators.
However, though The Inquiry’s alleged sole purpose was to research and report to Wilson to prepare the U.S. case for the coming peace settlement, the fact that it had a Latin American group indicates that its scope was much larger. Actually, the Inquiry was, among other things, the first step to systematically study Latin America’s natural resources for the future exploitation of Wall Street bankers and oil corporations —a job later assumed by the Council on Foreign Relations and their beloved CIA.
The globalist conspirators soon realized that the American Geographic Society was a good cover to infiltrate agents disguised as scientists, photographers and writers into other countries in order to asses their natural resources and counteract their efforts of becoming economically independent from them.[2]
According to National Geographic, some unscientific Cro-Magnons believe that “Climate Change Does Not Exist.” The claim has been maliciously postulated to show the ignorance of the unbelievers, because no rational person with a minimum of education can believe that climate change does not exist. It is obvious that climate change exists, and existed since time immemorial. The climate is always changing.
What most people do not believe, however, is that climate change (the brainwashers’ new name for global warming) is caused by human activity. This planet has passed through periods of both global warming and global cooling way before people were driving SUVs.[3]
Speaking from his ideological high ground, the author asks, “What’s causing reasonable people to doubt reason?” Actually, what reasonable people doubt is not reason but illogicality, irrationality, magic thinking and plain lies. Reasonable people are reaching the conclusion that most of what is currently passed as science is nothing but junk.

Reasonable people are reaching the conclusion that most of what is currently passed as science is nothing but junk.
The keystone of the scientific method is that a scientific claim can be proven false. Actually, to fully adhere to the scientific method, any scientific statement, hypothesis or theory must include the way it can be proven false. Falsifiability or refutability is an inherent possibility to prove it to be false. A statement is called falsifiable if it is possible to conceive an observation or an argument that proves the statement in question to be false. In this sense, falsify is synonymous with nullify, meaning not “to commit fraud” but “to show to be false”.

Philosopher of science Karl Popper brought attention to the subject of falsifiability by way of his scientific epistemology of “falsificationism.” Popper focused his attention on problem of demarcation — that is, distinguishing the scientific from the unscientific—and made falsifiability the demarcation criterion, such that what is unfalsifiable is classified as unscientific, and the practice of declaring an unfalsifiable theory to be scientifically true is pseudoscience.
In contrast, none of the “scientific” theories expressed in the National Geographic’s cover article provide for a way to prove their falsifiability. Actually, scientists who have tried to prove it have been systematically excommunicated from the academic community.
Nevertheless, the religious Left is apparently incapable of seeing the difference between true science and junk science. They also still don’t realize that, thanks to the alternative media, they have lost the monopoly on information.
Now, why have the New Agers of the religious Left joined forces with the globalist conspirators pushing their New Gay World Order? A key to find an answer is that, if they manage to, based on junk science, pass laws to impose upon the rest of us their beliefs, both of them would accomplish their dreams (or nightmares?).
The religious Left is convinced that we humans are a plague who is destroying Gaia, Mother Earth. This is why they have openly expressed their goal of destroying industrial civilization and killing most people on planet Earth. On their part, the globalist conspirators believe that the planet is overpopulated and that we, the 99 percent, is consuming the Earth’s natural resources that, by natural law, belong to them, the 1 percent. That’s why they have openly expressed their plans to kill no less that 85 percent of the population and reduce the survivors to pre-industrial levels of consumption, with only two social classes, the masters and the serfs. This is the society they euphemistically call the New (Gay) World Order. It’s a real-life version of The Hunger Games.
This explains why the most reactionary Right is secretly bankrolling the religious Left. Buzzards of a feather flock together.
© 2015 Servando Gonzalez - All Rights Reserved
Footnotes:
1. Proof of the lack of scientific consensus on global warming is the abundant scientific literature the debate has produced. See, i.e., Nobel Laureate Smashes the Global Warming Hoax, The Great Global Warming Swindle, Dr Don Easterbrook Exposes Climate Change Hoax, Tim Ball - The Deliberate Corruption of Climate Science, Climate Scientists Laugh at Global Warming Hysteria, Dr William Happer Destroys Climate Change Hysteria in 7 minutes, Climate Scientists Jump Ship as CO2 Theory Collapses, Freeman Dyson: A Global Warming Heretic, NASA Scientists Invalidate the Global Warming Hypothesis, How the Global Warming Scare Began, Climate Scientist Murry Salby Demolishes the Global Warming Alarm, Climate Change - Biggest Scam in History.
2. After more than 35 years with National Geographic, William L. (Bill) Allen, who spent the last 10 as editor in chief of the flagship publication, retired in November of 2004. During his tenure at the National Geographic magazine Allen was also a CFR member. See, “National Geographic Magazine Names Chris Johns New Editor-In-Chief,” National Geographic, November 2, 2004, . In January 2014, another CFR member, Gary E. Knell, joined the National Geographic Society as president and CEO . He has been a member of the Society’s board of trustees since April 2013 and has served on the board of governors of the National Geographic Education Foundation since November 2003.
3. See, “Global Warming is Very Old News,” Need to Know, Oct.31, 2015.
Servando Gonzalez, is a Cuban-born American writer, historian, semiologist and intelligence analyst. He has written books, essays and articles on Latin American history, intelligence, espionage, and semiotics. Servando is the author of Historia herética de la revolución fidelista, Observando, The Secret Fidel Castro: Deconstructing the Symbol, The Nuclear Deception: Nikita Khrushchev and the Cuban Missile Crisis and La madre de todas las conspiraciones: Una novela de ideas subversivas, all available at Amazon.com.
He also hosted the documentaries Treason in America: The Council on Foreign Relations and Partners in Treason: The CFR-CIA-Castro Connection, produced by Xzault Media Group of San Leandro, California, both available at the author's site at http://www.servandogonzalez.org.
His book, Psychological Warfare and the New World Order: The Secret War Against the American People is available at Amazon.com. Or download a .pdf copy of the book you can read on your computer, iPad, Nook, Kindle or any other tablet. His book, OBAMANIA: The New Puppet and His Masters, is available at Amazon.com. Servando's book (in Spanish) La CIA, Fidel Castro, el Bogotazo y el Nuevo Orden Mundial, is available at Amazon.com and other bookstores online.
His most recent book, I Dare Call It treason: The Council on Foreign Relations and the Betrayal of the America, just appeared and is available at Amazon.com and other bookstores online.
Servando's two most recent books in digital versions only are The Swastika and the Nazis: A Study of the Misuse of the Swastika by the Nazis and the first issue of the political satire series OBSERVANDO: American Inventors.
E-Mail: servandoglez05(at)yahoo(dot)com
*******

If You Know What's Good For You .... (Part 22)

$
0
0
*******
What Happens in Your Body When You’re Sleep Deprived?
By Dr. Marcela
March 03, 2016
Lack of sleep has many ramifications, from minor to major, depending on your accumulated sleep debt. Short term, lack of sleep tends to have an immediate effect on your mental and emotional states.
Over the long term, poor sleep can contribute to a whole host of chronic health problems, from obesity and diabetes to immune problems and an increased risk for cancer. Plus it raises your risk of accidents and occupational errors.
Unfortunately, few are those who sleep well on a regular basis. Part of the problem is our propensity for using artificial lighting and electronics at night, in combination with getting insufficient exposure to full, bright, and natural sunlight during the day.
This disconnect from the natural cycles of day and night, activity and sleep, can turn into a chronic problem where you’re constantly struggling to sleep well.
Fortunately the remedy is simple, and if you follow the recommendations at the end of this article, chances are you’ll be able to reestablish a healthy sleep pattern, without which you simply cannot be optimally healthy — even if you do everything else right.
A Single Night Without Sleep Can Have Severe Implications
As shown in the video above,1 going just one night without proper sleep starts to impair your physical movements and mental focus, comparable to having a blood alcohol level of 0.10 percent.2
In essence, if you haven’t slept, your level of impairment is on par with someone who’s drunk.
According to researchers, 24 hours’ worth of sleeplessness breaks down cognitive faculties to such a degree that you’ll be 4.5 times more likely to sign a false confession.3
Overall, you become more susceptible to "suggested" memories, and start having trouble discerning the true source of your memories. For example, you might confuse something you read somewhere with a first-hand experience. According to the authors of this study:
"We propose that sleep deprivation sets the stage for a false confession by impairing complex decision making abilities — specifically, the ability to anticipate risks and consequences, inhibit behavioral impulses, and resist suggestive influences.”
Lack of Sleep Linked to Internet Surfing and Poor Grades
Other research4 has linked lack of sleep to more extended internet usage, such as browsing through Facebook rather than studying or working. The reason for this is again related to impaired cognition and the inability to focus, making you more prone to distraction.
Not surprisingly, academic performance also suffers. In one recent study,5 the less sleep high school students reported getting, the lower their average grades were.
How Sleep Influences and Regulates Emotional Perception
Sleeping well is also important for maintaining emotional balance. Fatigue compromises your brain’s ability to regulate emotions, making you more prone to crankiness, anxiety, and unwarranted emotional outbursts.
Recent research also shows that when you haven’t slept well, you’re more apt to overreact to neutral events; you may feel provoked when no provocation actually exists, and you may lose your ability to sort out the unimportant from the important, which can result in bias and poor judgment.
Reporting on this research, in which participants were kept awake for one whole night before taking a series of image tests to gauge emotional reactions and concentration levels, Medical News Today writes:6
“... Eti Ben-Simon, who conducted the experiment, believes that sleep deprivation may universally impair judgment, but it is more likely that a lack of sleep causes neutral images to provoke an emotional response.
The second test examined concentration levels. Participants inside an fMRI scanner had to complete a task that demanded their attention to press a key or button, while ignoring distracting background pictures with emotional or neutral content ...
After only one night without sleep, participants were distracted by every single image (neutral and emotional), while well-rested participants only found the emotional images distracting.
The effect was indicated by activity change, or what Prof. Hendler calls ‘a change in the emotional specificity’ of the amygdala ... a major limbic node responsible for emotional processing in the brain.”
What Happens in Your Body After Two or More Sleepless Nights?
After 48 hours of no sleep, your oxygen intake is lessened and anaerobic power is impaired, which affects your athletic potential. You may also lose coordination, and start to forget words when speaking. It’s all downhill from there.
After the 72 hour-mark of no sleep, concentration takes a major hit, and emotional agitation and heart rate increases. Your chances of falling asleep during the day increase and along with it, your risk of having an accident. 
In 2013, drowsy drivers caused 72,000 car accidents in which 800 Americans were killed, and 44,000 were injured.7 Your problem-solving skills dwindle with each passing sleepless night, and paranoia can become a problem.
In some cases, hallucinations and sleep deprivation psychosis can set in — a condition in which you can no longer interpret reality. Recent research suggests psychosis can occur after as little as 24 hours without sleep, effectively mimicking symptoms observed in those with schizophrenia. 
Sleep Deprivation Decreases Your Immune Function
Research published in the journal Sleep reports that sleep deprivation has the same effect on your immune system as physical stress.8,9
The researchers measured the white blood cell counts in 15 people who stayed awake for 29 hours straight, and found that blood cell counts increased during the sleep deprivation phase. This is the same type of response you typically see when you’re sick or stressed.
In a nutshell, whether you’re physically stressed, sick, or sleep-deprived, your immune system becomes hyperactive and starts producing white blood cells — your body’s first line of defense against foreign invaders like infectious agents. Elevated levels of white blood cells are typically a sign of disease. So your body reacts to sleep deprivation in much the same way it reacts to illness.
Other study10 findings suggest that deep sleep plays a very special role in strengthening immunological memories of previously encountered pathogens in a way similar to psychological long-term memory retention. When you’re well rested, your immune system is able to mount a much faster and more effective response when an antigen is encountered a second time.
When you’re sleep-deprived, your body loses much of this rapid response ability. Unfortunately, sleep is one of the most overlooked factors of optimal health in general, and immune function in particular.
Sleeping Poorly Raises Your Risk of Type 2 Diabetes
A number of studies have demonstrated that lack of sleep can play a significant role in insulin resistance and type 2 diabetes. In earlier research,11 women who slept five hours or less every night were 34 percent more likely to develop diabetes symptoms than women who slept for seven or eight hours each night.
According to research12 published in the Annals of Internal Medicine, after four nights of sleep deprivation (sleep time was only 4.5 hours per night), study participants' insulin sensitivity was 16 percent lower, while their fat cells' insulin sensitivity was 30 percent lower, and rivaled levels seen in those with diabetes or obesity.
Senior author Matthew Brady, Ph.D., an associate professor of Medicine at the University of Chicago, noted that:13 "This is the equivalent of metabolically aging someone 10 to 20 years just from four nights of partial sleep restriction. Fat cells need sleep, and when they don't get enough sleep, they become metabolically groggy."
Similarly, researchers warn that teenage boys who get too little slow-wave sleep are at increased risk of developing type 2 diabetes. Slow-wave sleep is a sleep stage associated with reduced levels of cortisol (a stress hormone) and reduced inflammation. As reported by MedicineNet.com:14
“Boys who lost a greater amount of slow-wave sleep between childhood and the teen years had a higher risk of developing insulin resistance than those whose slow-wave sleep totals remained fairly stable over the years ...
‘On a night following sleep deprivation, we'll have significantly more slow-wave sleep to compensate for the loss,’ study author Jordan Gaines ... said ... ‘We also know that we lose slow-wave sleep most rapidly during early adolescence. Given the restorative role of slow-wave sleep, we weren't surprised to find that metabolic and cognitive [mental] processes were affected during this developmental period.’”
The Many Health Hazards of Sleep Deprivation
Aside from directly impacting your immune function, another explanation for why poor sleep can have such varied detrimental effects on your health is that your circadian system "drives" the rhythms of biological activity at the cellular level. We’ve really only begun to uncover the biological processes that take place during sleep.
For example, during sleep your brain cells shrink by about 60 percent, which allows for more efficient waste removal. This nightly detoxification of your brain appears to be very important for the prevention of dementia and Alzheimer’s disease. Sleep is also intricately tied to important hormone levels, including melatonin, the production of which is disturbed by lack of sleep.
This is extremely problematic, as melatonin inhibits the proliferation of a wide range of cancer cell types, as well as triggers cancer cell apoptosis (self-destruction).
Lack of sleep also decreases levels of your fat-regulating hormone leptin while increasing the hunger hormone ghrelin. The resulting increase in hunger and appetite can easily lead to overeating and weight gain. In short, the many disruptions provoked by lack of sleep cascade outward throughout your entire body, which is why poor sleep tends to worsen just about any health problem. For example, interrupted or impaired sleep can:
Contribute to a pre-diabetic state, making you feel hungry even if you've already eaten, which can wreak havoc on your weight  Harm your brain by halting new cell production. Sleep deprivation can increase levels of corticosterone (a stress hormone), resulting in fewer new brain cells being created in your hippocampus
Aggravate or make you more susceptible to stomach ulcers Raise your blood pressure and increase your risk of heart disease 
Promote or further exacerbate chronic diseases such as: Parkinson’s, Alzheimer’s, multiple sclerosis (MS), gastrointestinal tract disorders, kidney disease, and cancer Contribute to premature aging by interfering with your growth hormone production, normally released by your pituitary gland during deep sleep (and during certain types of exercise, such as high-intensity interval training)
Worsen constipation Increase your risk of dying from any cause 
Worsen behavioral difficulties in children Increase your risk of depression. In one trial, 87 percent of depressed patients who resolved their insomnia had major improvements to their depression, with symptoms disappearing after eight weeks
Alter gene expression. Research has shown that when people cut sleep from 7.5 to 6.5 hours a night, there were increases in the expression of genes associated with inflammation, immune excitability, diabetes, cancer risk, and stress15 Aggravate chronic pain. In one study, poor or insufficient sleep was found to be the strongest predictor for pain in adults over 5016
Tips to Improve Your Sleep Habits
Small adjustments to your daily routine and sleeping area can go a long way toward ensuring you uninterrupted, restful sleep — and thereby better health. To get you started, check out the suggestions listed in the table below. For even more helpful guidance on how to improve your sleep, please review my “33 Secrets to a Good Night's Sleep.”
If you're even slightly sleep deprived, I encourage you to implement some of these tips tonight, as high-quality sleep is one of the most important factors in your health and quality of life. As for how much sleep you need for optimal health, a panel of experts reviewed more than 300 studies to determine the ideal amount of sleep, and found that, as a general rule, most adults need right around eight hours per night.
Optimize your light exposure during the day, and minimize light exposure after sunset  Your pineal gland produces melatonin roughly in approximation to the contrast of bright sun exposure in the day and complete darkness at night.
If you’re in darkness all day long, your body can't appreciate the difference and will not optimize melatonin production.
Make sure you get at least 30 to 60 minutes of outdoor light exposure during the daytime in order to "anchor" your master clock rhythm, in the morning if possible. More sunlight exposure is required as you age.
Once the sun sets, minimize artificial light exposure to assist your body in secreting melatonin, which helps you feel sleepy.
It can be helpful to sleep in complete darkness, or as close to it as possible. If you need navigation light, install a low-wattage yellow, orange, or red light bulb.
Light in these bandwidths does not shut down melatonin production in the way that white and blue light does. Salt lamps are great for this purpose. 
Address mental states that prevent peaceful slumber A sleep disturbance is always caused by something, be it physical, emotional, or both. Anxiety and anger are two mental states that are incompatible with sleep.
Feeling overwhelmed with responsibilities is another common sleep blocker.
To identify the cause of your wakefulness, analyze the thoughts that circle in your mind during the time you lie awake, and look for themes.
Many who have learned the Emotional Freedom Techniques (EFT) find it is incredibly useful in helping them to sleep.
One strategy is to compile a list of your current concerns, and then “tap” on each issue. To learn how to tap, please refer to our free EFT guide. 
Keep the temperature in your bedroom below 70 degrees Fahrenheit  Many people keep their homes too warm at night.  Studies show that the optimal room temperature for sleep is between 60 and 68 degrees Fahrenheit.
Take a hot bath 90 to 120 minutes before bedtime  This raises your core body temperature, and when you get out of the bath it abruptly drops, signaling your body that you’re ready for sleep.  
Avoid watching TV or using electronics in the evening, at least an hour or so before going to bed Electronic devices emit blue light, which tricks your brain into thinking it's still daytime. Normally, your brain starts secreting melatonin between 9 pm and 10 pm, and these devices may stifle that process.
If you have to use your cellphone or computer at night, downloading a free application called F.lux will automatically dim your computer device screens as the evening wears on.17
Be mindful of electromagnetic fields (EMFs) in your bedroom  EMFs can disrupt your pineal gland and its melatonin production, and may have other detrimental biological effects.
A gauss meter is required if you want to measure EMF levels in various areas of your home. Ideally, you should turn off any wireless router while you are sleeping — after all, you don’t need the Internet when you sleep.
Develop a relaxing pre-sleep routine Going to bed and getting up at the same time each day helps keep your sleep on track, but having a consistent pre-sleep routine or “sleep ritual” is also important.
For instance, if you read before heading to bed, your body knows that reading at night signals it’s time for sleep.
Sleep specialist Stephanie Silberman, Ph.D. suggests listening to calming music, stretching or doing relaxation exercises.18 Mindfulness therapies have also been found helpful for insomnia.19
Avoid alcohol, caffeine and other drugs, including nicotine Two of the biggest sleep saboteurs are caffeine and alcohol, both of which also increase anxiety. Caffeine’s effects can last four to seven hours. Tea and chocolate also contain caffeine.
Alcohol can help you fall asleep faster, but it makes sleep more fragmented and less restorative.
Nicotine in all its forms (cigarettes, e-cigs, chewing tobacco, pipe tobacco, and smoking cessation patches) is also a stimulant, so lighting up too close to bedtime can worsen insomnia.
Many other drugs can also interfere with sleep.
Use a fitness tracker to help you get to bed on time, and track which activities boost or hinder deep sleep To optimize sleep you need to go to bed early enough. If you have to get up at 6:30am, you’re just not going to get enough sleep if you go to bed after midnight.
Many fitness trackers can now track both daytime body movement and sleep, allowing you to get a better picture of how much sleep you’re actually getting.
Newer fitness trackers like Jawbone’s UP3 can even tell you which activities led to your best sleep and what factors resulted in poor sleep. 
*******
What Your Oncologist Isn’t Telling You About Chemotherapy and Radiation
By Elyn Jacobs
Cancer is big business, no doubt about it. But did you know that the treatment your doctor orders could actually increase the likelihood that you will become a repeat customer? Conventional cancer treatments such as chemotherapy and radiation actually promote cancer. Yes, you read that correctly… they promote cancer!
Cancer is increasingly becoming a survivable disease, yet the treatments cause considerable collateral damage – including initiating new, second cancers.
Second cancers are cancers unrelated to the original cancer, which can be triggered by the very same imbalances or cancer-causing agents that led to the first cancer. In fact, doctors sometimes refer to the risk of a second cancer as “friendly fire” – that is treatment for one cancer resulting in the initiation of a second cancer. How in God’s name could any doctor fail to mention to a patient the possibility that second cancers can be created by the very cancer treatment they are administering?
How Long Has it Been Known That Chemotherapy and Radiation Can Lead to Second Cancers?
The link between chemotherapy and radiation and the development of second cancers has been known for decades! Even the American Cancer Society acknowledges that radiotherapy and chemotherapy are carcinogens and may increase risk for developing a second cancer, and that the risk is even higher when both therapies are given together. Yet still this information is not typically shared with patients or is severely downplayed by oncologists.
Chemotherapy and Second Cancers
Chemotherapy targets the DNA of cancer cells, specifically rapidly dividing cells. However, in the process it also impacts healthy cells. Risk is dose and treatment-duration related.
The most common cancers linked to chemotherapy drugs are AML (acute lymphocytic leukemia) and MDS (myelodysplastic syndrome). The news of ABC’s Good Morning America host Robin Robert’s diagnosis of MDS is a perfect example.
Radiation and Second Cancers
Beyond the obvious link from radiation exposure to cancer (Chernobyl, Fukushima, and atomic bomb blasts in Japan) and all the credible new information linking cell phones and EMFs to cancer, radiation therapy has been recognized as carcinogenic for many years. Like chemotherapy drugs, radiation therapy destroys cancer cells but also harms healthy cells.
Radiation therapy has been linked to the occurrence of solid tumors of the lung, stomach, and bone, and to various types of leukemia such as AML (acute myelogenous leukemia), CML (chronic myelogenous leukemia), and ALL (acute lymphoblastic leukemia).
The Links Between Chemotherapy and Radiation to Second Cancers are Known and Vast
•Chemotherapy drugs that are alkylating agents such as mechlorethamine, cyclophosphamide, chlorambucil, melahalan, and others interfere with a cell’s DNA that can sometimes cause AML and MDS.
•Non-alkylating chemotherapy agents (platinum-based drugs) such as cisplatin and carboplatin attack cancer cells in a similar way, increasing the risk for leukemia. Risk is dose related and the risk of developing leukemia increases even more if radiation is given along with cisplatin or carboplatin (or other platins).
•In the case of topoisomerase II inhibitors such as Etoposide, Teniposide, and Mitoantrone, the drugs stop cells from being able to repair DNA, sometimes causing leukemia, often within as little as 2-3 years. Anthracyclines, while still topoisomerase II inhibitors, are less likely to cause leukemia.
•Targeted therapy drugs such as Zelboraf and Tafinlar, which are used to treat melanoma, increase the risk of squamous cell carcinomas of the skin.
•Patients given immunosuppressive medication (they suppress the immune system), such as cyclophosphamide, chlorambucil and nitrogen mustard (for treatment or during organ transplants) are proven to develop second cancers.
•Radiation treatment for breast cancer significantly increases risk for developing lung cancer.
•Radiation treatment to the prostate can result in carcinomas.
•Chemo used to treat lymphomas and breast cancer can initiate bladder cancer.
•Chemo has been linked to the initiation of testicular cancer.
•Prior cancer treatments are a key risk factor for subsequent neoplasms for childhood cancer survivors.
•Stem cell transplants increase risk of second cancers from the chemotherapy and radiation used as well as the associated suppression of the immune system.
While secondary malignancies may be due to many factors, chemotherapy and radiation are both carcinogens; exposure to these therapies can result in an increased risk of second cancers.
Sadly, many oncologists do not inform their patients that the treatments they prescribe could possibly lead to a second cancer. Now you know and The Truth About Cancer is here to educate and empower you with this knowledge and information.
Please help bring more awareness about the dangers of second cancers from chemotherapy and radiation by sharing this article with your friends and family.
Article Summary
Conventional cancer treatments such as chemotherapy and radiation cause considerable collateral damage – including initiating new, second cancers.
The link between chemotherapy and radiation and the development of second cancers has been known for decades. Even the American Cancer Society acknowledges these treatments are carcinogens and that the risk is even higher when both therapies are given together.
The most common cancers linked to chemotherapy drugs are AML (acute lymphocytic leukemia) and MDS (myelodysplastic syndrome).
Radiation therapy has been linked to the occurrence of solid tumors of the lung, stomach, and bone, and to various types of leukemia such as AML (acute myelogenous leukemia), CML (chronic myelogenous leukemia), and ALL (acute lymphoblastic leukemia).
Sadly, many oncologists do not inform their patients that the treatments they prescribe could possibly lead to a second cancer.
*******
Frankincense and Cancer – What You Need to Know About This Essential Oil
By Ty Bollinger
As they made their iconic trek from the Far East to witness the invaluable gift of the newborn King, the three wise men from the biblical account of the birth of Jesus came bearing their own gifts. One of them, frankincense, possesses a value much more significant than just a fragrant incense. It demonstrates powerful anti-cancer effects that even in modern times legitimize this precious oil as being truly fit for a king.
The oil of frankincense has been used for thousands of years to quell disease-causing inflammation, support heightened immunity, and prevent dangerous infections. But many people remain unaware of the added cancer-fighting potential of this precious serum, which researchers from the University of Leicester in the UK (among others), have confirmed through rigorous scientific testing.
Also known as boswellia, frankincense claims as part of its vast nutrient profile a unique compound known as acetyl-11-keto-beta-boswellic acid, or AKBA for short. Scientific tests have determined that AKBA is a sworn enemy of cancer. With funding from the government of Oman, researchers from the University of Leicester were able to uncover how frankincense may be a safe and effective remedy for women who suffer from ovarian cancer – one of the leading causes of cancer in women.
Even in patients with late-stage ovarian cancer, which is exceedingly difficult to treat using conventional methods, the AKBA found in frankincense oil demonstrated clear efficacy. Here’s what Kamla Al-Salmani, lead author of the paper covering these findings and a PhD student at the University’s Cancer Studies and Molecular Medicine department, had to say:
“After a year of studying the AKBA compound with ovarian cancer cell lines in vitro, we have been able to show it is effective at killing cancer cells. Frankincense is taken by many people with no known side effects. This finding has enormous potential to be taken to a clinical trial in the future and developed into an additional treatment for ovarian cancer.”
Cancer Cells that Don’t Respond to Chemotherapy are Eradicated by Frankincense
Related research into AKBA has shown that this unique substance is also effective against other forms of cancer as well, including breast, colon, and prostate cancers. And the evidence suggests that frankincense isn’t just a supplemental treatment to go along with chemotherapy and radiation; in some cases it may actually be preferential as a replacement.
The reason for this is that frankincense shows demonstrable effectiveness in a few areas where chemotherapy isn’t all that effective, particularly with regards to ovarian cancer. Commenting on the study’s findings, Dr. Mark Evans, who heads the program of which Al-Salmani is a student, explained that certain cancer cell lines that don’t respond to chemotherapy are notably responsive to frankincense.
Though commonly mixed with a carrier oil such as saponified coconut oil or jojoba oil and applied topically, frankincense can also be consumed orally by putting one or two drops of the oil into a beverage. Be sure to consult with a physician versed in the proper use of essential oils before undertaking such a regimen for cancer-fighting purposes.
Editor’s Note: This article was originally published in August 2015.
*******

*******
Can This Trace Mineral Reduce Your Breast Cancer Risk?
By A Von Butz
What if I told you that an essential trace mineral that’s been a staple of traditional diets for many centuries is all but missing from the modern food supply? What if I also told you that this elemental micronutrient (which serves as a basic building block for hormone production and healthy growth and development), can reduce your breast cancer risk?
This nutrient is known as iodine, and chances are you’re not getting enough of it from the foods you eat every day to maintain optimal health. Iodine is absolutely essential for a number of critical bodily processes, including proper metabolism, brain and bone health, and thyroid function. But there’s currently an epidemic of iodine deficiency that’s causing many people to suffer from a host of chronic health conditions.
Breast cancer is one such condition that’s directly implicated as a health consequence of iodine deficiency. Breast cancer prevention is top of mind for many women. Therefore it’s important to understand the science behind iodine and how it’s been shown to be effective at both preventing and treating breast cancer without the need for radiation or chemotherapy.
Is Iodine Supplementation Safe?
Just so we’re clear, iodine isn’t some miracle drug or cure for cancer. It’s a nutrient that your body requires as part of its natural biochemical makeup. Iodine keep your body from malfunctioning, so to speak, and when you aren’t getting enough of it, your defenses against cancer are weakened.
Iodine is stored and used all throughout your body.  This includes your thyroid and salivary glands, as well as in your brain, your breasts and ovaries (if you’re a woman), your eyes, and in your cerebrospinal fluid. It functions as a modulator for each of these important systems, which use it to perform their respective functions.
The recommended daily allowance (RDA) for iodine in the U.S. is a mere 150 micrograms (mcg). Small quantities of iodine are often added to common table salt as a public health measure to help people attain this amount. But many progressive physicians and researchers have found that this amount of iodine is too low to protect against serious illnesses like cancer.
Dr. Guy Abraham, MD, a physician from the University of California, Los Angeles (UCLA), explains in his book The Safe and Effective Implementation of Orthoiodosupplementation in Medical Practice that iodine can be safely consumed at levels up to 100,000 times higher than the government’s RDA.
This translates to 15 grams of iodine daily, which Dr. Abraham and his colleagues say is a safe amount for humans. I wouldn’t actually recommend taking this much iodine unless you have a serious health condition that might benefit from it, and only with the guidance of a qualified physician. But knowing that you could take this amount and not be harmed demonstrates the relative safety of this largely misunderstood micronutrient.
Iodine Deficiency and Breast Cancer Risk
A much more realistic amount for daily maintenance, and one that Dr. Abraham recommends personally, is 12.5 milligrams (mg) per day. This is roughly the amount that Japanese people consume as part of their normal diet. Iodine is plentiful in seaweed, seafood, and other foods native to Japan, but not so much here in the U.S. Hence the need for supplementation.
While the 150 mcg RDA for iodine that the government recommends might help protect you against goiter, it won’t protect against cancer. Taking iodine at a therapeutic dose of 12.5 mg daily or higher can help prevent and even reverse several conditions. According to Dr. Abraham, these conditions include: hypothyroidism, fibrocystic disease, diabetes, migraine headaches, breast nodules and cysts, fibromyalgia, and more.
Studies he references in his work reveal that iodine deficiency increases a woman’s risk of breast cancer, and vice versa. Iodine sufficiency has an anti-proliferative effect on human breast cancer cells (meaning cancer cells don’t increase in number). Both animal studies and human case studies confirm this, demonstrating an inverse relationship between iodine intake and breast cancer risk.
Dr. David Brownstein, MD, another iodine expert and researcher, in his book Iodine, reports of three case studies where women diagnosed with breast cancer successfully overcame their condition by taking iodine. Each of these women took 50 mg of iodine daily, and all were later cleared of their diagnoses. This is over 30 times the U.S. recommended daily allowance for iodine.
Contained within the more than 80 research papers he published over a 30-year span during his career, Dr. Bernard Eskin also uncovered evidence that iodine is an effective remedy for fibrocystic breast disease, a pre-cancerous health condition in which lumps form in the breast. Iodine breaks these lumps apart and, in effect, helps prevent nodules and other abnormalities from turning into cancer.
Iodine Supplements and Breast Cancer Prevention
If you decide to start supplementing with iodine, be sure not to ingest the standard iodine tinctures sold at drug stores. These are usually brownish-orange in color and are sold for topical rather than internal use. Ingestible forms of iodine include potassium iodide (Iodoral is one great option), Lugol’s iodine solution, and Nascent iodine.
I won’t get into too many details about each of these, but I will say that Nascent iodine is particularly beneficial because it contains iodine in atomic rather than molecular form. This makes it more energetically potent and bioavailable for your thyroid gland, which is where most of the iodine in your body is stored.
The following quote is from the late Dr. Albert Szent Györgi, a Nobel laureate physician who’s been credited as being the first to discover vitamin C. He sums up the healing potential of iodine and its amazing ability to fill an important nutritional gap that many Americans lack:
“When I was a medical student, iodine in the form of KI (potassium iodide) was the universal medicine. Nobody knew what it did, but it did something and did something good. We students used to sum up the situation in this little rhyme: If ye don’t know where, what, and why, prescribe ye then K and I.”
Article Summary
Iodine is an essential trace mineral that is required for a number of critical bodily processes including proper metabolism, brain and bone health, and thyroid function.
There is an epidemic of iodine deficiency that’s causing many people to suffer from a host of chronic health conditions, including breast cancer.
The recommended daily allowance (RDA) for iodine in the U.S. is a mere 150 micrograms (mcg).
Dr. Guy Abraham, MD, says that iodine can be safely consumed at levels up to 100,000 times higher than the government’s RDA. However, a more realistic amount for daily maintenance that Dr. Abraham recommends is 12.5 milligrams (mg) per day.
If you supplement with iodine, do NOT ingest the standard iodine tinctures sold at drug stores. Forms of iodine considered safe to swallow include potassium iodide, Lugol’s iodine solution, and Nascent iodine.
*******

*******
What Does an Iodine Deficiency Have to Do with Cancer?
By Dr. David Brownstein
Dr. David Brownstein: Alright, so I talk about let’s do the basics on people to help supply their body with the things it needs to function optimally, which is how we were designed by our Maker. If we supply the body with the right nutrients, it should do fine for a lifetime. So, I consider one of the basics iodine. Every cell in the body needs and requires iodine to function optimally. We can’t function optimally in an iodine deficient environment. I’ve tested, along with my partners, over 6,000 patients. Over 96 percent were low in iodine, the vast majority significantly low in iodine. When I talk to clinicians around the country who are looking at this, they find the same numbers that I’m finding.
Ty Bollinger: Wow!
Dr. David Brownstein: Iodine’s main job in the body. Iodine has a lot of jobs in the body. The immune system can’t function without it. You can’t fight infections without it. But one of its main jobs is in the endocrine glands. The endocrine glands include the thyroid, the breasts, the ovaries, uterus and the prostate. What are we having problems with out there? The thyroid, the ovaries, the uterus, breasts, and prostate. I’ve mentioned the prostate, I’ve mentioned the breasts. The fastest-growing cancer in the United States is thyroid cancer. We have uterine and ovarian cancer growing at epidemic rates. We’re having epidemic rates of problems with them.
Iodine’s main job is to maintain a normal architecture of those tissues. With iodine deficiency, the first thing that happens is you get cystic formation in the breasts, the ovaries, uterus, thyroid, prostate and, let’s throw in the pancreas in here as well, which is also increasing at epidemic rates – pancreatic cancer. Cysts start to form when iodine deficiency is there. If it goes on longer, they become nodular and hard. If it goes on longer, they become hyperplastic tissue, which is the precursor to cancer. I say that’s the iodine deficiency continuum.
The good thing about iodine is, iodine has apoptotic properties, meaning it can stop a cancer cell from just continually dividing, dividing, dividing until it kills somebody. Iodine can stop this continuum wherever it catches it and hopefully reverse it, but at least put the brakes on what’s happening. Over 80 percent of women suffer from fibrocystic breast disease. That’s a precursor to breast cancer, which, as I said, one in seven women have. I say it’s an iodine deficiency problem, period. That’s what it is.
*******

Also See:
If You Know What's Good For You ...
(Part 1)
19 February 2009
and
(Part 2)
01 August 2009
and
(Part 3)
02 March 2010
and
(Part 4)
28 September 2010

and
(Part 5)
15 March 2011
and
(Part 6)
20 July 2011
and
(Part 7)
09 October 2011
and
(Part 8)
12 December 2011
and
(Part 9)
09 March 2012
and
(Part 10)
12 July 2012
and
(Part 11)
30 October 2012
and
(Part 12)
11 February 2013
and
(Part 13)
11 May 2013
and
(Part 14)
01 August 2013
and
(Part 15)
14 December 2013
and
(Part 16)
13 February 2014
and
(Part 17)
14 April 2014
(Part 20)
04 April 2015
and
(Part 21)
10 November 2015
ad
Vitamins, Genetic Food, Health
03 April 2007
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2007/04/vitamins-genetic-food-health.html
and
FDA - Drugs, Vaccines & Vitamin Supplements
(Part 1)
07 July 2008
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2008/07/marching-towards-police-state.html
and
How Safe Is Our Food?
(Part 1)
06 December 2008
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2008/12/food-how-safe-is-it.html
and
(Part 2)
26 March 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2009/03/how-safe-is-our-food-part-2.html
and
Losing Weight - Are Diets Detrimental to Health? 1
6 September 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2010/09/too-much-too-young-teen-body-obsession.html
and
No More Fluoride in the Water - Waterloo, Ontario
08 November 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2010/11/no-more-floride-in-water-waterloo.html
and
No More Fluoride in the Water - Portland, Oregon
05 June 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/06/major-victory-as-portland-oregon-votes.html
and
Why is Fluoride in Our Water?
09 January 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2011/01/why-is-fluoride-in-our-water.html
and
Medication Errors are a Major Killer!
(Part 1)
04 February 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2011/02/medication-errors-are-major-killer.html
and
Can't Sleep? There is Help!
08 February 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2011/02/cant-sleep-there-is-help.html
and
Do You Have Shift Work Sleep Disorder?
12 September 2015
About That Cup of Coffee!
21 July 2015
and
Avoid Chemotherapy and Radiation!
(Part 1)
19 November 2011
and
(Part 2)
02 August 2012
and
(Part 3)
28 September 2015
and
Cancer and Exercise!
04 September 2011
and
A World Without Cancer!
(Part 1)
08 March 2011
and
(Part 2)
31 January 2012
and
Research: Meat and Dairy Cause Cancer!
23 December 2012
and
Misinformed About Cancer? You Are Not Alone!
06 June 2013
and
I Beat Cancer
(Part 1)
10 November 2013
and
(Part 2)
31 December 2013
and
Why Are There So Many Doctors Dying Mysteriously?
11 August 2015
and
ObamaCare - Health, Euthanasia, Life in Jeopardy!
(Part 1)
20 July 2009
and
(Part 2)
10 August 2009
and
(Part 3)
27 August 2009
and
The Last Word on ObamaCare - Maybe!
20 March 2010
and
Coming Soon - Death Panels!
23 August 2010
and
How is Obama's Healthcare Working Out?
14 October 2010
and
More about ObamaCare!
24 January 2011
and
ObamaCare is Still an Issue!
(Part 1)
03 April 2012
and
(Part 2)
28 June 2012
and
(Part 3)
08 August 2013
and
(Part 4)
27 October 2013
and
(Part 5)
19 December 2013
and
Will ObamaCare be Reversed?
(Part 1)
03 January 2014
Cancer is a Cash Cow!
01 April 2014
and
Do YouTake Vitamins?
22 November 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/11/do-youtake-vitamins.html
*******

Harper's Gone! Here's Justin! (Part 2)

$
0
0
*******

Trudeau's top advisor Gerald Butts tweeted "stabbing" joke after soldiers attacked  
Published on Mar 17, 2016
Ezra Levant of TheRebel.media asks: Was it really appropriate for Trudeau's closest friend and advisor, Gerald Butts, to tweet a joke about "stabbing" just hours after two Canadian soldiers were knifed by a self-proclaimed Muslim terrorist? http://www.therebel.media/sick_trudea...
*******

Widower of Canadian terror victim HANGS UP on Trudeau
Published on Jan 22, 2016
Ezra Levant of TheRebel.media: Seven Canadian Christians have been murdered by Muslim terrorists this week. Trudeau called Yves Richard, the grieving widower of young Christian aid worker, Maude Carrier. Richard said it was so much Trudeau B.S., he just hung up on the prime minister! http://www.therebel.media/ezralevant
*******

Trudeau breaks unwritten rule of Western politics while speaking in Davos  
Published on Jan 21, 2016
Brian Lilley speaks with veteran campaigner and journalist, Ray Heard, about the partisan pot-shot Justin Trudeau took at Harper while hobnobbing in Davos and Canada’s exclusion from the meeting of Western leaders united in the fight against ISIS. MORE: http://www.therebel.media/brianlilley
*******
Justin Trudeau Smoked Marijuana After Becoming MP
Althia Raj
Updated:  06/03/2014
OTTAWA — Liberal Leader Justin Trudeau has smoked marijuana since he became an MP.
Trudeau made the admission to The Huffington Post Canada this week in a candid interview in his Parliament Hill office about his past experiences with illegal drugs and how he came to support the legalization of pot. He also revealed that his late brother, Michel Trudeau, was facing marijuana possession charges before his death in an avalanche in 1998 and that the experience influenced his position.
The Liberal leader said he last smoked marijuana about three years ago. It was at his house in Montreal, outside on a patio by the pool. “We had a few good friends over for a dinner party, our kids were at their grandmother's for the night, and one of our friends lit a joint and passed it around. I had a puff,” he told HuffPost.
Trudeau was elected to the House of Commons in 2008.
All the party leaders were asked by HuffPost when they last smoked marijuana. The Prime Minister’s Office said Stephen Harper has never tried cannabis because he suffers from asthma, “precluding him from smoking anything.” The NDP leader’s office confirmed that Thomas Mulcair has smoked pot but sent strongly worded emails refusing to say when he last used the drug or where he procured it.
Trudeau, however, in the interest of what he said was “full transparency” sat down for a 20-minute interview. He said he knows his truthfulness and his position on legalization opens him up to attacks, but it is his way of showing Canadians that he is willing to do what he thinks is right and be upfront about his experiences regardless of the Conservative attacks.
Trudeau said he’s smoked pot five or six times in his life. “It has never really done anything for me,” he later told HuffPost in an email.
“When the joint went around the room, I usually passed it around to the next person,” he said.
“(But) sometimes throughout my life, I’ve had a pull on it.”
“Sometimes, I guess, I have gotten a buzz, but other times no. I’m not really crazy about it.”
Drugs, Trudeau said, were never his thing. He also described himself as not much of a drinker. He has never smoked cigarettes and doesn’t drink coffee.
Trudeau said that his decision to smoke pot was personal and that adults should be allowed to make their own decisions.
“I’m not someone who is particularly interested in altered states, but I certainly won’t judge someone else for it,” Trudeau said. “I think that the prohibition that is currently on marijuana is unjustified.”
TRUDEAU’S EXPERIENCE WITH DRUGS
Trudeau told HuffPost that he has never done any hard drugs. It wasn’t in his nature, he said. Moreover, in his teens when others were rebelling, Trudeau said he was conscious of how his behaviour would reflect on his father, former prime minister Pierre Elliott Trudeau.
“I’m not one for dependencies, and I was always worried about that,” he said.
Despite living in Whistler for several years during his 20s, Trudeau said he rarely smoked weed. He never bought drugs and said he never consumed enough to be asked to chip in.
Once, in British Columbia, he suspects, friends added hallucinogenic mushrooms to his spaghetti, but he never confirmed it. The mushrooms in his pasta seemed to have a bit more of an impact than they should have, he said.
His first experience with drugs was at an Amsterdam café during a backpacking trip in Europe when he was 18. His friend thought it would be easier to order hash than a joint, Trudeau said. “We were trying to heat it over a candle, and it was just a total disaster.”
A few years later, during a trip to the Caribbean with his university class, Trudeau smoked his first joint. “(It) was the first time I really ever had a hit, but I don’t keep a clear memory of it, because it’s never really been a big deal.”
Trudeau said he wasn’t the one in his group of friends or family who was known to use marijuana. That title belonged to Michel, his youngest brother and the family’s most carefree spirit, Trudeau suggested.
A PERSONAL CONNECTION TO THE MARIJUANA DEBATE
Trudeau told HuffPost that when Michel died at the age of 23 in an avalanche in B.C.’s Kokanee Glacier Provincial Park in November, 1998, his brother had marijuana possession charges pending against him.
Michel had been in a car accident three months before the avalanche, Trudeau said. “One of the cops cleaning up the scene found a little cigarette box with a bit of pot in it,” Trudeau recounted, his fingers a few millimetres apart to suggest how little marijuana there was.
“Mich had charges pending against him when he died for marijuana possession even though it was just a tiny amount,” he added. Trudeau said that was one of the factors that led him to first support decriminalizing weed.
It wasn’t until last November that he came to the conclusion that legalizing cannabis was the only way to keep it away from criminal elements and away from children, he said.
If people needed ID to buy marijuana, they told Trudeau, the black market would dry up. If there were severe penalties for selling it near a school, students would have a harder time accessing it, they added.
“That line of argument did a long way towards convincing me as well,” he said.
“The biggest concern I always had was the thickening of the border and being off-side with the United States,” Trudeau said. But with Colorado and Washington legalizing marijuana and Oregon coming close to doing so, Trudeau said he doesn’t think legalization on this side of the border will be a big issue if it is done right.
Legalizing cannabis is a one-off, he added, not a gateway toward legalizing other drugs.
“I do not see this as a slippery slope…. I see this as an issue of legislators slowly catching up to where public opinion and public behaviour actually is.”
WHY LEGALIZING IS TRUDEAU’S ANSWER
Trudeau hopes to have a serious discussion with policy experts about legalizing weed this fall. Canadian taxpayers spend more than $500-million a year on enforcement and punishment related to marijuana convictions, he said.
“We are talking about 475,000 people since Stephen Harper has become prime minister who have criminal convictions because of marijuana,” the Liberal leader said. “Those are lives ruined.”
Decriminalization – a policy position supported by the NDP – does nothing to eliminate criminal control of the pot trade or to limit access by minors, Trudeau said.
“That is the big goal for me,” he said. “For all the studies that have shown that it is less harmful to people than alcohol or cigarettes, the impact on a developing brain is significant and concerning.”
Keeping it out of the hands of teenagers can happen only if you require people to show ID and if you maintain quality control, Trudeau said.
For Trudeau, who voted in favour of mandatory minimum sentences for pot possession in 2009 and later raised concerns that marijuana today is far more potent than it was a generation ago, the policy position is quite a reversal.
He acknowledged it has taken him some time to embrace legalization. He now believes a responsible regulatory framework informed by a scientific assessment could place limits on tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) levels that could be sold in convenience stores or marijuana stands. THC is the active intoxicant in marijuana. You never know what risks you’re facing if you’re buying from a dealer, Trudeau said.
TRUDEAU AWARE HIS POSITION LEAVES HIM OPEN TO ATTACKS
Trudeau knows his pot position will open him up to attacks and may cost him votes.
He has heard concerns from members of some ethnic communities about his support for legalization. He has told them his position has evolved out of respect for science and individual choice and a desire to keep marijuana away from children – principles everyone, he thinks, can agree with.
It’s up to the “prohibitionists” to demonstrate through evidence and facts that that marijuana should remain illegal, Trudeau said. They won’t be able to do that, he added, because the science just isn’t there.
“They have to fall back on nanny state, ‘We know what’s good for you, we’re telling you how to behave.’
“They are saying that my position is irresponsible because I am just helping out criminal gangs. I mean, it’s ludicrous,” Trudeau said.
Standing up for what he believes in, however controversial, is his way of demonstrating that he is willing to do what he thinks is right regardless of how it opens him up to attacks, Trudeau said.
“People have been almost ready to do this for a long time, but nobody wanted to face down the Conservative attack machine,” he said.
“This is maybe not the big issue of an election – I certainly hope it is not the big issue in an election – but it is not an insignificant issue,” he said.
Liberalism and being a Liberal are all about freedom and respecting the choices of others, Trudeau said. “I think that adults should be free to choose their behaviours in this particular case.”
*******
Also See:
Harper's Gone! Here's Justin!
(Part 1)
09 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/heres-justin.html
and
How Does the Future Look for Canada?
17 December 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/12/how-does-future-look-for-canada.html
and
 Are You a Fan of Justin Trudeau?
18 November 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/11/are-you-fan-of-justin-trudeau.html
and
Why is Obama Getting Involved with Canadian Politics?
24 October 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/10/obama-machine-takes-over-canada-by.html
 *******

What's with Rick Warren? (Part 2)

$
0
0
*******

Published on May 24, 2015
From Rick Warren to the emergent church take a look at how their roots and foundations come from marketing and corporations, to rob the community and not to give the people JESUS... A MUST SEE!!!
*******
Chrislam’s Rick Warren Partnering With Mosques To Teach That God And Allah Are The Same
Defying some of his fellow conservative Christian critics, one of the most prominent religious leaders in the country told several thousand American Muslims on Saturday that "the two largest faiths on the planet" must work together to combat stereotypes and solve global problems.
by Geoffrey Grider 
February 28, 2012
Rick Warren and the founding of Chrislam 2.0
“Can two walk together, except they be agreed?” Amos 3:3 (KJV)
EDITOR’S NOTE: Over the years that NTEB has been reporting on Rick Warren and Islam, people will write in and tell us “but Pastor Warrendenies that any of this is true“. To which we say, “of course he does”. And to a slight degree he is correct. Most of the work that he has done to create Islam has been through para-church groups like Kings Way that he is not “officially” involved with, but finances and nurtures. Adolf Hitler never once visited any of his concentration camps, and only one time ever put anything in writing so nothing could be traced back to him. But obviously, he did it.Click here to see a video of Rick Warren giving what we call the speech that started the modern-day apostate Chrislam movement. And there is no denying that.
From WND: (OCREGISTER)— The Rev. Rick Warren, pastor of Saddleback Church in Lake Forest and one of America’s most influential Christian leaders, has embarked on an effort to heal divisions between evangelical Christians and Muslims by partnering with Southern California mosques and proposing a set of theological principles that includes acknowledging that Christians and Muslims worship the same God.
RELATED STORY:Click here to read about Rick Warren’s beginnings in Chrislam.
The effort, informally dubbed King’s Way, caps years of outreach between Warren and Muslims. Warren has broken Ramadan fasts at a Mission Viejo mosque, met Muslim leaders abroad and addressed 8,000 Muslims at a national convention in Washington D.C.
Saddleback worshippers have invited Muslims to Christmas dinner and played interfaith soccer at a picnic in Irvine attended by more than 300 people. (The game pitted pastors and imams against teens from both faiths. The teens won.)
The effort by a prominent Christian leader to bridge what polls show is a deep rift between Muslims and evangelical Christians culminated in December at a dinner at Saddleback attended by 300 Muslims and members of Saddleback’s congregation. source – WND
From Stand Up For The Truth: This past Sunday, a major shift was
announced by Pastor Rick Warren at his Saddleback Church in Orange County, California, that has many Christian leaders concerned. As Saddleback hosted its ”celebration of Jesus (pbuh),” attended by a number of Muslim communities in Southern California, something theologically significant happened at the dinner portion of the event.
Only a select number of people were invited to the dinner. A document one year in the making was presented which encourages Christians and Muslims to “appreciate the similarities of our faiths.” What does this mean? Is it simply a way to reach out a helping hand to the communities in Southern California, or is something more serious happening? source – Stand Up For The Truth
Saddleback Church in Orange County, California, home to super-pastor Rick Warren (Obama inauguration, Purpose Driven Life, etc.) has joined forces with Southern California mosques to adopt a three-step plan for ending enmity between evangelical Christians and Muslims.
From Time: WASHINGTON — Defying some of his fellow conservative Christian critics, one of the most prominent religious leaders in the country told several thousand American Muslims on Saturday that “the two largest faiths on the planet” must work together to combat stereotypes and solve global problems. source – MSNBC
From Jim Hinch: Saddleback Church in Orange County, California, home to super-pastor Rick Warren (Obama inauguration, Purpose Driven Life, etc.) has joined forces with Southern California mosques to adopt a three-step plan for ending enmity between evangelical Christians and Muslims.
The plan’s first step calls for Muslims and Christians to recognize they worship the same God. Interfaith reconciliation has been proceeding for years between Muslims and more liberal-leaning mainline Protestant denominations.
This is the first such effort I’ve heard of by an evangelical mega-church. Many evangelicals regard Islam as Christianity’s number one enemy, and they do not at all agree that the two faiths worship the same God. This is likely to make waves. source – Jim Hinch
*******
Pre-New Age Religion Shoved Down Our Throats
*******
EXPOSED! Rick Warren Admits Membership In New World Order Group CFR
He let me know he is a close friend of President Bush ''and many, if not most, of the generals at the Pentagon.'' He also told me he did...
by Geoffrey Grider 
July 15, 2011
Rick Warren admits membership in good standing in Council on Foreign Relations – CFR
WASHINGTON – Rick Warren, the superstar mega-church pastor and bestselling author of ”The Purpose Driven Life,” had a Damascus Road experience last week – and like Saul of Tarsus, one of the after-effects appears to be blindness.
Rick Warren – Member in good standing in CFR
Warren went to Syria and could find no persecution of Christians. He could find no persecution of Jews. He could find no evidence of extremism. He could find no evidence of the sponsorship of terrorism.
Despite the temporary loss of vision that prevented him from seeing any evil in the totalitarian police state, Warren’s hearing was apparently not affected – for his ears were tickled by what he heard and apparently accepted lock, stock and barrel from the second-generation dictator, Bashar Assad, and his state-approved mufti.
But that’s not the story Warren is telling – at least not in the official press releases he is sending out from Rwanda in response to my confrontations with him last week in which I accused him of betraying his own country in a hostile foreign land and of being a propaganda tool of the Islamo-fascist regime in Damascus.
In fact, after I called him out last week in my column, Warren e-mailed me claiming to have been misquoted by the official Syrian news agency.
”Joseph, why didn’t you contact me first and discover the fact that I said nothing of the sort?” he pleaded. ”The trip was a favor to my next door neighbor, had nothing to do with policy, and was done with the State Department’s knowledge – who told us to expect exactly what Syria did – a PR blast. I don’t pretend to be a diplomat. I’m a pastor who just gets invited places.”
I pointed out to Warren that WND had indeed attempted to contact him about his trip. No one from his Saddleback Church ever returned our calls the day the story broke.
”I’m sure since you were warned in advance by the State Department that you took the precaution of recording your own words,” I suggested in my response. ”We look forward to seeing the transcripts or hearing the recordings.”
I also asked if he could respond specifically to the words put in his mouth by the Syrian news agency. And lastly I suggested that he should have ”counseled with me, or other people knowledgeable about the Middle East before doing so much damage with your reckless trip.”
I really didn’t expect to hear back from Warren – but, a few minutes later, I did, with an absolutely stunning retort.
He let me know he is a close friend of President Bush ”and many, if not most, of the generals at the Pentagon.” He also told me he did not tape anything while in Syria, ”because it was a courtesy call, like I do in every country.” Warren explained that he had also counseled with the National Security Council and the White House, as well as the State Department, before his little courtesy call for a neighbor.
”In fact,” Warren added, ”as a member of the Council on Foreign Relations and Oxford Analytica, I might know as much about the Middle East as you.”
He continued: ”I hope you’ll not choose to believe Syrian propaganda even though, as you pointed out at the start of your article, you’ve been wanting to criticize me for some time. In spite of your rush to judgment, I think you write great, insightful columns. You are almost batting 1,000.”
No sooner had I received this surprising response from Warren, I also got an e-mail providing a link to a YouTube video of Rick Warren in Syria explaining how great the Assad regime treats Christians and Jews and how Damascus ”does not permit extremism of any kind.”
Not one to let lies go unchallenged, I wrote back to Warren with a link to the YouTube video: ”If you didn’t tape anything, what’s this? Do you really believe Syria does not allow extremism of any kind? There are more terrorist organizations based in Syria than anywhere else in the world!”
It might be that Rick Warren, deep in the bush of Rwanda, never received those last questions, because he never responded – at least not in the last three days.
He did, however, within minutes make sure the YouTube video he recorded independent of his meetings with the Syrian brown shirts was removed from the network. Vanished. Kaput. Sterilized. Cleansed. Stay tuned for more on Rick Warren’s ”Agenda-Driven Life” in the coming days – sponsored, of course, by the Council on Foreign Relations. source – Joseph Farah/WND
*******
Rick Warren's Africa Problem
Max Blumenthal
01.07.09
Team Obama likes to cite Warren’s work on AIDS in Africa to combat criticism about the controversial pastor. But how does burning condoms in the name of Jesus save lives?
Once hailed by Time magazine as “America’s Pastor,” California mega-church leader and bestselling author of The Purpose Driven Life Rick Warren now finds himself on the defensive. President-elect Barack Obama’s selection of Warren to deliver the inaugural prayer has generated intense scrutiny of the pastor’s beliefs on social issues, from his vocal support for Prop 8, a ballot initiative banning same-sex marriage in California, to his comparison of homosexuality to pedophilia, incest and bestiality. Many of Obama’s supporters have demanded that he withdraw the invitation.
Warren’s defense against charges of intolerance ultimately depends upon his ace card: his heavily publicized crusade against AIDS in Africa. Obama senior advisor David Axelrod cited Warren’s work in Africa as one of “the things on which [Obama and Warren] agree” on the December 28 episode of Meet the Press. Warren may be opposed to gay rights and abortion, the thinking goes, but he tells evangelicals it is their God-given duty to battle one of the greatest pandemics in history. What could be wrong with that?
Ssempa’s stunts have included publishing the names of homosexuals in local newspapers while lobbying for criminal penalties to imprison them.
But since the Warren inauguration controversy erupted, the nature of work against AIDS in Africa has gone unexamined. Warren has not been particularly forthcoming to those who have attempted to look into it. His website contains scant information about the results of his program. However, an investigation into Warren’s involvement in Africa reveals a web of alliances with right-wing clergymen who have sidelined science-based approaches to combating AIDS in favor of abstinence-only education. More disturbingly, Warren’s allies have rolled back key elements of one of the continent’s most successful initiative, the so-called ABC program in Uganda. Stephen Lewis, the United Nations’ special envoy for HIV/AIDS in Africa, told the New York Times their activism is “resulting in great damage and undoubtedly will cause significant numbers of infections which should never have occurred.”
Warren’s man in Uganda is a charismatic pastor named Martin Ssempa. The head of the Makerere Community Church, a rapidly growing congregation, Ssempe enjoys close ties to his country’s First Lady, Janet Museveni, and is a favorite of the Bush White House. In the capitol of Kampala, Ssempa is known for his boisterous crusading. Ssempa’s stunts have included burning condoms in the name of Jesus and arranging the publication of names of homosexuals in cooperative local newspapers while lobbying for criminal penalties to imprison them.
Dr. Helen Epstein, a public health consultant who authored the book, The Invisible Cure: Why We’re Losing The Fight Against AIDS In Africa, met Ssempa in 2005. Epstein told me the preacher seemed gripped by paranoia, warning her of a secret witches coven that met under Lake Victoria. “Ssempa also spoke to me for a very long time about his fear of homosexual men and women,” Epstein said. “He seemed very personally terrified by their presence.”
When Warren unveiled his global AIDS initiative at a 2005 conference at his Saddleback Church, he cast Ssempa as his indispensable sidekick, assigning him to lead a breakout session on abstinence-only education as well as a seminar on AIDS prevention. Later, Ssempa delivered a keynote address, a speech so stirring it “had the audience on the edge of its seats,” according to Warren’s public relations agency.
A year later, Ssempa returned to Saddleback Church to lead another seminar on AIDS. By this time, his bond with the Warrens had grown almost familial. “You are my brother, Martin, and I love you,” Rick Warren’s wife, Kay, said to Ssempa from the stage. Her voice trembled with emotion as she spoke and tears ran down her cheeks.
Joining Ssempa at Warren’s church were two key Bush administration officials who controlled the purse strings of the president’s newly minted $15 billion anti-AIDS initiative in Africa, PEPFAR. Ugandan first lady Janet Museveni also appeared through a videotaped address to tout the success of her country’s numerous church-based abstinence programs.
These Bush officials—Randall Tobias, the Department of State’s Global AIDS coordinator, and Claude Allen, the White House’s chief domestic policy advisor—are closely linked to the Christian right. Tobias, the so-called “global AIDS czar,” declared in 2004 that condoms “really have not been very effective," and crusaded against prostitution, until he resigned in 2007 when he was exposed as a regular client of the D.C. Madam’s escort service. Allen, once an aide to the late Senator Jesse Helms, resigned in 2006 after he was arrested for felony thefts from retail stores.
During the early 1990s, when many African leaders denied the AIDS epidemic’s existence, Ugandan President Yoweri Museveni spoke openly about the importance of safe sex. With the help of local and international non-governmental organizations, he implemented an ambitious program emphasizing abstinence, monogamous relationships, and using condoms as the best ways to prevent the spread of AIDS. He called the program “ABC.” By 2003, Uganda’s AIDS rate plummeted 10 percent. The government’s free distribution of the “C” in ABC—condoms—proved central to the program’s success, according to Avert, an international AIDS charity.
On New Year’s Eve, 1999, Janet Museveni, who had become born-again, convened a massive stadium revival in Kampala to dedicate her country to the “lordship” of Jesus Christ. As midnight approached, the First Lady summoned a local pastor to the stage to anoint the nation. “We renounce idolatry, witchcraft, and Satanism in our land!” he proclaimed.
Two years later, Janet Museveni flew to Washington at the height of a heated congressional debate over PEPFAR. She carried in her hand a prepared message to distribute to Republicans. Abstinence was the golden bullet in her country’s fight against AIDS, she assured conservative lawmakers, denying the empirically proven success of her husband’s condom distribution program. Like magic, the Republican-dominated Congress authorized over $200 million for Uganda, but only for the exclusive promotion of abstinence education. Ssempa soon became the “special representative of the First Lady’s Task Force on AIDS in Uganda,” receiving $40,000 from the PEPFAR pot.
Emboldened by U.S. support, Ssempa took his anti-condom crusade to Makerere University in Kampala, where senior residents of a men’s dormitory promoted safe sex by greeting incoming freshmen with a giant effigy wearing a condom. According to Helen Epstein, one day after she visited the school, Ssempa stormed on to campus, tore the condom from the effigy, grabbed a box of free condoms, and set them ablaze. “I burn these condoms in the name of Jesus!” Ssempa shouted as he prayed over the burning box.
“It was a very controversial time,” Epstein told me. “After the Bush administration authorized PEPFAR, a number of the local evangelical preachers began to get excited about this and get involved in AIDS very rapidly. To try to prove his credentials, Ssempa became increasingly active and vociferous in his antipathy towards condoms.”
By 2005, billboards promoting condom use disappeared from the streets of Kampala, replaced by billboards promoting virginity. “Until recently, all HIV-related billboards were about condoms. Those of us calling for abstinence and faithfulness need billboards too,” Ssempa told the BBC at the time. A 2005 report by Human Rights Watch documented that educational material in Uganda’s secondary schools falsely claiming condoms had microscopic pores that could be penetrated by the HIV virus and noted the sudden nationwide shortage of condoms due to new restrictions imposed by on condom imports.
AIDS activists arrived at the 16th International AIDS Conference in Toronto in 2006 with disturbing news from Uganda. Due at least in part to the chronic condom shortage, HIV infections were on the rise again. The disease rate had spiked to 6.5 percent among rural men, and 8.8 percent among women—a rise of nearly two points in the case of women. “The ‘C’ part [of ABC] is now mainly silent,” said Ugandan AIDS activist Beatrice Ware. As a result, she said, “the success story is unraveling.”
Troubled by what he was witnessing in Africa, Rep. Tom Lantos led the new Democratic-controlled Congress to reform PEPFAR during a reauthorization process in February 2008. Lantos insisted that Congress lift the abstinence-only earmark imposed by Republicans in 2002, and begin to fund family planning elements like free condom distribution. His maneuver infuriated Warren, who immediately boarded a plane for Washington to join Christian right leaders including born-again former Watergate felon Chuck Colson for an emergency press conference on the Capitol lawn. In his speech, Warren claimed that Lantos’ bill would spawn an increase in the sex trafficking of young women. The bill died and PEPFAR was reauthorized in its flawed form. (Days later, Lantos died of cancer after serving for 27 years in Congress.)
With safe sex advocates on the run, Warren and Ssempa trained their sights on another social evil. In August 2007, Ssempa led hundreds of his followers through the streets of Kampala to demand that the government mete out harsh punishments against gays. “ Arrest all homos,” read placards. And: “A man cannot marry a man.” Ssempa continued his crusade online, publishing the names of Ugandan gay rights activists on a website he created, along with photos and home addresses. “Homosexual promoters,” he called them, suggesting they intended to seduce Uganda’s children into their lifestyle. Soon afterwards, two of President Yoweri Museveni’s top officials demanded the arrest of the gay activists named by Ssempa. Terrified, the activists immediately into hiding.
Warren, in his effort to dispel criticism, has denied harboring homophobic sentiments. “I could give you a hundred gay friends,” he told MSNBC’s Ann Curry on December 18. “I have always treated them with respect. When they come and want to talk to me, I talk to them.”
But when Uganda’s Anglican bishops threatened to bolt from the Church of England because of its tolerant stance towards homosexuals, Warren parachuted into Kampala to confer international legitimacy on their protest. “The Church of England is wrong and I support the Church of Uganda on the boycott,” Warren proclaimed in March 2008. Declaring homosexuality an unnatural way of life, Warren flatly stated, “We shall not tolerate this aspect [homosexuality in the church] at all.”
Days later, Warren emerged so enthusiastic after a meeting with First Lady Museveni, he announced a plan to make Uganda a “Purpose Driven Nation.” “The future of Christianity is not Europe or North America, but Africa, Asia, and Latin America,” he told a cheering throng at Makerere University. Then, Ugandan Archbishop Henry Orombi rose and predicted, “Someday, we will have a purpose driven continent!”
Max Blumenthal is a senior writer for The Daily Beast and writing fellow at The Nation Institute, whose book, Republican Gomorrah (Basic/Nation Books), is forthcoming in Spring 2009. Contact him at maxblumenthal3000@yahoo.com.
*******
Also See:
What is the Future of Religion?
13 February 2012
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/02/what-is-future-of-religion.html
and
What's with Rick Warren?
(Part 1)
31 March 2012
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/03/whats-with-rick-warren.html
and
Religion of the New World Order
 16 December 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2009/12/religion-of-new-world-order.html
and
One World Religion - Closer Than You Think
03 October 2008
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2008/10/one-world-religion-closer-than-you.html
and
Rev Moon, Money, and Corruption
26 December 2007
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2007/12/consortium-rev.html
*******

Did the United States Steal Gold?

$
0
0
*******

Germany Gives Up On Trying To Repatriate It's Gold From The Federal Reserve!!  
Published on Jun 23, 2014
*******
The United States Stole Iraqi Gold & Oil?
Posted by Dr. Adrian Wong
Date: September 23, 2015
There is a conspiracy theory going around, claiming that the United States stole Iraqi gold and oil, specifically 20 trillion dollars in gold and 30 trillion dollars worth of oil. It is backed up by these pictures of American soldiers posing with gold bars, and an Al Jazeera news report.
Here is an example of the conspiracy claim that the United States stole Iraqi gold and oil :
30 trillion worth of Oil & 20 trillion in gold was stolen in the invasion on Iraq
Remember Saddam had no weapons of mass destruction and was not involved in 9/11
But his countries [sic] wealth was looted nevertheless
Then they went to Afghanistan to secure the poppy fields and lithium mines by force.
Let’s break down this conspiracy theory and see how many points are true, and how many are false.
Claim #1: 30 Trillion Worth Of Oil Was Stolen
Verdict: Mostly false. The United States did not steal Iraqi oil. They did lose track of 8.7 billion dollars worth of Iraqi funds.
Details: After the invasion of Iraq concluded, Iraqi oil was sold to help fund the Development Fund of Iraq (DFI). Other sources of funds include surplus funds (about USD 10 billion) from the UN Oil-For-Food Program, and the sale of seized Iraqi assets. The United States did not truck away Iraqi oil, as claimed.
In July 2010, the US Special Inspector General for Iraq Reconstruction (SIGIR) discovered that the US Department of Defense could not account properly for USD 8.7 billion of DFI funds. This led the Iraqi Parliament to request the United Nation’s help in demanding that the US return $17 billion of “oil money” that it said was stolen from the Iraqi people :
All the indications are that the institutions of the United States of America committed financial corruption by stealing the money of the Iraqi people, which was allocated to develop Iraq, (and) that it was about $17 billion. … Our committee decided to send this issue to you … to look into it and restore the stolen money.
There is no evidence that the money that was unaccounted for was repatriated to the United States, or officially taken by the United States. Even assuming that it was not poor accounting and all of the USD 8.7 billion was truly stolen, that is a far cry (0.029%) from the USD 30 trillion the conspiracy theory claimed was stolen. It is also rendered ludicrous by the fact that the United States spent USD 60 billion in the reconstruction of Iraq.
Also consider the fact that Iraqi oil production only reached 2 million barrels per day in 2007. Assuming an average sale price of USD 60 per barrel, it would take them 685 years to sell enough oil to make USD 30 trillion.
Claim #2: 20 Trillion Worth Of Gold Was Stolen
Verdict: False. The United States did not steal Iraqi gold. The gold bars (as well as currency and other valuables) were transported to Kuwait to be analysed for their purity and valued, before they are sent to the Central Iraqi Treasury.
Detail: Do you recognise this man? He’s Lt. Col. Scott Schmidt, who was in charge of the 230th Finance Battalion. The battalion’s job was to seize Iraqi assets like currency, gold bars and other valuables.
These assets would be transported to the US Army’s headquarters in Kuwait where they were examined by the Secret Service and/or the US Department of Treasury to determine their authenticity and value. The assets were then returned to the Central Iraqi Treasury or the Development Fund of Iraq (DFI).
In 2003, Iraq had under 6 tonnes of gold reserves, worth less than USD 70 million. So how can the United States steal 20 trillion dollars worth of gold from Iraq? USD 20 trillion worth of gold would weigh at least 1,714,285 tonnes in 2003.
Guess how much gold mankind has ever mined? Just 171,300 tonnes – under 10% of what the conspiracy theory claims the United States stole from Iraq. As of April 2013, the value of all the gold in the world was just USD 8.2 trillion – 27% of what the conspiracy theory claims the United States stole from Iraq.
Claim #3: Saddam Had No Weapons Of Mass Destruction & Was Not Involved In 9/11
Verdict: True. After US-led forces occupied Iraq, they couldn’t find any weapon of mass destruction. The Iraq Survey Group finally concluded that Iraq ended its WMD programs in 1991.
To justify their invasion, the Bush Administration regularly implied a link between Saddam Hussein and the 9/11 attacks. However, they never declared outright that Iraq was directly or indirectly responsible for the 9/11 terrorist attack. Needless to say, history has proven that Saddam Hussein and the Iraqis were not involved in the September 11 attack.
Claim #4: After Invading Iraq, the Americans Invaded Afghanistan
Verdict: False. The Americans invaded Afghanistan before they invaded Iraq.
Details: The United States launched Operation Enduring Freedom with the United Kingdom, invading Afghanistan in October 2001. Only in March 2003 did the Americans invade Iraq in Operation Iraqi Freedom.
Claim #5: The Americans Invaded Afghanistan To Secure The Poppy Fields & Lithium Mines
Verdict: False. The Americans invaded Afghanistan because the Taliban refused to extradite Osama bin Laden to the United States, and expel al-Qaeda from Afghanistan. The massive lithium deposit in Afghanistan was only discovered 6 years later in 2007.
Details: Poppy has been cultivated in Afghanistan since the Soviet invasion in 1979, as a means to fund the Mujahideen. If the Americans were interested in the opium trade, President Reagan wouldn’t have declared the War on Drugs on the 14th of October, 1982. They also would have stuck around after the Soviets withdrew from Afghanistan in 1989.
The Americans did not invade Afghanistan until the September 11 attacks forced them to deal aggressively with the al-Qaeda threat. They invaded Afghanistan on the 7th of October 2011, after the Taliban refused to extradite Osama bin Laden to the United States, and expel al-Qaeda from Afghanistan.
The claims of lithium mines was based on a 2007 US Geological Survey report. It revealed that Afghanistan has the world’s largest reserves of lithium, as well as huge deposits of iron, gold, cobalt, copper and other valuable minerals. The US Geological Survey only began the effort with aerial surveys in 2006 before conducting a more sophisticated survey in 2007 that resulted in the report.
However, the report never came to the attention of both the American and Afghan governments until more than two years later. In 2009, a Pentagon task force that created business development programs in Iraq was transferred to Afghanistan. They stumbled upon the geological data, and brought in mining experts to check and validate the data. Only in 2010 was the importance of the 2007 report revealed.
Since the survey was only initiated in 2006, five years after the Americans invaded Afghanistan, it is temporally impossible for the unknown lithium deposits to be the “real reason” for the invasion of Afghanistan.
As of 2015, there is no lithium mine in Afghanistan. In fact, none of the new mineral reserves discovered in the 2007 USGS report has been mined.
What About The Al Jazeera News Report?
The conspiracy theory actually includes this screenshot of an Al Jazeera news report that purportedly shows them reporting on “Iraq’s Missing Wealth“.
The United States Stole Iraqi Gold & Oil? - The Rojak Pot
Well, that was from a June 2011 Al Jazeera news report, which you can view here :
As you can see, Al Jazeera never claimed that the United States stole Iraqi gold or oil. In fact, the missing money originated from the United States. The Bush Administration sent USD 20 billion in funds to Iraqi ministries in 2004. Of those funds, USD 6.6 billion could not be accounted for due to missing documents.
Osama al-Nujaifi, the Iraqi Parliament Speaker, disputed the figure in 2011, arguing that the Development Fund of Iraq (DFI) lost USD 18.7 billion. No matter whether the unaccounted funds is really USD 18.7 billion or just USD 6.6 billion, they are far smaller than the absurd claim that the United States looted the Iraqis of USD 20 trillion in gold and USD 30 trillion in oil.
*******

After years of the Fed refusing an Audit Of The Gold In Fort Knox...We Find It's Empty. . .
Published on Apr 20, 2013
*******
Who Stole the GOLD on 9/11?
Posted by  Greg Bacon
Wednesday, September 28, 2011
The BIG Question is, was there any gold in the vaults or had it been stolen before the FALSE FLAG/INSIDE JOB of 9/11?
Did the gold wind up in Israel's Negev Desert, where it was cast into a giant, golden calf?:)
Picture of the purloined gold that is now in Israel, being worshiped by the Zionist thieves in 'StolenLand.'
At least several HUNDRED BILLION DOLLARS of gold missing from the WTC complex during the FALSE FLAG/INSIDE JOB of 9/11
Damn, isn't Bin Laden and 'al CIA duh' shrewd? They not only could evade the ENTIRE intelligence apparatus of the Western world, cause havoc at NORAD so they wouldn't be able to protect the USA on 9/11, knew exactly where those blind radar spots that can't pick up errant jets and also knew where to steal several billion dollars worth of gold!!!
November 2, 2001: Giuliani Reduces Number of Firefighters at Ground Zero, Following Recovery of Gold New York City Mayor Rudolph Giuliani angers firefighters when he decides to severely reduce the number of them that can search for remains at Ground Zero. Until now, up to 300 firefighters at a time have been involved in the search and recovery effort. Giuliani’s decision will mean no more than 25 at a time can do so in future.
So far, the bodies or remains of 101 firefighters have been recovered, out of the 343 who died at the World Trade Center on 9/11. According to the IAFF, the mayor refuses to even meet with local union presidents about the decision [to stop looking for FF remains AFTER the gold was found]. Due to the ensuing public outcry, Giuliani will modify his policy and allow firefighters back on the pile at Ground Zero. The remains of another 113 firefighters will subsequently be found. The IAFF later alleges that “the mayor’s switch to a scoop-and-dump coincided with the final removal of tens of millions of dollars of gold, silver and other assets of the Bank of Nova Scotia that were buried beneath what was once the towers” (see (Mid-October-mid November 2001)). “Once the money was out, Giuliani sided with the developers that opposed a lengthy recovery effort, and ordered the scoop-and-dump operation so they could proceed with redevelopment.”
Gold? Did someone mention Gold?
9-11 WTC Biggest Gold Heist in History: $300 Billion in Bars
The fate of nearly $1 billion worth of gold, silver and other precious metals stored beneath the WTC before 9-11 continues to baffle many.
The Times piece also reported that some of the recovered gold may have been found outside this vault.
“The gold, which was discovered . . . was being transported through the basement of the building on the morning of Sept. 11,” reads the article. “Recovery workers reached a service tunnel and discovered a 10-wheel [truck] and a number of cars [that] had been crushed by falling steel.”
Was the uncovered 10-wheel truck the last in a fleet of gold-laden rigs with an armed security escort? Did personnel decide to abandon these vehicles and flee on foot as they heard the structure above them giving way? Answers to these questions may never be fully addressed so long as the federal government refuses to revisit the 9-11 tragedy with an adequate investigation.
Meanwhile, some insist the official story is an unabashed lie and that another reason behind the 9-11 attacks was to pull off the biggest gold heist in history. One of the more outrageous claims along this vein comes from former mob boss Tony Gambino, who declared in a 2007 radio interview: “I know for a fact that Bush [and other] U.S. government leaders had prior knowledge and helped organize 9-11. They did it for many obvious reasons, one being to instigate a war in Iraq. But they also did it to get their hands on all the gold that was hidden below the [WTC].”
Source
"Who you going to believe, the Feds or your lying eyes?"
Missing Building Contents
Accounts of Ground Zero agree on the thoroughness of the destruction. What remained was primarily the structural steel, other metal pieces, paper, and dust. Not only were the non-metallic parts of the building -- such as concrete and glass -- pulverized, so were the building contents, as firefighter Joe Casaliggi recalls.
"You have 10-story buildings that leave more debris than these two 100-story towers, Where the f___ is everything? A serious week-long search and we've found 200 [bodies] in a pile of 5,000? What's going on? Where is everyone? Why aren't we finding more bodies? Cause it's all vaporized -- turned to dust. We're breathing people in that dust."
The levelings may have destroyed evidence of crimes beyond just plane impacts and building collapses. There were vaults of gold bullion in the basement of 4 World Trade Center, but the amount of gold recovered seems to be only a small fraction of the amount known to be stored there. Was the gold stolen? Being a dense, malleable metal, gold should not have been broken up by whatever destroyed the towers. Gold is also one of the most inert elements, and is extremely unlikely to participate in chemical reactions. Even if it were possible to pulverize and disperse the gold, its storage in the basement of WTC 4 assured that it escaped the violent forces that pulverized the towers.
Gold and Silver Recovered from WTC Basement Area; Evidence Suggests Attempted Theft
Attempted Theft?
Confessions Of A 911 Hitman: How & Why I Helped Blow Up The World Trade Center
Or was the REAL gold stolen and replaced by gold-colored tungsten bars, which now seem to be popping up all over the world?
9/11 was a FALSE FLAG/INSIDE JOB pulled off by the White House; elements of he CIA and FBI and ISRAEL.
The 300 billion in gold pales in comparison with the TRILLIONS stolen from American 401k accounts and pension funds, by those "Too Big to Fail" Wall Street bankster gangsters, who hid their thefts behind the 'War of Terror' and using their Zionist owned, Jewish run MSM to scare Americans non-stop with horrifying tales of non-existent Muslim boogiemen.
*******

Ron Paul Request Audit For Fort Knox And If The IMF/Federal Reserve Has The Gold
Uploaded on Aug 15, 2011
Are the gold bars in Fort Knox really made of the precious metal? Or has the government secretly sold off the stockpile and replaced it with tungsten bars that are painted gold?
Ron Paul wants to find out.
Giving legitimacy to a conspiracy theory that the gold in Fort Knox is fake, the iconoclast Republican congressman from Texas has asked administration officials to audit the purity of the nation's 700,000 gold bars held in Fort Knox, according to an internal Treasury document obtained by CNBC. Paul, a presidential candidate who chairs the House subcommittee on Domestic Monetary Policy, had previously called for the U.S. gold reserve to be counted and for a return to the gold standard. He now appears to be going a step further in his request that representatives from the U.S. Treasury Department and the U.S. Mint testify at a subcommittee hearing on June 23 about the authenticity of the nation's gold.
As a postscript to the story, CNBC asked for a tour of Fort Knox to film the gold, since our only footage of Fort Knox is from 1974. An official at the Mint told us that not he was not aware that any member of Congress had toured the facility since that year. Fort Knox is "a closed facility," the official said.
*******
Are the gold bars in Fort Knox really made of the precious metal? Or has the government secretly sold off the stockpile and replaced it with tungsten bars that are painted gold?
As a postscript to the story, CNBC asked for a tour of Fort Knox to film the gold, since our only footage of Fort Knox is from 1974. An official at the Mint told us that not he was not aware that any member of Congress had toured the facility since that year. Fort Knox is "a closed facility," the official said.
There is NO gold at Ft. Know, the crooks at the Federal Reserve already stole OUR gold as collateral for the funny money they sell us as debt.
*******

Food Shortages! It Can Happen Here!

$
0
0
*******

Food Prices Soar as the Canadian Dollar Collapses
Published on Jan 16, 2016
And NO, it's not just Nunavut: it from coast to coast. Think your grocery bill is high? Canadians paying $3 cucumbers, $8 cauliflower, and $15 Frosted Flakes. We are watching a Real Time Currency Collapse In Canada – Is This Is What It’s Going To Look Like In the USA?
Canadians Panic As Food Prices Soar On Collapsing Currency
http://www.zerohedge.com/news/2016-01...
Canada's economy is a disaster from low oil priceshttp://money.cnn.com/2015/04/13/inves...
Cheap Canadian dollar making fruits and vegetables much more expensivehttp://www.cbc.ca/news/business/looni...
Why Canada’s economy is headed off the cliffhttp://www.pbs.org/newshour/making-se...
Canada in economic crisis - Some Canadian oil at $8 barrel - YouTubehttps://youtu.be/jdJ2grlGfQE?t=6m30s
*******
What Would Life Be Like Without Toilet Paper?
By Ron Ewart
March 23, 2016
NewsWithViews.com
Forgive us for entering into a subject that is best left in the bathroom, but without certain items of biological comfort we could be sent back to the dark days of outhouses and Sears catalogues. With the insanity that is radical environmentalism aside, our lifestyle and its comforts are a direct result of industrial ingenuity in turning trees (a renewable resource) into highly useful paper products from toilet and computer paper, to feminine napkins, Scot towels, packaging and grocery bags, etc., each product making our lives a little easier. Industry keeps coming up with new ideas to turn trees into paper, in all of its various forms. Of course, there are always the 22-year old brain-dead actresses telling us we can get along with one square per event. Obviously she never had a ................................, Never mind, we won't go there.
But oh my God! When you make paper from trees it takes energy and in the process that evil CO2 is emitted. And of course we have to kill the trees to make the paper. That’s bad. But even worse is that we reduce the absorption of CO2 by removing the trees as well, except that we can re-plant trees. That’s why trees are a renewable resource.
Obviously, we must be killing the planet by our hedonistic lifestyle of greed and avarice, especially those rich Americans, and this practice must be brought to a halt immediately to save the planet. The environmentalists and the government tell us it is so and they have brainwashed millions of Americans (including our young school children) into believing it is true, except for a couple of little scientific "things" that the government and the radical environmentalists choose to ignore to promote their green agenda.
Two of these scientific "things" come to mind. CO2 (carbon dioxide) is heavier than air. CO2 sinks. It is a fact of physics. Yes, a small portion of CO2 that doesn't sink to the ground to feed the trees, plants and plankton, ends up in the upper atmosphere due to churning, but a very tiny portion. Of all of the greenhouse gases, CO2 makes up 0.177%. But what is even more striking in these statistics is that the CO2, supposedly caused by man, is a small fraction of that 0.117%. In fact, the greatest greenhouse gas (95%), over which man has absolutely no control, is water vapor and obviously has the greatest effect on planet warming, or cooling as the case may be, if any, not withstanding the effects of that giant yellow orb in the sky.
So the government and the radical environmentalists would have us believe that a miniscule fraction of a gas, that is heavier than air, a gas that all living things on this planet could not survive without, is somehow heating our planet into a runaway global warming event and we are all going to die or drown, if we don't repent to the God of Green! If you believe this poppy cock, we question your intellect.
The environmentalists and thus the government, don't want us to drill for oil anywhere in the U. S., or won't let us build any new pipelines, power plants, refineries, or dams. Meanwhile, other countries, like China and India are exploiting their sources of energy every day, in spite of their greenhouse gas emissions. But these same insane folks who run our asylum called a government, want to lock up as much of our land as possible from livestock (food), resource extraction (minerals, oil and trees) and people. They then implemented by law, the positively outrageous and questionable practice of turning our food into fuel, (ethanol from corn - Sorry Iowans) thereby driving up the price of almost every food group. Anyone with half a brain could see this coming 30 years ago. Some did and warned us, but the warnings went unheeded.
Let's follow these events to their illogical and deleterious conclusion. Crude oil is the very foundation of the energy that powers our civilization in the western world. Just about everything is affected by the cost and availability of crude oil. A large fraction of crude goes into the production of fuel for cars, trucks, airplanes, ships and heating our homes and businesses. The rest goes into the production of plastics, paints and resins and many other products, you know, like nylons for women.
Transportation and the infrastructure that supports transportation, is absolutely vital to the distribution of every product we buy or sell, including food. If trucks and trains don't roll and ships don't ply the open seas, Albertson's, Safeway, QFC, Costco, Fred Meyer and a host of other retailers and big box stores don't get products to sell to you. Have you ever thought of where you will get your food, if your local grocery store's shelves are empty? Perhaps from your neighbor at the point of a gun, if he has any food and if government hasn’t taken away your guns.
Food is kind of important to survival you know. Some think that if you can't buy it, then you will have to take it by force. Now of course in such a scenario, your benevolent government would step in, declare martial law, nationalize all food production and distribution and ration it out as they see fit. Do you want to be at the end of the long line of how the government sees fit? How easy it is to control people when you own food and energy production. Could that be our future? Many think it is.
But this all fits a very evil pattern, driven by international environmentalists, one-world-order types, and the United Nations and Europe, in their eternal quest to bring the United States down to a third-world country by re-distribution of our wealth, our property rights and the destruction of our freedom. By driving up the price of everything, the thinking of governments and the radical environmentalists is that you will use less of things and move into cities where you won't have to drive as far for your food or work and where you are much easier to control by government. And of course they are encouraging you to bicycle, walk, or take mass transit. It's good for your health you know and the government and the radical environmentalists are very concerned about your health. Hardly!
If the environmentalists and the government succeed in taking away, or outlawing, crude oil and trees, we will be driven back into those days of outhouses, palm leaves and candles. We covered this possible outcome in our fiction story of Jeremy’s one day in the future. The article starts out:
“Jeremy huddled in a corner of the old log cabin, out of the wind, even though it blew through the cracks in the walls and whistled and moaned with a haunting, bone-chilling sound. The sky was dark, gray and menacing. The coming twilight filled him with dread. There would be no artificial light for the approaching darkness and he tried not to think of the long night ahead.”
“Our own oil, coal and natural gas resources had been shut off by the environmentalists and the Obama administration. The entire energy infrastructure had fallen into disrepair. Oil, gas and coal companies had shut their doors because of too many restrictions and exorbitant emission taxes. The wind and solar power that Obama promised would replace fossil fuels, was just one of his worthless, but very expensive pipe dreams, like so many other socialist and radical environmental policies he implemented. Power plants quit running for lack of transportation, energy resources and maintenance personnel. The power grid was ravaged by neglect, natural forces and frequent domestic and foreign terrorist attacks. But that was of no consequence. There was no power to distribute to the grid.”
Read the rest of the story HERE.
Throughout history dictators have herded the people out of the countryside and into large cities where they can be controlled to a much higher degree. Remember the Nazi's Warsaw ghetto? A dictator's, or a liberal president’s worst enemy is a freethinking rural landowner, who just might start a revolution.
So the next time you have the opportunity to send a donation to an environmental group, or vote for a politician that will do whatever the environmentalists or socialists want them to do, think twice, or maybe four times. You could be funding and voting for your own demise, not to mention the high possibility of losing your freedom and control over life-sustaining food and toilet paper. Right now government controls your money, your land, your water, your food, your energy and your health care. What’s left?
WE THE PEOPLE have a choice, either become the CONSENT OF THE GOVERNED again, or be slaves to the GOVERNMENT, where they take your money, your land, your health care and control the distribution of your food and energy.
Imagine what the world would be like if there were no toilet paper, or worse, no food at your local grocery store. A hungry belly has nothing to lose by stealing, looting, killing, or going to war. It is happening in many parts of the world right now. And don't be fooled. It can happen here!
People who fail or refuse to confront and stop tyranny, are destined to be enslaved by it.
But then, who is going to lift a finger to stop the socialists, the environmentalists and the one-world-order types? Americans could stop this freedom-robbing madness within a few years if there were enough people willing to act and enough money to fund their efforts. Sadly, out of 320,000,000 people and the richest nation on earth, there is neither ….. at least not now. Evidently, things just aren’t bad enough yet, even though half the people are living off the sweat, blood and tears of the other half and the former half get to vote to force the latter half to pay. One hundred years ago, that egregious injustice would have ignited a revolution. But not today where we live in a cesspool of political correctness, irrational compassion, radical environmentalism, multi-culturalism and the liberty-starving ideology of social justice.
[NOTE: The forgoing article is the opinion of the author and is not necessarily the opinion of NewsWithViews.com, it's employees, representatives, or other contributing writers.]
© 2016 Ron Ewart — All Rights Reserved
Ron Ewart, a nationally known author and speaker on freedom and property issues and author of his weekly column, "In Defense of Rural America", is the President of the National Association of Rural Landowners, (NARLO) (http://www.narlo.org) a non-profit corporation headquartered in Washington State, an advocate and consultant for urban and rural landowners. He can be reached for comment at info@narlo.org.
Website: www.narlo.org
*******
It Has Begun - Food Shortages Already In America And What Is Coming Next Is Going To Be Ugly - The Crash Felt Round The World
By Susan Duclos - All News Pipeline
January 20, 2016
A look at the Real-Time Stock Indices Futures before the opening bell on Wednesday, January 20, 2016, shows the ongoing "crash" that is being felt round the world, evidencing the extreme stress the markets are suffering is all the red you see when you click this link, but the problem is not as simple as plunging oil prices or China's economy as the Hell Stream Media would like you to believe.
 
In the Reuters video below from just this morning, towards the end, the real culprits are highlighted when the expert they speak with details how China is being made the scapegoat but how there are "far greater concerns in relation to the health of the Japanese economy and also the United States economy, which to me, are being somewhat downplayed."
Somewhat downplayed? Perhaps in the international news it is being "somewhat" downplayed, but as for the America media, it is being ignored, they continue to insist the nation is recovering.... and that ladies and gentlemen is why when the house of cards coming tumbling down the majority of Americans are going to be caught by surprise.
FOOD SHORTAGES HAVE ALREADY BEGUN IN AMERICA
Last week we saw comments at ANP, from a variety of states, showing that grocery sections of stores in smaller areas are already seeing shortages where they have never witnessed them before.
3 days ago - Gary aka Godzilla commented "Speaking of food shortages, I needed some fresh cabbage for today's pot of my special Venison stew. Off the Wal-mart I went. Cabbage heads were tiny compared to normal (I had to buy 3, when I would normally do), they were out of green peppers and a few other things normally found in the fresh produce section. This is the first time I have seen this folks, and I think it's only going to get worse."
In a response to that commenter 'Idon’tknow" states "Now that you mention it, Walmart didn't have either green peppers or tomatoes the last time I went. I hadn't seen that before either...
James Grubbs adds "Seeing the same thing here SE Ohio. Went shopping yesterday and saw the same things you describe here. I'm not saying it's panic time but seeing this should have people prepping even harder. It's hard to imagine the hardships after a collapse because we haven't seen it in our life times."
Small shortages, unreported that will become massive shortages when it all hits the fan, but enough to see what is coming at us... there is a reason that food will be one of the most critical elements in the coming collapse, as explained by Alt Market in an article titled "The U.S. Is At The Center Of The Global Economic Meltdown."
While the economic implosion progresses this year, there will be considerable misdirection and disinformation as to the true nature of what is taking place. As I have outlined in the past, the masses were so ill informed by the mainstream media during the Great Depression that most people had no idea they were actually in the midst of an “official” depression until years after it began. The chorus of economic journalists of the day made sure to argue consistently that recovery was “right around the corner.” Our current depression has been no different, but something is about to change.
Unlike the Great Depression, social crisis will eventually eclipse economic crisis in the U.S. That is to say, our society today is so unequipped to deal with a financial collapse that the event will inevitably trigger cultural upheaval and violent internal conflict. In the 1930s, nearly 50% of the American population was rural. Farmers made up 21% of the labor force. Today, only 20% of the population is rural. Less than 2% work in farming and agriculture. That’s a rather dramatic shift from a more independent and knowledgeable land-utilizing society to a far more helpless and hapless consumer-based system.
We suggest you read the entire article.
Just to understand how ugly things are about to get, we remind you of Venezuela from August 2015 reports where hunger riots spun out of control, seen in the footage below where at the 2:34 mark the Reuters narrator explains what is being shown.
STAGES OF COLLAPSE AND WHAT COMES NEXT
Readers can take a look at an excellent rundown of what the five stages of collapse are over at TargetofOpportunity, reading the details and decide where in these stages you believe we are now, but it is after the collapse that people need to be prepared for, and the six likely events that will follow an economic collapse in America, published by SHTF Plan.
Those are as follows: Travel restrictions will be implemented; Wealth will be confiscated; Food shortages; Squatters rebellions; Riots and finally; Martial law.
It is not just "Alternative News" that makes these predictions as we are reminded of some quotes from 2012 from billionaire George Soros in regards to what to expect when America's economy completely falls, as he agreed there would be a spontaneous eruption of violence and riots, then goes on to detail what will be worse than the publics reaction, which will be the governments response:
"It will be an excuse for cracking down and using strong-arm tactics to maintain law and order, which, carried to an extreme, could bring about a repressive political system, a society where individual liberty is much more constrained, which would be a break with the tradition of the United States."
BOTTOM LINE
It is coming and certain aspects of this economic fall have already begun, but when it hits it will be the worst crash in history and we have a nation of unprepared citizens, so the danger is increased by the nth degree.
Cash won't have value for long but for the beginning it will still have some worth so have cash at hand, but for long-term,  we truly hope folks have invested in some precious metals because they will be all that hold monetary value.
Other than preparing for yourself and your family with food, water, medical supplies and the basics, try to have extra of each because bartering items will most likely be another form of value.
Weapons, a means of defense against those that refused to listen but decide they are "entitled" to what you have after it all comes crashing down, is a must and experts are encouraging people to stock up on all the above.
Pre-arranged meeting points with family, friends and other preparedness community members.... have a plan in place, not only to gather your family and friends around you, but for the purposes of setting up a mutual defense community.
The bottom line here folks is if you are not prepared for what is coming.... then you won't survive.
*******
Food-Cost Crisis In Canada's North: 'We Can't Pretend It Doesn't Exist Any More'
By Steve Rennie, The Canadian Press 
Updated:  03/25/2015
IQALUIT, Nunavut - Israel Mablick opens the door of his refrigerator and takes stock of its meagre offerings.
"This is all we have for food," he says, gesturing to the mostly empty shelves.
There is a small pot of leftover seal meat on the second shelf, next to a tub of margarine and a couple of slices of bread. There's juice, a bag of milk, some water and a carton of eggs, plus condiments and a small bag of shredded cheese.
In his freezer, there are a few bags of frozen vegetables next to a carton of Chapman's ice cream. Two cereal boxes — Corn Pops and Corn Flakes — are the only items in one of his cupboards.
"That's all we have," Mablick says, "and there's six kids."
The 36-year-old Inuit man shares a small, two-bedroom Iqaluit apartment with his wife and their five kids, his mother, his sister and his young nephew. His is the face of hunger in Nunavut, the bare cupboards and empty fridge emblematic of a long-standing problem that even today's government programs don't address.
The federal government's $60-million food subsidy, Nutrition North, is only the latest of the proposed solutions that has stumbled under mismanagement and the enormity of the hunger problem.
Whether a solution can be found is anyone's guess. After all, food shortages are nothing new to the Inuit.
"There's always been incidents of starvation," said Frank Tester, an Arctic historian at the University of British Columbia.
One of the worst episodes occurred in the late 1940s and early 1950s, when a shift in caribou migration patterns caused widespread starvation in the southern interior of the Kivalliq Region to the west of Hudson Bay.
The collapse of the fox fur trade after the Second World War was devastating to the Inuit, who relied on it as a source of income to buy flour, tea, sugar, hunting traps, rifles and ammunition.
"Economically, Inuit were now in really serious trouble," Tester said.
In some cases, Inuit were relocated to other parts of the North with more abundant natural resources.
"Inuit were moved around. The attitude was, 'Well, you know, what the hell? They can survive any place there's snow and caribou and foxes to be had,'" said Tester, who has studied and written about the relocations.
But such relocations proved controversial. There was a royal commission in the 1990s. Ottawa eventually agreed to pay $10 million into a trust fund to compensate the families of the Inuit who, in the 1950s, were moved 2,000 kilometres from Inukjuak in northern Quebec to what is now Resolute and Grise Fiord, the two most northerly communities in Canada
In 2010, then-aboriginal affairs minister John Duncan apologized on the government's behalf for the Inukjuak relocations.
But having Canadian civilians in an otherwise unoccupied area bolstered Canadian sovereignty at a time when other nations — especially the United States — were expressing increasing interest in the Arctic as a possible front in the Cold War with the Soviet Union.
To monitor the continent's northern frontier, Canada and the United States built 63 radar stations across the Arctic, stretching from Alaska to Baffin Island. The Distant Early Warning Line sites had a major impact on northern society. The stations — and the southerners who staffed them — were sometimes the first contact Inuit people had with the outside world.
A change in government policy in the 1950s and 1960s led to an upheaval of the traditional Inuit way of life, Tester said.
"By the mid-1950s, the government sort of saw what they thought was the handwriting on the wall," he said, "that Inuit were going to have to be modernized instead of kept in their traditional lifestyle."
Thus began the sweeping change from a traditional Inuit way of life. Having a job meant there was now pressure on Inuit workers to maintain a steady income to support their families. That made it difficult to hunt, since people now had to travel long distances from their communities to find game.
Not being able to hunt meant Inuit had to buy their own food, either from stores or local hunters.
Food has always been expensive in the North. The population is relatively small and scattered across a vast region far from the major transportation hubs. Shipping costs are exorbitant — particularly in Nunavut, where there aren't any roads to connect the territory's communities to the rest of Canada.
The high cost of shipping food to the North put some items beyond the reach of many people.
In an effort to make food more affordable, the federal government started the Northern Air Stage Program — better known as Food Mail — in the 1960s to subsidize shipping costs.
The subsidy shifted to retailers when Nutrition North replaced Food Mail in 2011. The new program gives retailers a subsidy based on the weight of eligible foods shipped to eligible communities.
But auditor general Michael Ferguson recently found the Aboriginal Affairs Department did not choose eligible communities based on need. Instead, communities were chosen based on whether they had year-round road access and if they had used the old Food Mail program.
Those that made very little use of the program are only eligible for a partial subsidy, while those that did not use it aren't eligible at all.
"Consequently, community eligibility is based on past usage instead of current need," the audit says.
"As a result, there may be other isolated northern communities, not benefiting from the subsidy, where access to affordable, nutritious food may be an issue."
Aboriginal Affairs told Ferguson's team it has looked at expanding the full subsidy to around 50 fly-in northern communities, but doing so would increase the cost of the program by $7 million a year.
Before the audit was released in late November, the Conservative government announced it would spend another $11.3 million on the program over the next year.
But many northerners are skeptical that businesses are actually passing on the full subsidy to customers.
Aboriginal Affairs has not required merchants to report their profit margins, which over time would indicate whether the full subsidy is being passed on. Ferguson's report said such a measure would help quell skepticism about whether consumers are actually getting the full benefit of the subsidy.
The department now says that as of April 1, retailers will have to provide information on their current and long-term profit margins.
The cost of food has contributed to a palpable and growing sense of frustration across Nunavut.
The catalyst for much of the angst was a Facebook group called "Feeding My Family." People started posting photos of shocking price tags in grocery stores. That grew into street protests — a rare show of Inuit defiance.
"Bringing something as private as poverty and the fact that you're hungry and you're food insecure, that's very different," former Iqaluit mayor Madeleine Redfern said last month in Iqaluit.
"I think people are saying, 'This is not a hidden problem. We can't pretend it doesn't exist anymore.'"
Overwhelmingly, Redfern said, those going hungry are Inuit. "There is a disparity — not only ethnically, but also the social classes."
As of this past December, Nunavut's labour force stood at 14,000 people, 9,500 of whom are Inuit. But a closer look at the statistics shows some 8,500 working-age Inuit who are not part of the labour force, compared to only 600 non-Inuit people.
The participation rate — that is, the number of people either employed or are actively looking for a job — was also much lower among Inuit. The Inuit participation rate was 52.7 per cent, compared to 88 per cent among non-Inuit.
The unemployment rate for Inuit people in Nunavut was 17.9 per cent during the last three months of 2014 (the territory reports its statistics using a three-month moving average). By comparison, the jobless rate across the rest of Canada in December was 6.6 per cent.
The most recent figures released by the territory's statistics bureau show the number of people in Nunavut on social assistance was 14,578 in 2013.
Back in his cramped Iqaluit apartment, Mablick sips from a mug of lukewarm tea brewed with a tea bag he has already used a few times. He reuses tea bags to save money.
He hasn't eaten in a week and he turns to tea to stave off hunger pangs. He gives what little food he has to his five children, who are between the ages of one-and-a-half and 11.
Mablick, clad in a torn white Qikiqtani Inuit Association T-shirt, says he has been out of work since he quit his job at Parks Canada in October over a dispute with a supervisor. He would not elaborate.
Social assistance trickles in, but it's not enough to feed the entire household. So Mablick has been forced to sell most of his possessions to put food on the table. Parting with his snowmobile was especially difficult, he said.
"Pretty much everything that we can sell — jewellery or carvings, whatever," he said.
"I mean, I'll go to my shack, which is outside, I'll carve something and sell something, but it's been a while since I carved. I started working on a cribbage board but it's been so cold that my toes are freezing so I can't really carve anything right now."
Like many hungry people in Nunavut, Mablick also turns to friends and family for food, but knows they face their own struggles.
Traditional Inuit fare — so-called "country food" that consists of caribou, seal and whale meat — offers one option to address the food problem.
A key recommendation of the Nunavut Food Security Coalition — a group made up of representatives from the territorial government, Inuit organizations, industry and social justice groups — was to encourage people to hunt.
Former Edmonton native Will Hyndman started a hunter and trapper's market in Iqaluit, and invited hunters, most of whom struggle to buy ammunition and fuel, to sell their meat in town.
"The goal was really to change the conversation about how we deal with country food here in Iqaluit," Hyndman said, icicles forming on the tips of his moustache, as he stood with his dog on the frozen shores of Koojesse Inlet.
"When you go hunting, you can't take your fish and stuff it back down your gas tank. You can't take your seal and turn it into more bullets, whereas traditionally everything came from the animals that you were hunting.
"So now we need to something else to close that loop of sustainability, and the market was one way to do that."
People in Iqaluit also cope by turning to the city's soup kitchen or to the food bank on the two days a month that it's open.
There's clearly a demand for these services. Stephen Wallick, chairman of the board of the Niqinik Nuatsivik Food Bank, said it started out in 2001 serving about 30 families. Today, he said, as many as 120 families come looking for food and supplies every two weeks.
Iqaluit's soup kitchen, which makes enough for 200 servings a day, is also stretched to its limit — and sometimes past it.
"It goes in the red every now and then," volunteer Cathy Sawer said during a recent visit. "Your funding sources maybe get behind, and then occasionally there's maybe extra expenses."
Case in point: Sawer said one of the elements on her stove just stopped working, so she's going to need an electrician. "Prices for that are pretty high up here."
The most desperate — as seen in television footage that emerged after Ferguson released his report — even forage in local dumps for scraps of food.
So, what can be done?
Tester, the Arctic historian, said the territory needs to focus on online opportunities.
"They need to develop a northern economy, and as far as I'm concerned, a northern economy is online," he said.
"In other words, a web-based economy is what young people are interested in, and what has real possibility for Nunavut. Very little has been done to explore this and develop it. Instead, they're pouring tens of millions of dollars into training programs to turn people into miners."
Nunavut has slower, more expensive and more limited Internet access than most of the country — a big obstacle to developing a web-based economy. Major investments need to be undertaken to bring high-speed Internet access to the North.
The federal government is spending $305 million over five years to develop Canadian broadband in rural and remote communities — including approximately 12,000 households in Nunavut and the Nunavik region of northern Quebec.
"The basic infrastructure is there," said Tester. "It just needs to be upgraded — big time."
Others have suggested that the federal government run a program similar to the Nunavut Hunters Income Support Trust, which provided around $2 million a year to hunters so they could buy equipment to hunt, fish and trap.
A similar program for the Inuit of northern Quebec is fully funded through the 1975 James Bay and Northern Quebec Agreement.
Nunavut Tunngavik Inc., which administers the Nunavut land claim, ran the harvesters support program. The program was shut down for 2014 so Nunavut Tunngavik could spend the rest of the year reviewing it.
Nunavut Tunngavik president Cathy Towtongie said the federal government should help offset the cost of hunting equipment in the same way it helps subsidize farmers in the rest of Canada.
"We could have a hunter support program in place. When farms do not make enough produce, farmers are given a lot of subsidies across Canada. But in Canada's Arctic, prices are rising in terms of bullets, ammunition and Ski-Doos, the equipment. So it's more costly to hunt," she said in a recent interview at her Iqaluit office
"So if we can subsidize at least some of the cost, like bullets, then I believe we should have a program that's designed for hunters, so they can provide for the community and their families."
None of this matters much to Mablick, for whom it is a daily struggle to find his family's next meal.
"I make sure that they are fed and that there's something for them to eat instead of me, because being a parent, I make more sacrifices," he says.
"What's the point of sacrificing my kids? They're my everything. I've got to sacrifice myself for them. And that's what I do."
*******
Food crisis could hit Canada, expert warns
CTV.ca News Staff
Published Thursday, April 24, 2008
The growing worldwide food crisis could hit Canada, warns one of the country's top consumer advocates.
Mel Fruitman, of the Consumers' Association of Canada, said that while food costs in Canada are currently among the lowest in the world, that will change.
"We are going to continue to be somewhat insulated for the next little while, but then the bubble is going to burst," Fruitman told CTV's Canada AM on Thursday.
"Competition between the retailers helps us as consumers keep the price of our food basket down, but it also puts increasing pressure on the farms, on farmers, and that can't continue. Somewhere along the way the dam is going to burst."
For Canadians, the rising cost of fuel will have particular impact on the cost of food, particularly when consumers have come to expect a year-round supply of fresh fruits and vegetables in their grocery stores, Fruitman said.
"Anything that is trucked in, flown in, that comes from farther away than our normal hundred kilometres, say, is going to cost that much more to get to us," Fruitman said.
"And of course, the cost of fuel affects the cost of production of that food, it affects the cost of feed for the various animals. So, we are on a rising curve, there's no question about it."
On Thursday, Maple Leaf Foods Inc. announced it will raise prices of its bread as high grain costs cut into profits in both its bakery and hog divisions. The company reported that it lost $10,000 in the first quarter, compared to boasting a profit of $10.5 million during the same period one year ago.
The company also said its first-quarter sales fell by nine per cent over last year.
Canada Bread Co., 88 per cent of which is owned by Maple Leaf, also warned that its prices would rise after reporting that its first-quarter profits dropped by 32 per cent as a result of rising wheat prices.
"The continued rise in wheat prices together with increase in prices of other commodities, such as fuel and general inflation, has had a significant short-term impact on our margins and financial results," Richard Lan, president and CEO of Canada Bread, told The Canadian Press.
However, in the meantime, Canadian retailers aren't putting limits on the sale of any food items.
Wal-Mart Canada issued a statement on Wednesday that it will not follow the lead of U.S. retailer Sam's Club, which recently put restrictions on large purchases of some types of specialty rice.
Meanwhile, there are fears in India that the domestic supply of rice will dry up, and riots have broken out in Haiti among residents who are already feeling the food crunch.
CTV's Paul Workman, reporting from India, told Canada AM on Thursday that India has cut back on its rice exports in order to keep the cost of rice down within the country. However, the move will have far-reaching consequences.
"This is going to have an effect across Asia, but especially in neighbouring Bangladesh, which depends on India hugely for most of its rice imports. We've already seen some rioting in the streets there as a result of it and most of the food specialists here warn that Bangladesh and Asia are going to be the worst hit by this spiraling food crisis, and that it has to be watched very carefully," Workman said.
"And of course there are other agencies saying that there are something like 30 countries that may suffer social unrest as a result of these huge price increases."
The world's food shortage is continually growing and threatens the health of millions of people around the world, including some 20 million of the poorest children.
Josette Sheeran, executive director of the United Nations World Food Programme, focused on the crisis Wednesday during a speech at a London summit dedicated to the subject.
She said the cost of rice has more than doubled in the last five weeks, and the World Bank estimates food prices have increased 83 per cent in three years.
Dave Toycen, president of World Vision Canada, said Thursday that his organization has to cut back on how much food it can distribute when its main supplier, the United Nations World Food Programme, itself cuts back.
The international aid organization is cutting back on the vital flow of food it can provide to the world's most impoverished -- saying it can no longer afford to feed 1.5 million of the 7.5 million people that received aid last year.
Toycen's colleague in Sudan, Seth Le Leu, told Canada AM on Thursday that World Vision's operation in that country has to be scaled back.
"In South Sudan, we were intending on feeding 400,000 people who are returning to Sudan after 20 years of war," Le Leu said.
"Because of the change of policy, we will be treating 40,000 less than that. So that is a tremendous cut in our work."
Toycen also said that the food shortage will hit children the hardest.
"Basic illnesses that children normally have suddenly become fatal once they become malnourished, under-nourished," Toycen told Canada AM.
"And so that's the real concern for us as a child-focused organization."
*******
Also See:
Venezuela Is Out of Food! Who's Next?
15 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/venezuela-is-out-of-food-whos-next.html
and
In Case of an Emergency, Check This Out ... If You Have Time!
19 August 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/08/in-case-of-emergency-check-this-out.html
and
Food Shortage, Then Anarchy!
25 July 2012
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/07/food-shortage-then-anarchy.html
and
Disasters Happen! Be Prepared!
(Part 1)
31 March 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/03/disasters-happen-be-prepared.html
and
(Part 2)
30 August 2012
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/08/disasters-happen-be-prepared-part-2.html
and
The Collapse of the Entire World’s Economic System has Begun!
18 March 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/03/the-collapse-of-entire-worlds-economic.html
and
Economic Collapse! How Did We Get Here?
27 February 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/02/economic-collapse-how-did-we-get-here.html
and
Are We Facing a Global Financial Crisis?
31 May 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/05/are-we-facing-global-financial-crisis.html
and
Financial Crunch! Economic Collapse!
(Part 1)
31 July 2008
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2008/07/financial-crunch-economic-collapse.html
and
(Part 2)
20 November 2008
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2008/11/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 3)
25 January 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/01/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 4)
17 April 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/04/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 5)
23 June 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/06/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 6)
23 August 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/08/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 7)
30 November 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/11/xxxx.html
and
(Part 8)
23 February 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/02/debt-dynamite-dominoes-coming-financial.html
and
(Part 9)
28 August 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/08/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 10)
13 January 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/01/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 11)
29 April 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/04/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 12)
28 July 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/07/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 13)
04 April 2012
(Part 15)
02 November 2012
and
Recession? ... Depression? ... What is Going On?
*******

Donald Trump is For Real - He's Anti-Globalist

$
0
0
*******

Breaking: New Trump Scandal, Devastating Info
Published on Mar 18, 2016
Alex Jones discusses a new scandal surrounding Republican frontrunner Donald Trump that will severely damage the establishment.
*******

Jean-Claude Van Damme: Trump Is The Only Anti-Globalist Candidate
Published on Mar 15, 2016
“You still have the Rockefeller, people like the Rothschild, those big families that dominate continents….these are families that rise in 1827, a family with five sons that expands, it’s above everything we’re talking (about) tonight,” stated the actor.
*******
Also See:
Days Before the Two Candidates Are Known!
(Part 1)
14 January 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/01/days-before-two-candidates-are-known-it.html
and
(Part 2)
03 March 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/03/days-before-two-candidates-are-known.html
and
Who is This Guy in the Oval Office?
(Part 24)
01 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/who-is-this-guy-in-oval-office-part-24.html
and
 Who's Pushing For The New World Order?
15 January 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/01/whos-pushing-for-new-world-order.html
and
Agenda 21 Comes to Canada!
30 December 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/12/agenda-21-comes-to-canada.html
and
Agenda 21! The Death Knell of Liberty!
(Part 1)
02 March 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/03/agenda-21-and-death-knell-of-liberty.html
and
(Part 2)
22 January 2012
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/01/agenda-21-death-knell-of-liberty-part-2.html
and
(Part 3)
21 May 2012
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/05/agenda-21-death-knell-of-liberty-part-3.html
and
(Part 4)
07 January 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/01/war-against-u_7.html
and
United Nations Oversees Over 830 World Heritage Sites
25 December 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2010/12/this-video-by-dr.html
and
Who is Maurice Strong?
14 May 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2010/05/who-is-maurice-strong.html
and
Best Candidate for President? Donald Trump, Hands Down!
04 November 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/11/best-candidate-for-president-donald.html
and
 Will Donald Trump be the Next President?
(Part 1)
06 June 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/06/blog-post.html
and
(Part 2)
19 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/will-donald-trump-be-next-president.html
and
Will Hillary Clinton be the Next President?
(Part 1)
24 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/will-hillary-clinton-be-next-president.html
and
What Do You Know About The Clintons?
24 December 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/12/what-do-you-know-about-clintons.html
 and
Hillary Clinton, the Wanttabe President!
06 October 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/10/hillary-clinton-want-be-president.html
and
Will Hillary Run For President?
19 April 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/04/will-hillary-run-for-president.html
and
War on Drugs is a Farce!
09 January 2014
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2014/01/war-on-drugs-is-farce.html
and
The Next President of United States - Hillary Clinton!
21 December 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/12/the-next-president-of-united-states.html
and
What's with Recent U.S. Presidents? 27 June 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/06/whats-with-recent-us-presidents.html
and
Hillary Clinton's Testimony on Benghazi!
24 January 2013
and
The Saga of the Benghazi Report!
22 December 2012
and
What Happened in Benghazi?
31 October 2012
and
Bill Clinton was a Great President. Wasn't He?
03 October 2007
and
Bernie, the Socialist, Says Everything is Free! Is He Right?
12 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/bernie-socialist-says-everything-is.html
*******

Sweden Is No Longer Sweden!

$
0
0
*******

Muslim Migrants Attack Australian News Crew In Sweden  
Published on Mar 20, 2016
Black African Mohammedans from Somalia violently attack a crew of left-wing reporters from Australia's 60 Minutes weekly news magazine in Sweden while reporting on the Islamic invasion of Europe. Dubbed a "migrant crisis" or "refugee crisis" by the the left, the show's producers seemingly felt unable to completely avoid the truth of the failures of "multiculturalism".
*******

Special report: Inside Muslim majority neighborhoods of Malmo, Sweden
Published on Mar 1, 2016
Ezra Levant of TheRebel.media continues his series on the effects of Muslim mass migration on Europe, this time with interviews with Muslim men in Malmo, Sweden. However, the conversation that troubled him most was one with a non-Muslim, native Swedish woman.
*******

Immigration Destroys Sweden  
Published on Feb 19, 2016
*******

Muslim Immigrant Sex Predators molest young swedish girls in Stockholm
Published on Jan 18, 2016
After the girls of Cologne were assaulted by Muslim Migrants, young girls of Stockholm has been sufffering humiliation for two years running, and the Authorities have been hiding this crime just so it does not hurt Muslim feelings.
*******

Sweden Now Rape Capital Of Europe Thanks To Muslim Migrants!  
Published on Oct 27, 2015
David Knight breaks down how the hordes of "immigrants" are really nothing short of an invading army under the control of the New World Order and are being used to collapse and destroy the world's economy and how they have turned the once peaceful country of Sweden into the rape capitol of Europe and almost the world.
*******

Sweden Being Raped To Death By Muslim Migrants  
Published on Oct 21, 2015
Once dubbed the “Great Humanitarian Power” by its ex-prime minister, Fredrik Reinfeldt. Sweden is on the edge of a brutal collapse due to a wave of entitled immigrants raping Sweden’s women at a rate of53.2% and bleeding the economy of the country dry.
*******

Illegal immigrants unhappy, wants better food, aircondition and a TV  
Published on Sep 22, 2015
*******

Gypsy beggar gangs in Sweden - part 1  
Published on Sep 10, 2015
Organized Romanian and Bulgarian gypsy mafia taking advantage of the tolerant and altruistic Swedes. Documentary by Miroluba Benatova
*******
Sweden’s welcome to refugees disturbed by violent backlash
PBS News
February 3, 2016
JUDY WOODRUFF: Sweden is struggling to accommodate 165,000 people who’ve applied for asylum there amid the refugee crisis. Now, in a reversal of its open door policy, the government says as many as half could face deportation.
A growing right-wing reaction to the migrant influx has fueled tensions.
From Stockholm, special correspondent Malcolm Brabant reports.
MALCOLM BRABANT: Sweden fashions itself as the world’s humanitarian conscience and safe harbor for more refugees per capita than any other European nation, but it has been shaken by a series of incidents that have ruptured that image.
MAGNUS RANSTORP, Sweden National Defense College: I would say that Sweden’s social structures are under severe stress.
MALCOLM BRABANT: Magnus Ranstorp is an expert on extremism in Scandinavia.
MAGNUS RANSTORP: It’s a cocktail of various ingredients which makes society extremely polarized. And the government is having a really difficult time dealing with this.
TINA MORAD, Refugees Welcome Stockholm: As a refugee here, I would say it’s pretty hostile.
MALCOLM BRABANT: Tina Morad is a Kurdish political scientist who fled from Northern Iraq as a child, and now advocates on behalf of fellow refugees.
TINA MORAD: We have noticed a lot of activities for the past week at least where you have Nazis and racists crossing the street and demonstrating against the refugees arriving in Sweden.
MALCOLM BRABANT: These are right-wing vigilantes, including football hooligans, apparently attacking immigrants. This precinct is where young Moroccans hang out. Many have acquired a reputation as petty criminals and troublemakers.
The attack happened a few days after a murder at a young asylum seeker’s hostel in Western Sweden. A 22-year-old worker, Alexandra Mezher, originally from Lebanon, was stabbed to death, allegedly by a young Somali, after trying to intervene in a fight. The murder intensified pressure on Prime Minister Stefan Loven, whose popularity has slumped despite U-turns over his open door migration policy.
STEFAN LOVEN, Prime Minister, Sweden (through interpreter): I believe quite a few people here in Sweden now feel a great worry there will be more similar cases, as Sweden accepts so many unaccompanied minors. Many of those who come here to Sweden have had traumatic experiences, and there are no simple answers.
MALCOLM BRABANT: Fredrik Hagberg is a leading member of a far-right activist group called Nordic Youth. He admits to feeling sympathetic towards the vigilantes.
FREDRIK HAGBERG, Nordic Youth: It’s chaos in Sweden. It’s getting worse by the minute. It’s like the gates of hell is open. More and more immigrants than we can take care of is coming every day. The violence is getting more and more. Hatred against Swedes, people are getting bigger and bigger. The women and children are getting harassed every day.
The police can’t be everywhere at once. The people need to do something by themselves if something is going to change.
MALCOLM BRABANT: It sounds like you might be advocating violence?
FREDRIK HAGBERG: No, not at all, not at all. Our movement has always stood against violence, political violence, but I believe in self-defense.
MALCOLM BRABANT: And this is one of his organization’s videos.
Are you Nazis?
FREDRIK HAGBERG: No, not at all.
MALCOLM BRABANT: How can you prove that?
FREDRIK HAGBERG: It’s proved by my actions, or you just walk around. Look at our Web site. We have a program there, manifest.
MAGNUS RANSTORP: I think the greatest threat Sweden is facing is that we have an equal amount of extremism. We have a lot of right-wing extremism and, of course, left-wing extremism. There’s a sort of reciprocal radicalization going on. They are feeding and fueling each other.
MALCOLM BRABANT: This is another video which has shed a light on the atmosphere inside some of the homes that accommodate some 3,500 unaccompanied minors taken in by Sweden. It shows the aftermath of an attack on one young boy. This is just one of what the police say have been 5,000 incidents at asylum centers that they have been called to attend.
Anna Nellberg Dennis, deputy chair of Sweden’s police union, says there have been recent problems west of Stockholm in Vasteras.
ANNA NELLBERG DENNIS, Swedish Police Union: We were down on our knees, work-wise and workload-wise, already long before this migration crisis and the terror — increased terrorist threats.
Now, I have about three cases in the area of Vastmanland where the biggest city is Vasteras, where police officers have been forced to push the alarm button because they are surrounded by angry immigrants that are fighting each other. The nice, secure and safe country that we once had is not really that nice anymore.
MALCOLM BRABANT: The area around Stockholm’s central station is a magnet for the Moroccans and other asylum seekers. Several hundred young North Africans are facing imminent deportation after Sweden struck a deal with the government in Morocco.
According to Europe’s Criminal Intelligence Agency, at least 10,000 unaccompanied child refugees have disappeared since arriving in the E.U. Many are feared to be in the hands of traffickers, or other predators, according to terrorism expert Magnus Ranstorp.
MAGNUS RANSTORP: There is some recruitment by Islamic extremists at train stations.
MALCOLM BRABANT: Today, Sweden’s Interior Minister Anders Ygeman was trying to project an image of calm and control.
ANDERS YGEMAN, Interior Minister, Sweden: I think we have been bad prepared for this situation. Our social system is not made to meet the demands from this group. And we also have a problem with returning them to Morocco if they don’t have the right to be in Sweden.
MALCOLM BRABANT: So how do you think you’re doing?
ANDERS YGEMAN: In the overall picture, we’re doing quite well.
MALCOLM BRABANT: But that’s not what the police union are saying. They say that this is no longer the nice society it used to be.
ANDERS YGEMAN: Well, I think even the police union should look forward and not backwards, but if we want to compare the figures and stats backwards, we could say that we haven’t had this many policemen in 35 years.
MALCOLM BRABANT: They say that you need an extra 4,000, and you’re not going to give them enough.
ANDERS YGEMAN: We have never had this much policemen. We have never had this much money to fund the police as we have now. And we have a lower crime rate.
MALCOLM BRABANT: In the wake of these disturbances, the Swedish government is to launch a task force to crack down on vigilantes who might be thinking about taking the law into their own hands.
And to soften the blow of deporting the young North Africans, the government is promising to set up a special center in Morocco to house them in safety and security.
Tina Morad is disturbed by the sudden change in Swedish policies.
TINA MORAD: We have built up our reputation internationally of being this humanitarian role model. To change it that drastically, I don’t believe that the government has thought through it properly, and I don’t believe that they have any expectations of how this might affect Sweden in the near future.
MALCOLM BRABANT: Iraqi civil servant Adel Ali Qatani has decided to return to Baghdad because of new rules making it more difficult for refugees to bring over their families.
ADEL ALI QATANI, Iraqi Refugee (through interpreter): I see no solution. I can’t wait for three years, because, at the end of the day, I have a problem about reuniting with my son. In three years, he will be an adult. The laws complicate matters.
Although I’m very grateful for all the help I have been given, I feel very frustrated and insecure because of all the uncertainty the government is going through, all these different changes. It’s better to return to my family and endure the hardship with them, rather than leaving them alone there.
MALCOLM BRABANT: The migration debate is dominating the political landscape, and the latest polls show rises for the main center-right opposition party, and in the lead are the anti-immigrant Sweden Democrats. Their integration spokesman is Markus Wiechel.
MARKUS WIECHEL, Sweden Democrats: Well, society is pretty much falling apart. The government is actually taking money from the foreign aid budgets to fund refugees coming to Sweden.
And I’m not sure I’m going to call them refugees, actually, because they have crossed seven or eight more safe countries on their way to Sweden. They’re economic migrants. And then it’s not defendable to take foreign aid money to spend on the refugees.
MALCOLM BRABANT: The Swedish government is hoping there will soon be a thaw in widespread European resistance towards sharing what it sees as its migrant burden. But, if anything, the climate towards refugees is growing colder.
For the PBS NewsHour, I’m Malcolm Brabant in Stockholm.
*******
Sweden's rape rate under the spotlight
By Ruth Alexander
BBC News
15 September 2012
The Julian Assange extradition case has put Sweden's relatively high incidence of rape under the spotlight. But can such statistics be reliably compared from one country to another?
Which two countries are the kidnapping capitals of the world?
Australia and Canada.
Official figures from the United Nations show that there were 17 kidnaps per 100,000 people in Australia in 2010 and 12.7 in Canada.
That compares with only 0.6 in Colombia and 1.1 in Mexico.
So why haven't we heard any of these horror stories? Are people being grabbed off the street in Sydney and Toronto, while the world turns a blind eye?
No, the high numbers of kidnapping cases in these two countries are explained by the fact that parental disputes over child custody are included in the figures.
If one parent takes a child for the weekend, and the other parent objects and calls the police, the incident will be recorded as a kidnapping, according to Enrico Bisogno, a statistician with the United Nations.
Comparing crime rates across countries is fraught with difficulties - this is well known among criminologists and statisticians, less so among journalists and commentators.
Sweden has the highest rape rate in Europe, author Naomi Wolf said on the BBC's Newsnight programme recently. She was commenting on the case of Julian Assange, the Wikileaks founder who is fighting extradition from the UK to Sweden over rape and sexual assault allegations that he denies.
Is it true? Yes. The Swedish police recorded the highest number of offences - about 63 per 100,000 inhabitants - of any force in Europe, in 2010. The second-highest in the world.
This was three times higher than the number of cases in the same year in Sweden's next-door neighbour, Norway, and twice the rate in the United States and the UK. It was more than 30 times the number in India, which recorded about two offences per 100,000 people.
On the face of it, it would seem Sweden is a much more dangerous place than these other countries.
But that is a misconception, according to Klara Selin, a sociologist at the National Council for Crime Prevention in Stockholm. She says you cannot compare countries' records, because police procedures and legal definitions vary widely.
"In Sweden there has been this ambition explicitly to record every case of sexual violence separately, to make it visible in the statistics," she says.
"So, for instance, when a woman comes to the police and she says my husband or my fiance raped me almost every day during the last year, the police have to record each of these events, which might be more than 300 events. In many other countries it would just be one record - one victim, one type of crime, one record."
The thing is, the number of reported rapes has been going up in Sweden - it's almost trebled in just the last seven years. In 2003, about 2,200 offences were reported by the police, compared to nearly 6,000 in 2010.
So something's going on.
But Klara Selin says the statistics don't represent a major crime epidemic, rather a shift in attitudes. The public debate about this sort of crime in Sweden over the past two decades has had the effect of raising awareness, she says, and encouraging women to go to the police if they have been attacked.
The police have also made efforts to improve their handling of cases, she suggests, though she doesn't deny that there has been some real increase in the number of attacks taking place - a concern also outlined in an Amnesty International report in 2010.
"There might also be some increase in actual crime because of societal changes. Due to the internet, for example, it's much easier these days to meet somebody, just the same evening if you want to. Also, alcohol consumption has increased quite a lot during this period.
"But the major explanation is partly that people go to the police more often, but also the fact that in 2005 there has been reform in the sex crime legislation, which made the legal definition of rape much wider than before."
The change in law meant that cases where the victim was asleep or intoxicated are now included in the figures. Previously they'd been recorded as another category of crime.
So an on-the-face-of-it international comparison of rape statistics can be misleading.
Botswana has the highest rate of recorded attacks - 92.9 per 100,000 people - but a total of 63 countries don't submit any statistics, including South Africa, where a survey three years ago showed that one in four men questioned admitted to rape.
In 2010, an Amnesty International report highlighted that sexual violence happens in every single country, and yet the official figures show that some countries like Hong Kong and Mongolia have zero cases reported.
Evidently, women in some countries are much less likely to report an attack than in others and are much less likely to have their complaint recorded.
UN statistician Enrico Bisogno says surveys suggest that as few as one in 10 cases are ever reported to the police, in many countries.
"We often present the situation as kind of an iceberg where really what we can see is just the tip while the rest is below the sea level. It remains below the radar of the law enforcement agencies," he says.
Naomi Wolf has also written that Sweden has the lowest conviction rate in Europe.
She was relying on statistics from a nine-year-old report, which calculated percentage conviction rates based on the number of offences recorded by the police and the number of convictions. But this is a problematic way of analysing statistics, as several offences could be committed by one person.
The United Nations holds official statistics on the number of convictions for rape per 100,000 people and actually, by that measure, Sweden has the highest number of convictions per capita in Europe, bar Russia. In 2010, 3.7 convictions were achieved per 100,000 population.
Though it's still the case, as Wolf pointed out to the BBC, that women in Sweden report a high number of offences - and only a small number of rapists are punished.
So there's a lot that official statistics don't tell us. They certainly don't reveal the real number of rapes that happen in Sweden, or any other country. And they don't give a clear view of which countries have worse crime rates than others.
Rape is particularly complex, but you'd think it would be straightforward to analyse murder rates across different countries - just count up the dead bodies, and compare and contrast.
If only, says Enrico Bisogno. "For example, if I punch somebody and the person eventually dies, some countries can consider that as an intentional murder, others as a manslaughter. Or in some countries, dowry killings are coded separately because there is separate legislation."
What's more, a comparison of murder rates between developed and less developed countries may tell you as much about health as crime levels, according to Professor Chris Lewis, a criminologist from Portsmouth University in the UK.
The statistics are to some unknown degree complicated by the fact that you're more likely to survive an attack in a town where you're found quickly and taken to a hospital that's well-equipped.
*******
Wake-up time in Europe: Time to get armed
Sweden the latest to report soaring gun sales
Leo Hohmann
Published: 12/18/2015
Of all the countries in Europe being overrun with Islamic refugees, Sweden may be the most vulnerable.
Known as a bastion of liberalism and tolerance in a pre-manufactured multicultural society, Sweden is seeing the first signs of a culture breaking down.
Official law enforcement statistics show a significant surge in violence in Sweden even before the massive influx of 190,000 refugees in 2015. Sweden has been importing Muslim immigrants into its major cities for decades, and parts of Stockholm, Trelleborg and Malmo have taken on a new, distinctively Middle Eastern look and feel. Sexual assaults, killings and gang activity are all on the rise.
But the flood of new refugees from Syria, Afghanistan and North Africa in 2015 has been a wake-up call for many Swedes, who are now getting armed, reports Ingrid Carlqvist for Gatestone Institute.
Carlqvist says Sweden has become, not a police state, but a “nightwatchman state – every man is on his own.”
With the influx of 190,000 unskilled and unemployed migrants expected this year — equivalent to 2 percent of Sweden’s current population.
That number is as if 6.4 million Islamic migrants arrived in the U.S. in one year, as opposed to the roughly 200,000 that come to America annually.
“And the Swedes are preparing: demand for firearms licenses is increasing; more and more Swedes are joining shooting clubs and starting vigilante groups. … According to police statistics, there are 1,901,325 licensed guns, owned by 567,733 people, in Sweden.”
Add to this an unknown number of illegal weapons. To get a gun permit in Sweden, you need to be at least 18 years old, law-abiding, well-behaved, and have a hunting license or be a member of an approved shooting club. In 2014, 11,000 people got hunting licenses: 10 percent more than the year before. One out of five was a woman.
“There is also a high demand for alarm systems right now,” a salesman at one of the security companies told Carlqvist.
“It is largely due to the turbulence we are seeing around the country at the moment.” People have lost confidence in the state, he added.
Alan Gottlieb, executive vice president of the Second Amendment Foundation, told WND he recently returned from a conference in Europe, where he learned that many countries are experiencing soaring weapon sales. WND reported Oct. 26 on one such country, Austria.
Obtaining a working firearm and ammunition in many European countries – such as Germany, Britain, Denmark and the Netherlands – is practically impossible for the average citizen.
Germany, for instance, requires a psychological evaluation, the purchase of liability insurance and verifiable compliance with strict firearms storage and safety rules. And self-defense is not even a valid reason to purchase a gun in these countries.
Sweden’s gun laws are also ultra-tight. It is illegal for a civilian in Sweden to carry a firearm, unless for a specific, legal purpose, such as hunting or attending shooting ranges, according to the website Sweden.org.
Guns must by law be stored in an approved safe. And to transport firearms, there are also rules. “The general regulations are that the gun must be unloaded, hidden and transported in a safe and secure way under supervision,” the website says.
But even with these restrictions, increasing numbers of people are willing to go through the red tape necessary to get a gun.
“In Sweden, gun and ammunition sales are up just like in other European countries due to the wave of immigrants from the Middle East and the increase in terrorism,” Gottlieb said. “People everywhere want the means to defend themselves. When seconds count, the police are minutes away.”
In Sweden, Carlqvist reported that residents are reporting longer response times from overburdened police. And sometimes, depending on the location, the cops don’t come at all.
She writes:
“Truck drivers say that when they see a thief emptying the fuel tank of their trucks, they run out with a baseball bat. It is no use calling the police, but if you hit the thief, you can at least prevent him from stealing more diesel. Many homeowners say the same thing: they sleep with a baseball bat under the bed. But this is risky: the police can then say you have been prepared to use force, and that might backfire on you.
“The salesman, who asked to remain anonymous, also spoke of Sweden’s many Facebook groups, in which people in different villages openly discuss how they intend to protect themselves: ‘Sometimes you get totally freaked out when you see what they are writing. But you have to understand that Swedes are really scared when an asylum house opens in their village. They can see what has happened in other places.'”
At another security company, a salesman said every time the state immigration authorities buy or rent a new housing center for refugees, his firm is swamped with calls.
“The next day, half the village calls and wants to buy alarm systems,” he told Gatestone.
Pamela Geller, the anti-Shariah activist
and author of Stop the Islamization of America, said Sweden represents the future of Europe. And long term, it could easily be America if it continues to head down its current path.
“This is indeed the future of Europe,” she wrote in a recent blog. “By their irresponsible and short-sighted, suicidal immigration and refugee policies, Europe’s political and media elites have ensured a future of violence, bloodshed and chaos for their people.”
Larry Pratt, executive director of Gun Owners of America, said any Western society that is modeled on tolerance had better also be protective of citizens’ rights to defend their homes and their persons.
“In America, we say that a liberal who was mugged yesterday is a conservative today. It looks as if Sweden has a rapidly increasing conservative population that has either recently been mugged or has the fear of such imminent violence,” Pratt told WND. “The threat of terrorism in their famously tolerant country has convinced Swedes that firearms and tolerance may not be inconsistent. Tolerance, perhaps, but a gun for sure.”
Jerry Henry, executive director of GeorgiaCarry.org, said it would appear that Sweden and the U.S. have a lot in common.
“There are many parallels, in my opinion. Although citizens in both countries are purchasing firearms for self-protection, the U.S. is ahead in purchasing firearms as we have been doing that in a serious manner since 2008 and continue today,” Henry said.
“Sweden turned a blind eye to the coming refugee storm, and our present administration did its best to get our citizens to do the same thing,” he added. “Now Sweden finds themselves in need to protect themselves and are doing what we have been doing for quite some time.”
As in the U.S., women in Sweden represent one of fastest growing segments fueling the current gun-sale bonanza.
“I am amazed that a citizen in Sweden can be arrested for sleeping with a baseball bat under his bed for being prepared to use force. How ridiculous is that? This is very difficult for me and most U.S. citizens to believe while admitting we have many gun prohibitionists who would love to see such a move here.”
Henry said gun sales are up in all locations across his state, and the demand for concealed-carry permits skyrocketed after the San Bernardino, California, Islamic terrorist attack that killed 14 people at a Christmas party.
“One would expect this trend to continue for quite some time. Most people I know are either prepared for the worst or preparing for the worst,” he said.
“We also have a lot of sheriffs and law officers who are urging armed citizens to carry to protect themselves and others if necessary,” Henry continued. “This is a huge reversal from just a couple of years ago. This is especially gratifying when our president’s first thought after a mass murder is to discuss how he plans to implement gun control.”
“The Age of Aquarius was in the 1960s and 1970s, but the Age of Awakening may be appearing just over the horizon.”
*******
SWEDEN: On the verge of collapse from the Muslim invasion, Swedes are arming themselves with the only guns they can get their hands on – hunting rifles
By Shoebat Foundation on November 17, 2015 in General
By BI: It has gotten so dangerous in Sweden, between the rapes, murders, and burglaries by Muslim migrants, police can’t even respond to all the calls they get, telling people, instead, to get help from their neighbors.
*******

The Glazov Gang-Sweden: On the Verge of Collapse.  
Published on Nov 8, 2015
*******

Communism! Is It Just a Matter of Time? (Part 6)

$
0
0
*******
Communist Party USA (CPUSA) Recruits 1100 Priests To Join Catholic Church
By Marilyn MacGruder Barnewall
March 27, 2016
NewsWithViews.com
It is Easter... the day of the Resurrection of Jesus Christ.
Easter proves that love is stronger than hate, good triumphs over evil, and that truth sets us free. The cobwebs of ignorance are removed by shining the light of truth on them. Slimy secrets exposed no longer withhold truth from people who seek it.
It doesn’t always happen on our time schedule, but it always happens.
That is why we are told to seek... why we are promised that if we seek we will find answers to our questions. People, it seems, are lazy. We stopped seeking and began saying prayers asking Jesus to seek and provide the answers for us... or we relied on our Parson or Priest or a television personality to do our seeking – to find truth for us. We must find our own truths.
We stopped seeking answers to worldly matters, too. We turned everything over to politicians so we would have more time for ourselves... our personal needs. And that’s how we got in our current mess... overtaken by corruption in the hands of power seekers.
How could a greater contrast between two philosophies of life be made clearer during this Easter Week? Those who follow Islam gave us Brussels. Jesus Christ gave His life for Christians.
How did our lives, our sovereignty as a nation, our peaceful world get lost so quickly? How did our world change so fast? It did not. What we are seeing today is the result of plans that were put in place long ago and have been implemented one small step at a time. For example, Thomas Jefferson was the first President to declare war against radical Islamists.
It is reminiscent of what happened to the Catholic Church when it got caught up in the evil of pedophile priests abusing young boys. It is the worst kind of abuse of power. It is a puzzle that took years to figure out and Rome is still working to resolve it. Rome thought evil could be swept under a rug... but the light of truth always surprises evil doers.
Before Catholic haters jump to conclusions and before Catholics become defensive, what follows is a true story. It explains how the communists plotted the downfall of the Catholic Church – and have come a long way toward achieving their objectives. It is a story that is difficult to believe... but it is the absolute truth and is exemplary of just how far diseased minds go to achieve the objectives of world dominance.
The book School of Darkness was published in 1954. It was written by Bella Dodd, from 1932 - 1948 an organizer for the Communist Party USA (CPUSA). For four years, she sat on the CPUSA’s National Council. Bella Dodd says: “In the 1930s we put eleven hundred men into the priesthood in order to destroy the Church from within.” In a Fordham University lecture, in 1950, she said: “Right now they are in the highest places in the Church.”
This may help some people understand the socialist/communist messages that periodically emerge from priestly commentary at Sunday Mass – or from the Pope in Rome. Just as America today is the result of policies put quietly in place in the late 1800s to turn our Republic into a corporation, the Church today faces the problems caused by those eleven hundred communists placed in the Catholic Church by CPUSA way back in the 1930s and 40s.
Today, we count the ways in which people can abuse power and impose the cruelest of life-changing experiences on others while, simultaneously, holding themselves and their association with the abuse above it all—because of position. Politicians do it, teachers do it, policemen and judges do it—and priests do it. All are human.
It is important to realize that those who abuse the power of position are those who suffer from the greatest sense of personal powerlessness. They are the weakest, most insecure among us. When asked why they abuse others, many respond “Because I can.” Their power over others makes it possible. Not all politicians, teachers, policemen, judges — or priests or presidents — gain a sense of personal power from their occupations. Most seek to serve. Too many, however, do not.
Emotion can carry us into the darkness of half-truths, but there is a greater point to be made. All believers suffer persistent attacks against Christianity, family, and everyday goodness and we must not allow them to overcome us! Be aware of the attacks and why they are occurring. They want to take your faith, your family, and your goodness from you. It is the only way they can bring down this Great Nation.
To prove my point, between 2001 and 2005 the Associated Pressinvestigated
sexual misconduct in our public schools. They found 1,801 educators were guilty of sexual misconduct with youths. We don’t hear about this sexual abuse in government’s public schools... but the mainstream media makes sure we hear about any deviance within any religious organization. Ask yourself why.
In a 2004 report for the U.S. Department of Education titled “Educator Sexual Misconduct: A Synthesis of Existing Literature” done for the “No Child Left Behind” program, Dr. Carol Shakeshaft said that a study she did of complaints against Catholic priests versus public school abuse over a 50-year period proved “the physical sexual abuse of students in public schools is likely more than 100 times the abuse by priests.” Still, parents appear to have no time for School Board meetings. When did you last attend a Board meeting?
When the first Catholic priest abused his power to sexually assault a child and was protected by the Church rather than reported to the police, a Holy obligation to “let the little children come unto Me” was violated. That command was given by the highest possible authority within any Christian Church.
The Vatican has said that sinful and criminal abuse of minors by members of the Church must be condemned. They agree there is a need for justice and amends. I say the Church needs to clearly define at what point it’s time to dial 911 and let law enforcement handle unlawful behavior. All humans must be held accountable to the same standard before the law. An Oath to God and the designation as a “Man of God” does not change that simple rule of the most basic definition of civilization. Too, it’s pretty clear that a “Man of God” doesn’t sexually assault children.
All of the above takes me back to Bella Dodd’s book, School of Darkness. A graduate of Hunter College and New York University’s School of Law, Mrs. Dodd was a school teacher and lawyer by profession. Reading Bella Dodd’s book made me realize the Church has been fighting a communist recruitment program put in place in the 1930s by CPUSA. All Christians have been fighting this battle and the Communist Party is still up to its old and very dirty tricks in our fight against radical Islam.
It is for this reason I draw the analogy between what Bella Dodd reports about the CPUSA and our President's inability to accurately define our current Middle East enemy in the war on terror. Until Mrs. Dodd wrote her book and explained what happened in the 1930s and 40s, the Catholic Church couldn’t define its enemy. And, I would point out the communists are as anti-Christian today as they were in 1940.
Specifically, Mrs. Dodd said: “In the 1930s we (CPUSA) put eleven hundred men into the priesthood in order to destroy the Church from within.” The idea was for these men to be ordained and progress to positions of influence and authority as Monsignors and Bishops. Just 12 years before Vatican II, held in 1962, she said: “Right now they are in the highest places in the Church.” The plan was to weaken the church’s effectiveness against Communism.She stated that these changes would be so drastic, “you will not recognize the Catholic Church.”
During her Fordham University lecture in 1950, Dodd talked of the chaos planned. A monk who attended the lecture is quoted from Christian Order:
“I listened to that woman for four hours and she had my hair standing on end. Everything she said has been fulfilled to the letter. You would think she was the world’s greatest prophet, but she was no prophet. She was merely exposing the step-by-step battle plan of Communist subversion of the Catholic Church. She explained that of all the world’s religions, the Catholic Church was the only one feared by the Communists… The whole idea was to destroy, not the institution of the Church, but rather the Faith of the people, and even use the institution of the Church, if possible, to destroy the Faith through the promotion of a pseudo-religion: something that resembled Catholicism but was not the real thing.
“Once the Faith was destroyed,” the Monk continued, “she explained that there would be a guilt complex introduced into the Church... to label the ‘Church of the past’ as being oppressive, authoritarian, full of prejudices, arrogant in claiming to be the sole possessor of truth, and responsible for the divisions of religious bodies throughout the centuries. This would be necessary to shame Church leaders into an ‘openness to the world,’ and to a more flexible attitude toward all religions and philosophies. The Communists would then exploit this openness in order to undermine the Church.”
Has anyone listened to the recent comments of Pope Francis lately? They ring with "openness."
In New York, the CPUSA got into trouble and Dodd was a featured part of the problem in the New York Times reports. Dodd, who parted ways with CPUSA, went to Washington to argue an immigration appeal and met with a friend from the old East Bronx area of her childhood. He talked with her about testifying against the Communist Party in front of the House UnAmerican Activities Committee and asked if she wanted FBI protection. He then asked if she would like to see a priest. She was startled by the question, but was amazed at the intensity of her own answer as she said she would.
“Perhaps we can reach Monsignor Sheen at Catholic University,” he said, and an appointment was made for her late that evening.
From School of Darkness, Chapter 16:
“A thousand fears assailed me. Would he insist that I talk to the FBI? Would he insist that I testify? Would he make me write articles? Would he see me at all?
“...By what right, I thought, was I seeking the help of someone I had helped revile, even if only by my silence? ...I rang the doorbell and was ushered into a small room. While I waited, the struggle within me began again. Had there been an easy exit I would have run out, but in the midst of my turmoil Monsignor Fulton Sheen walked into the room, his silver cross gleaming, a warm smile in his eyes.
“He held out his hand as he crossed the room. ‘Doctor, I’m glad you’ve come,’ he said. His voice and his eyes had a welcome which I had not expected, and it caught me unaware. Monsignor Sheen put his hand on my shoulder to comfort me. ‘Don’t worry,’ he said. ‘This thing will pass,’ and he led me gently to a little chapel. We both knelt before a statue of Our Lady. I don’t remember praying, but I do remember that the battle within me ceased, my tears were dried, and I was conscious of stillness and peace.”
Archbishop Fulton J. Sheen (as he was at the end of his life) never hesitated to point out the evils of communism on his popular television broadcasts of the 1960s. He was an exceptional man. He counseled Bella Dodd as disease sent her to her death. He is the reason she wrote her book.
The impact of Archbishop Sheen’s counseling is apparent in Bella Dodd’s words:
“On my way to the airport I thought how much he understood. He knew that a nominal Christian with a memory of the Cross can easily be twisted to the purposes of evil by men who masquerade as saviors. I thought how communist leaders achieve their greatest strength and cleverest snare when they use the will to goodness of their members. They stir the emotions with phrases which are only a blurred picture of eternal truths.”
There is no doubt the current crisis and liberal attitudes within the Catholic Church have hurt many people. The headlines achieve the objectives set by CPUSA over 80 years ago. This, then, established the battleground of the Catholic Church from 1950 until—today. It is also the battleground of our schools, families and all other character-building tools used by humanity to keep evil in its cage and civilization moving forward and not “progressing” back into the cave.
As Bella Dodd said, “I thought how communist leaders achieve their greatest strength and cleverest snare when they use the will to goodness of their members.”
That is a danger all Christians face. Goodness misdirected can deter us all from its very purpose. We must keep a clear line of delineation between how faith and religion are defined. Our First Amendment rights to freedom of religion do not carry with them the right of Islam to establish a separate government with its Sharia statutes and laws as part of its religion.
What is “Goodness?” It is best defined by the reason we celebrate this day: Easter and the Resurrection of Jesus Christ who sacrificed His life so that we might have eternal life.
Compare that with the tyrannical taking of other lives so radical egos can celebrate its power over the powerless... whether it is done via violence in Brussels or non-violence in Washington, D.C.
Happy Easter!
© 2016 Marilyn M. Barnewall - All Rights Reserved
Marilyn MacGruder Barnewall began her career in 1956 as a journalist with the Wyoming Eagle in Cheyenne. During her 20 years (plus) as a banker and bank consultant, she wrote extensively for The American Banker, Bank Marketing Magazine, Trust Marketing Magazine, was U.S. Consulting Editor for Private Banker International (London/Dublin), and other major banking industry publications. She has written seven non-fiction books about banking and taught private banking at Colorado University for the American Bankers Association. She has authored seven banking books, one dog book, and two works of fiction (about banking, of course). She has served on numerous Boards in her community.
Barnewall is the former editor of The National Peace Officer Magazine and as a journalist has written guest editorials for the Denver Post, Rocky Mountain News and Newsweek, among others. On the Internet, she has written for NewsWithViews.com, World Net Daily, Christian Business Daily, Business Reform, and others. She has been quoted in Time, Forbes, Wall Street Journal and other national and international publications. She can be found in Who's Who in America, Who's Who of American Women, Who's Who in Finance and Business, and Who's Who in the World.
*******
A 5 Step Guide To A Communism Themed Prom
By Meredith Ancret
March 8, 2015
Students at the Cottonwood Classical Prepatory School in Albuquerque have apparently decided to make their theme for prom this year “Communism”.
In light of that I have decided to offer my services as a consultant so that they can get their theme as true to life as possible.
Here’s my top 5 elements that this school’s prom committee needs to really bring Communism to life for their fellow students.
5. Prom Committee:
If there’s some debate over who should be in charge of the prom committee or one of the members is speaking out against your prom planning ideas, don’t be afraid to really get into the Communist theme early by having them kidnapped or executed* before they can ruin your plans for school domination.
4. Security:
Obviously the first step is to have a multitude of KGB roaming the venue and even checking in on the after parties. What do you mean it’s your hotel room so they can’t come in? Of course they can, they’re the KGB. You don’t have a right to privacy. Thinking about getting lucky after Prom? Well only if you don’t mind an audience.
3. Food:
Be prepared for long lines for the punch and for the snacks. Also be prepared for rationing, get there early or you might reach the head of the line only to be told to come back next week, because they’re all out.
2. Dress Code:
Keep in mind that only Communist Party approved dress styles will be allowed. Also if you have a larger dress budget than someone else, be prepared to share the wealth. Janice can’t show up in a $400 dollar dress if Suzy from her Home-ec class only has the money for a $20 discount bin buy.
Except for the Prom Committee themselves, they need to look fabulous. Don’t be afraid to confiscate funds from other attendees to make sure you have a budget worthy of your prom committee title.
1. Venue:
If your venue is too small to support your full senior class, don’t worry! You can always throw the undesirables into prison so you don’t have to worry about them causing a scene.
Alternately, if you know of another smaller high school throwing a prom nearby, you can always invade their prom, imprison their prom committee, and take over the venue so you have more room.
Also, just in case there is a prom going on nearby that you think might draw away your prom attendees because of their lack of secret police and large food selection, make sure you make it impossible for your senior class to leave the party early by building a wall. Don’t skimp on the barbed wire and snipers! Remember your prom is so amazing that you need fear of death to ensure attendence!
And there you have it, follow these 5 simple steps and your whole school will have a dream (or would that be nightmare?) worthy of the Communism theme for this year’s prom!
*The author of this article does not actually advocate executing or kidnapping your fellow students. Satire.
*******

School Chooses "Communism" For Prom Theme?!?  
Published on Mar 12, 2015
High School seniors at an Albuquerque high school want their prom to have a Communism theme. Seniors at Cottonwood Classical Preparatory School decided on the theme of communism after taking a democratic vote. Sadly the Prom theme has been nixed. Watch host Dan Speerin take it on this week on "S'Up Murica?"
*******
Also See:
Let's Not Forget That Stalin Murdered Millions!
26 February 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/02/lets-not-forget-that-stalin-murdered.html
and
Communism! Is It Just a Matter of Time?
(Part 1)
03 March 2008
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2008/03/communism.html
and
(Part 2)
10 January 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2010/01/communist-revealed-plan-to-mormon.htmland
and
 (Part 3)
08 October 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2010/10/communism.html
and
(Part 4)
24 October 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/10/communism-is-it-just-matter-of-time.html
and
(Part 5)
28 December 2014
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2014/12/communism-left-so-many-scarred-lives.html
and
Russia is Still Dangerous, Still Communist!
20 December 2008
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2008/12/russia-playing-possem-still-dangerous.html
and
Honduras - Communism vs. Democracy
21 July 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/07/honduras-communism-vs-democracy.html
and
None Dare Call It Socialism?
27 June 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2009/06/does-anyone-dare-call-it-socialism.html
and
Feminism - A Communist Plot!
18 August 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.com/2009/08/feminism-communist-plot.html
and
Who is that Guy in the Oval Office?
(Part 11)
11 December 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/12/who-is-that-guy-in-oval-office-part-11.html
*******

Warning About Radical Islam In Canada!

$
0
0
*******

Respected muslim scholar warns Canadian Senate Committee truth about Islam  
Published on Feb 10, 2016
Watch particularly from 44:05 when Tarek Fatah lays into dhimmi Senator Grant Mitchell when he argues against Mr Fatah's claims about the barbarity of Islam and the grave danger it poses to The West.
*******
Conrad Black: Radical Islam poses a real, direct threat to the West — including Canada
Conrad Black
January 24, 2015
Prime Minister Stephen Harper and Foreign Minister John Baird have consistently and often courageously recognized the nature of the terrorist threat. THE CANADIAN PRESS/Adrian Wyld
It is distressing to witness the waffling and quibbling in both federal opposition parties over Canada’s contribution to the anti-terrorist effort in the Middle East, and even more depressing to note the failure of the opposition to show any recognition of the nature of the intensifying struggle between the West and radical Islam. I have expressed here before my concerns about the steady deterioration of the size and condition of our armed forces (though the personnel are of uniformly high quality). But Prime Minister Stephen Harper and Foreign Minister John Baird have consistently and often courageously recognized the nature of the terrorist threat, and particularly the fraudulence of the arguments calling Israel an apartheid society with no right to exist as a Jewish state.
The recent outrages in Paris have caused the more discerning political leadership and commentariat in many countries to recognize that the Israelis are just a pretextual grievance, because they are in territory the Arabs claim as their own. (This is bunk, as the territory of Israel was always inhabited by some Jews and was previously governed by the British, Turks, Crusaders, Byzantines, Romans, and Jews, and never by Arabs, but that is almost beside the point.) The real enemy is the entire West, not just, or even particularly, Israel.
The associate publisher of the influential Paris newspaper Le Figaro wrote last week in an uplifting “Declaration” that a “new religious war on a planetary scale” has been declared. (The piece evokes Emile Zola’s seminal “J’Accuse” in Georges Clemenceau’s L’Aurore in 1898 during the Dreyfus Affair.) “Islamists massacre Christians in Egypt, Iraq, Philippines, Indonesia, Pakistan, Nigeria, all over, in fact,” he wrote. He predicted a “pitiless unleashing of a renascent Islam … by the immense Islamized masses of the Third World and our great metropolises,” motivated by a “hatred of Christianity (that) vastly exceeds all problems of faith. Attacking churches, priests, other religious personnel, and the faithful, Islamists wish to destroy Western civilization, democracy, capitalism, what they call ‘neo-colonialism,’ equality of the sexes, the Rights of Man, all progress as we conceive it. Marx, Lenin, and Stalin have been replaced (as enemies of the West) by Allah and the Prophet. Bellicose imams have taken the places of the political commissars … We weep with our usual crocodile tears for the Copts murdered in Egypt and Christians assassinated in Baghdad as the representatives of the West, European culture, capitalism, neo-colonialism, the dollar and Coca-Cola,” though they antedated the Muslims in the Nile Valley and Baghdad by five centuries, “but we sit by passively with folded arms.”
This elegant and fiery French polemical writer reached his apotheosis with the demand for an end to nauseating platitudes about “Islamo-Christian amity … and the harmonious co-habitation of our three monotheisms, the avoidance of absurd and sometimes odious references to the ‘most sober hours in our history,’ and the cessation of the repentances and cowardices” of the West.
*******
Thomas L. Friedman: The problem is Islamism
Thomas L. Friedman, The New York Times
January 23, 2015
I’ve never been a fan of global conferences to solve problems, but when I read that the Obama administration is organizing a Summit on Countering Violent Extremism for Feb. 18, in response to the Paris killings, I had a visceral reaction: Is there a box on my tax returns that I can check so my tax dollars won’t go to pay for this?
When you don’t call things by their real name, you always get in trouble. And this administration, so fearful of being accused of Islamophobia, is refusing to make any link to radical Islam from the recent explosions of violence against civilians (most of them Muslims) by Boko Haram in Nigeria, by the Taliban in Pakistan, by Al-Qaeda in Paris and by jihadists in Yemen and Iraq. We’ve entered the theatre of the absurd.
Last week the conservative columnist Rich Lowry wrote an essay in Politico that contained quotes from White House spokesman Josh Earnest that I could not believe. I was sure they were made up. But I checked the transcript: 100% correct. I can’t say it better than Lowry did:
“The administration has lapsed into unselfconscious ridiculousness. Asked why the administration won’t say [after the Paris attacks] we are at war with radical Islam, Earnest on Tuesday explained the administration’s first concern ‘is accuracy. We want to describe exactly what happened. These are individuals who carried out an act of terrorism, and they later tried to justify that act of terrorism by invoking the religion of Islam and their own deviant view of it.’
“This makes it sound as if the Charlie Hebdo terrorists set out to commit a random act of violent extremism and only subsequently, when they realized that they needed some justification, did they reach for Islam.
“The day before, Earnest had conceded that there are lists of recent ‘examples of individuals who have cited Islam as they’ve carried out acts of violence.’ Cited Islam? According to the Earnest theory … purposeless violent extremists rummage through the scriptures of great faiths, looking for some verses to cite to support their mayhem and often happen to settle on the holy texts of Islam.”
President Obama knows better. I am all for restraint on the issue, and would never hold every Muslim accountable for the acts of a few. But it is not good for us or the Muslim world to pretend that this spreading jihadist violence isn’t coming out of their faith community. It is coming mostly, but not exclusively, from angry young men and preachers on the fringe of the Sunni Arab and Pakistani communities in the Middle East and Europe.
If Western interventions help foster violent Islamic reactions, we should reduce them. To the extent that Muslim immigrants in European countries feel marginalized, they and their hosts should worker harder on absorption. But both efforts will only take you so far.
Something else is also at work, and it needs to be discussed. It is the struggle within Arab and Pakistani Sunni Islam over whether and how to embrace modernity, pluralism and women’s rights. That struggle drives, and is driven by, the dysfunctionality of so many Arab states and Pakistan. It has left these societies with too many young men who have never held a job or a girl’s hand, who then seek to overcome their humiliation at being left behind, and to find identity, by “purifying” their worlds of other Muslims who are not sufficiently pious and of Westerners whom they perceive to be putting Muslims down. But you don’t see this in the two giant Muslim communities in Indonesia or India.
Only Sunni Arabs and Pakistanis can get inside their narrative and remediate it. But reformers can only do that if they have a free, secure political space. If we’re not going to help create space for that internal dialogue, let’s just be quiet. Don’t say stupid stuff. And don’t hold airy fairy conferences that dodge the real issues, which many mainstream Muslims know and are actually eager to discuss, especially women.
The Arab journalist Diana Moukalled, writing in the London-based Asharq Al-Awsat last week, asked: “Don’t all these events now going on around us and committed in our name require us to break the fear barrier and begin to question our region and our societies, especially the ideas being trafficked there that have led us to this awful stage where we are tearing at one another’s throats — to mention nothing of what as a result also happens beyond our region?”
And a remarkable piece in The Washington Post Sunday by Asra Q. Nomani, an American Muslim born in India, called out the “honour corps” — a loose, well-funded coalition of governments and private individuals “that tries to silence debate on extremist ideology in order to protect the image of Islam.” It “throws the label of ‘Islamophobe’ on pundits, journalists and others who dare to talk about extremist ideology in the religion. … The official and unofficial channels work in tandem, harassing, threatening and battling introspective Muslims and non-Muslims everywhere. … The bullying often works to silence critics of Islamic extremism. … They cause governments, writers and experts to walk on eggshells.”
I know one in particular.
The New York Times
*******
Radical Islam is on the march in Canada   
Farzana Hassan, Toronto Sun
February 14, 2014
Two terror trials unfolding on Canadian soil should cause enough concern over the spread of radical Islam in Canada.
Both Chiheb Esseghaier and Dr. Khurram Sher, the pathologist and former Canadian Idol contestant, have openly ranted against Canada.
But there’s also another more insidious form of Islamism at play in Canadian universities and public institutions that some of us may shrug off as innocuous.
The University of Calgary is hosting a conference Saturday where Memphis imam and one-time Holocaust denier Yasir Qadhi will speak.
Imam Qadhi lectures at Rhodes College in the Department of Religious Studies. In the past, he argued Jews are not “semites” but “European” from “Russia.” He also encouraged his audiences to read The Hoax of the Holocaust and called the Holocaust false propaganda.
He later retracted and apologized for these statements, arguing one must distinguish between the actions of the Israeli state and the Jews as a people, but some statements should set off alarm bells even after retraction.
Qadhi will speak on the subject of “Better Your Bitter Half”. A press release advertising the speech from Muslims of Calgary says he will outline “psychological” differences between men and women which will be useful in “elevating” existing spousal relationships and entering new ones with “the right mindset”, presumably after blessed enlightenment from the imam.
Here in Ontario, another university funded by tax dollars is refusing to allow Moray Watson, a non-Muslim, to audit a course on Islamic preaching, public speaking and worship. The course at Huron College was designed by Ingrid Mattson, a Canadian convert to Islam who used to head the Islamic Society of North America.
She is considered the face of Muslim enlightenment and even feminism.
Having paid at least lip service to women’s greater role in public life, she has also advocated and engaged in interfaith dialogue.
Her stance in disallowing a non-Muslim student to audit the Islamic course is hence all the more concerning. It calls into question her sincerity as a votary of interfaith harmony.
Indeed, as chair of Islamic Studies at Huron, she should have insisted on allowing Watson to audit the course.
Universities have the right to determine their own prerequisites, but they must be truly academic and not discriminate based on religion.
Is it possible Prof. Mattson fears Watson’s criticism of Islam will undermine the course’s stated objective of training Muslim men and women to proselytize?
In other examples, university officials, public servants and other public agencies have capitulated to Islamist doggedness and religious zeal.
They try hard to project their tolerance of an exotic religious and cultural perspective. The unsavoury effect of this perseverance is that the Islamists usually win, sometimes by default, because no one dares challenge their agenda.
None of the arguments offered by Huron College in defence of its decision cut any ice.
If Watson wishes to enrol in any publicly-funded university course, including one entitled The Muslim Voice: Islamic Preaching, Public Speaking and Worship, he should be able to do so.
It’s a separate debate whether publicly-funded universities should even offer courses only available to members of one religious faith.
Canada is becoming a venue for Islamist inroads into public institutions.
Islamists would love to undo the strides we have made toward liberty and egalitarianism, and they seek out every chance to advance their obscurantist views and elitist ideas.
Canada must thank people like Watson for challenging this agenda. Universities need more people like him.
*******
Also See:
Sweden Is No Longer Sweden!
27 March 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/03/sweden-is-no-longer-sweden.html
and
Harper's Gone! Here's Justin!
(Part 2)
17 March 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/03/harpers-gone-heres-justin-part-2.html
and
Radical Islam is the Problem!
20 October 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/10/radical-islam-is-problem.html
and
Europe is Changing from the Muslim Refugee Situation!
06 September 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/09/europe-is-changing-from-muslim-refugee.html
and
Is Islam a Religion?
11 May 2014
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2014/05/is-islam-religion.html
and
A Brit Speaks to Muslims!
08 April 2014
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2014/04/blog-post_8.html
and
What Do You Know About Saudi Arabia?
29 September 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/09/what-do-you-know-about-saudi-arabia.html
and
Corporal Punishment in Schools!
29 January 2012
 http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/01/corporal-punishment-in-schools.html
and
Muslims, "Sharia Law" and Other Thoughts!
(Part 1)
19 November 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/11/muslim-sharia-law.html
and
(Part 2)
15 May 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/05/muslims-sharia-law-and-other-thoughts.html
and
In Western Countries, the Burqa has become Questionable!
12 January 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/01/blog-post.html
and
Quran Burning Issue: Terry Jones vs World
12 September 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/09/quran-burning-issue-terry-jones-vs.html
and
 What's with the Ground Zero Mosque?
15 August 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/08/whats-with-ground-zero-mosque.html
and
Muslims in America
26 July 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/07/muslims-in-america.html
and
Muslims are Taking Over the Western World
03 February 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/02/hey-lets-talk-about-islam-pentagons.html
and
The Trial in New York City
27 November 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/11/trial-in-new-york-city.html
and
Taliban - Still Around, Still Trouble!
11 May 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/05/taliban.html
and
Are Muslims Taking Over the World?
22 April 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/04/are-muslims-taking-over-world.html
*******

Not All Muslims, It's Radical Islam That's The Problem!

$
0
0

*******

Rise of Radical Islam and Right Wing in Europe
Published on Jan 24, 2014
*******

Rise of Radical Islam in Russia "The Danger Grows"  
Published on May 8, 2013
*******

Crazy radical muslims in the u.k. kick them out.  
Uploaded on Nov 12, 2009
*******

'If we lose Europe to Radical Islam, we will Lose' - Major Threats to the Western World  
Published on Feb 11, 2013
"Freedom Will Prevail"- Newt Gingrich
July 29, 2010 - Washington, DC
Full Speech/ Other Parts:
http://www.youtube.com/user/Australia...
*******
Brussels attacks: Police strike halts Brussels airport reopening
BBC News
01 April 2016
Test have been carried out at Zaventem under tight security
*******
Plans to partially reopen Brussels airport on Friday evening have been halted amid a strike by airport police over security concerns.
The Zaventem facility has been closed since a twin suicide bomb attack on the departures hall on 22 March.
The SLFP police union told the BBC that security measures put in place for the reopening were insufficient.
So-called Islamic State (IS) said it carried out bombings of the airport and metro system that killed 32 people.
Who were the victims?
Did blunders hamper inquiry?
Links between Brussels and Paris attacks
Molenbeek's gangster jihadists
Vincent Gilles, the president of the SLFP, the largest police union in Belgium, said: "We are on strike because of what happened on 22 March - we cannot continue as if this day has not happened.
"The police feel the security measures put in place by the airport company are insufficient for those who work and use the airport."
He says metal detectors, body scanners and x-ray machines should be set up to screen people before they are allowed into terminals.
The authorities have so far rejected this, arguing that such checks would create new queues outside the buildings, leading to fresh security risks.
Departure terminal following the March 22, 2016 bombing at Zaventem
AirportImage copyright Reuters
*******
The departure area was badly damaged in the bombing
In an earlier statement, the airport's operators had said a partial reopening would be possible on Friday evening, after a temporary check-in system had been tested and made ready.
However, it said the departures area, which was severely damaged by the bomb attacks, would only operate at 20% of normal capacity, receiving only 800 departing passengers per hour.
The operator said on Friday this could not now go ahead because of the strike. Belgian media said the government was still considering the possibility of a reopening.
Defence Minister Steven Vandeput said: "We must find a balance between economic needs and security needs."
Criminal backgrounds
The airport operator's chief executive, Arnaud Feist, said earlier this week that the airport would take months to reopen fully.
CCTV shows suspects in Brussels airport attack on March 22, 2016Image copyright Reuters
Police are still searching for the suspect on the right
*******
In an earlier open letter to authorities published by Belgian broadcaster VRT (in Dutch), police had said they had sent "strong daily signals regarding the overall security at the airport".
They also alleged that too many airport employees had criminal backgrounds.
Police are still searching for the third man who took part in the airport attacks. The man, pictured on CCTV wearing a hat, was said to have fled the scene without detonating his explosive device.
The two airport bombers who died have been named as Najim Laachraoui and Ibrahim el-Bakraoui.
Bakraoui's brother, Khalid el-Bakraoui, blew himself up at Maelbeek metro station.
Police later found a computer in which Ibrahim el-Bakraoui left a final message.
The BBC has learned that the same computer contained plans and photos of Prime Minister Charles Michel's office and home.
Also on Friday, an Italian court approved the extradition of Djamal Eddine Ouali, an Algerian national accused of forging identity documents for those involved in the Brussels bombings and in the Paris attacks that killed 130 people in November.
Mr Ouali, 40, was arrested last weekend in the southern Italian city of Salerno. The court said he would be sent to Belgium within 10 says. His lawyer said he would appeal.
*******

Hollande backtracks on revoking citizenship of dual-national terrorists  
Published on Mar 30, 2016
Subscribe to France 24 now:
http://f24.my/youtubeEN
*******
10,000 millionaires abandon France over Islam fears
Progressives, who inexplicably still seek to coddle the worst humanity has to offer
By  Robert Laurie -- Bio and Archives
March 31, 2016
As we’ve argued before; when a country fails to solve its problems, those who are capable of leaving will do so. There’s no reason for a person of reasonable wealth to stay in a nation that’s making his or her life miserable. That’s not rocket science; it’s just simple economics.
So, when you look at a nation like France, you might assume that the ugly trifecta of high taxation, high cost of living, and radical Islam is incentivizing the departure of the financially stable.  ...And you’d be right - if you placed the emphasis on radical Islam.
A new report indicates that thousands of wealthy people have decided to abandon France in the wake of the Paris attacks.  As reported by IBT, The study was “compiled by New World Wealth, an agency that gives information on the global wealth sector.”
So, just how bad is it?
According to the report, Millionaire migration in 2015, France topped the list of countries with maximum millionaire outflows as it lost 10,000 millionaires, or 3% of its millionaire population. Among the cities that saw maximum millionaire outflow, Paris, was at the top – losing about 6% of its millionaire population or 7,000 millionaires in 2015 to the UK, the US, Canada, Australia and Israel.
“The large outflow of millionaires from France is notable – France is being heavily impacted by rising religious tensions between Christians and Muslims, especially in urban areas. We expect that millionaire migration away from France will accelerate over the next decade as these tensions escalate,” the report warns.
Like I said above, this probably isn’t solely about terrorism but, for a lot of these people, radical Islam is likely the straw that broke the camel’s back. The countries to which they’re fleeing tend to confirm they’ve had their fill of Islamic fascists.  If that’s the case, what about the rest of Europe?
The report warns that other European countries, including the UK, Belgium, Germany and Sweden “where religious tensions are starting to emerge”, will also see similar trends.
Progressives, who inexplicably still seek to coddle the worst humanity has to offer, will no doubt argue that Islam plays no part in the exodus. They’ll probably portray this as a symptom of extreme greed and avarice. Then they’ll say this is a paltry number of people. However, it’s pretty clear.  Many of those who have the means to do so are leaving. The more Europe kow-tows to its enemies, the more it allows itself to be subjugated by their hateful ideology, the more this trend will continue and accelerate.
*******
Brussels attacks: Molenbeek's gangster jihadists
BBC News
24 March 2016
In the poor inner-city areas of Brussels, deprivation, petty crime and radicalisation appear to have gone hand in hand. The BBC's Secunder Kermani has been finding out how drinking, smoking cannabis and fighting - combined with resentment towards white Belgian society for its perceived discrimination against Arabs - prepared some young men for a role as fighters in Syria, and terrorists in Europe.
Molenbeek is a place full of contradictions.
It's just a few minutes away from the heart of the European Union, but this densely populated district of Brussels has 40% youth unemployment.
It's been in the spotlight ever since the Paris attacks in November when it was revealed that the ringleader, Abdelhamid Abaaoud, and three of the other attackers grew up in Molenbeek.
Salah Abdeslam was arrested on 18 March
*******
They include Salah Abdeslam - who was arrested after a four-month manhunt back in his home neighbourhood.
How did he manage to stay hidden for so long? And why have so many young people from Molenbeek ended up as jihadists?
Most people in Molenbeek are rather sick of journalists - they resent the way they are portrayed in the media as a "jihadist capital of Europe". But one phrase you often hear when foreign journalists attempt a vox pop is that "terrorism has nothing to do with Islam".
Certainly, many of those who joined IS from the area did not come from particularly religious backgrounds.
Salah Abdeslam and his elder brother Brahim - who blew himself up in the Paris attacks - used to run a cafe in Molenbeek that sold alcohol and was closed down for drug offences. One friend of the brothers who used to hang out there told me he would regularly see Brahim Abdeslam "watching IS videos, with a joint in one hand, and a beer in another". He said Brahim would spout off radical statements but that no-one took him seriously.
Another friend showed me a video from a Brussels nightclub of the two Abdeslam brothers on a night out with girls, drinking and dancing - this was February 2015, just months before they started to plan the attacks in Paris.
The network that the Abdeslam brothers had around them - based as much on personal loyalty, disenchantment and petty crime as radical ideology would be key in helping Salah escape after the Paris attacks. The network was not just in Molenbeek but stretched across the so-called "croissant pauvre" (poor crescent) of Brussels - a semi-circle of deprived inner-city neighbourhoods including Schaerbeek, where Salah had a safe house, and Laeken, where some of those who helped hide him grew up.
While making a documentary for Panorama, I read the transcript of the interrogation of two of Salah Abdeslam's friends, whom he called on the night of the Paris attacks asking for help.
Hamza Attou and Mohammed Amri tell police Abdeslam said he had had a car accident and needed to be picked up. Attou claims that once they arrived Abdeslam threatened "to blow up the car if we didn't take him to Brussels".
But Amri then goes on to describe how the three men drive around Paris for about "the time it took to smoke a joint" before attempting the journey back. According to Attou, they try to drive along smaller, quieter roads - but end up lost and back on the motorway. Then they smoke a further three joints on the drive back to Brussels - they are stopped at three separate police checkpoints but allowed to pass.
At one, according to Attou, a police officer "asked Amri whether he had drunk. Amri said, 'Yes'… The police officer told Amri it wasn't good to have drunk, but that wasn't their priority today."
Back in Brussels Abdeslam changed his clothes and his appearance. According to Attou, he went to a barber's where he "got himself shaved, trimmed his hair and shaved a line on his eyebrow".
He then called another friend and told him to drop him off in another neighbourhood. These three friends were all arrested a few hours later. According to another of the circle, "they are all in jail for nothing - just because they helped Salah without thinking".
Abdeslam would remain on the run for the next four months before being arrested. It may be hard to imagine anyone agreeing to help someone involved in an atrocity like the Paris attacks - but it seems Abdeslam was able to draw upon both a network of IS supporters, and also a small network of people who were not necessarily extremists, but who felt a sense of personal loyalty to him - and a mistrust of the Belgian state.
There is certainly a sense of disaffection among many in Molenbeek. I spent an evening on a street corner talking to one young Muslim man who had been accused of attempting to travel to Syria.
He alternated between fixing me with an intense stare, and refusing to make any eye contact - exuding an air of slight volatility. Initially when I told him I wanted to understand why someone would commit an attack like the one in Paris - he told me I should travel to Raqqa, and ask people there. For him Western air strikes against IS were the answer.
But then he changed his mind. It was the fault of domestic conditions. He railed against the Belgian government - against white Belgians, who hated those of Arab descent, he said. And he would repeat "there is no democracy here" - a feeling that you can't express any view dissenting from the mainstream without being labelled extreme.
Many other young people I spoke to, who had no connection with extremism whatsoever, also had grievances about the way Muslims are treated. Some described how having a Molenbeek address made getting a job harder, and girls who wore the hijab complained of laws banning the headscarf in many places of work.
Sheikh Bassam Ayachi used to be considered a leading radical preacher in Molenbeek. The Syrian-born cleric, now 70 years old, arrived in the area in the 1990s. Some accuse him of sowing the seeds of radical Islam in Molenbeek - but he unequivocally condemns events like the Paris attacks.
When the Syrian conflict began, he travelled back to his homeland. Now allied to mainstream Islamist rebels, he's a staunch opponent of both the Assad regime and IS. So much so that the group tried to assassinate him, planting a bomb in his car. The attack cost him an arm but he survived.
Over Skype I asked him why he thought so many young people from his old neighbourhood in Molenbeek were joining IS - a group he believes "sully the name of Islam, and sully the name of the Syrian revolution".
He put it down to the lack of action against the Assad regime on the one hand, and domestic factors on the other.
"The young people from Molenbeek feel frustrated because they were marginalised by the Belgian government. They have never tried to give them work, education, social help in order to get them integrated into society," he said.
"Some of them were delinquents, selling hashish and so on. Over time they ended up in prison. In prison they found that returning to religion was something amazing: 'We can forget about any of the stupid things we did in our lives.' So they turned to religion but with hatred in them against Western society."
That sense of a need to atone for past sins is perhaps one reason why so many of those from Molenbeek who ended up with IS had criminal backgrounds.
Brahim Abdeslam - Salah's older brother - died after he set off his suicide belt in Paris café
*******
Although, as one friend of the Abdeslam brothers tells me, "It can't be that, we've all had problems with the police, we don't all end up like that." He's at a loss to explain the cause of their radicalisation - clinging rather forlornly to an idea that perhaps they did it for money, and didn't realise what they were getting into.
Or perhaps the reason for the crossover between crime and jihad is the macho glamour associated with both. A former friend of one of the leading figures in the Paris attacks described him to me as "someone who always liked a fight".
But many of these young men didn't stumble into the jihadist world completely unaided. For the early years of the Syrian conflict, according to community leaders, it was normal to see "recruiters", barred from operating in mosques, talking to groups of followers on the streets, in cafes or in private study circles.
One of the most successful of them was a man called Khalid Zerkani - now in jail in Belgium. His entourage included Abdelhamid Abaaoud, plus another of the Paris attackers, and a man currently in prison in Morocco for alleged links to the Paris cell.
One-hundred-and-thirty people were killed and hundreds wounded in the Paris attacks
*******
According to court files he wouldn't only preach to would-be jihadists, but would put them in touch with smugglers in Turkey who would transport them into Syria, and he would dole out stolen gifts to them - earning himself the nickname of "Papa Noel" - Santa Claus.
One of the young men in his circle of influence was Yoni Mayne - who ended up travelling to Syria alongside Abdelhamid Abaaoud. His mother blames Zerkani for his radicalisation. "He has destroyed the life of my son, who was 23. He has also destroyed my life. I will not forgive him."
She saw her son change after meeting Zerkani: "He used to wear brands only - Gucci, Dior, Versace... He left everything behind, even perfume, he left everything. He would wear robes only, like a Saudi."
In 2013, Yoni left for Syria. He returned, but his mother was terrified he would leave again, "I told the police he intended to leave because the phone kept ringing, even when he was asleep, to harass him. I got in touch with the police once again and I told them that he intended to leave. They said that he would not leave, that they would do something."
But the police didn't do anything. Yoni left for Syria in early 2014 and was killed a few months later.
When he and many of the others first left Brussels for Syria the conflict was far simpler. They may have had fundamentalist interpretations of religion but their primary intention was to stop the abuses being perpetrated by the Assad regime.
But most gravitated towards IS, and their radicalisation, and desensitisation to violence would have only continued.
There are people trying to solve the issues in Brussels. At the BBA gym - many of whose members come from Molenbeek - there's a mix of colours, races and religions. One former gym member did end up going to Syria and being killed. Another is currently in jail in Turkey, accused of links to the Paris attacks.
Club president Mohamed Maalem says his biggest task is to give young people a sense of self-esteem. Many who are third or fourth generation immigrants struggle with their identity, he says. "They go to Morocco they're told they're Belgian. Here they're told they're Moroccans. They don't feel at home anywhere - so they're forever trying to find out who they are."
One of the trainers at the club argues that the key cause of radicalisation in Molenbeek is a sense, rightly or wrongly, of not having a future.
"Radicalisation doesn't start with a religious ideal," he says. "The guys I know [who went to Syria] they have no ideology, they have no big ideas... They are going because they are leaving something. They are fed up with this society."
*******
Also See:
Warning About Radical Islam In Canada
28 March 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/03/warning-about-radical-islam-in-canada.html
and
Sweden Is No Longer Sweden!
27 March 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/03/sweden-is-no-longer-sweden.html
and
Harper's Gone! Here's Justin!
(Part 2)
17 March 2016
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2016/03/harpers-gone-heres-justin-part-2.html
and
Radical Islam is the Problem!
20 October 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/10/radical-islam-is-problem.html
and
Europe is Changing from the Muslim Refugee Situation!
06 September 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/09/europe-is-changing-from-muslim-refugee.html
and
Is Islam a Religion?
11 May 2014
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2014/05/is-islam-religion.html
and
A Brit Speaks to Muslims!
08 April 2014
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2014/04/blog-post_8.html
and
What Do You Know About Saudi Arabia?
29 September 2013
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2013/09/what-do-you-know-about-saudi-arabia.html
and
Corporal Punishment in Schools!
29 January 2012
 http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2012/01/corporal-punishment-in-schools.html
and
Muslims, "Sharia Law" and Other Thoughts!
(Part 1)
19 November 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/11/muslim-sharia-law.html
and
(Part 2)
15 May 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/05/muslims-sharia-law-and-other-thoughts.html
and
In Western Countries, the Burqa has become Questionable!
12 January 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/01/blog-post.html
and
Quran Burning Issue: Terry Jones vs World
12 September 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/09/quran-burning-issue-terry-jones-vs.html
and
 What's with the Ground Zero Mosque?
15 August 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/08/whats-with-ground-zero-mosque.html
and
Muslims in America
26 July 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/07/muslims-in-america.html
and
Muslims are Taking Over the Western World
03 February 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/02/hey-lets-talk-about-islam-pentagons.html
and
The Trial in New York City
27 November 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/11/trial-in-new-york-city.html
and
Taliban - Still Around, Still Trouble!
11 May 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/05/taliban.html
and
Are Muslims Taking Over the World?
22 April 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/04/are-muslims-taking-over-world.html
*******

No Economic Collapse Yet. Maybe Tomorrow?

$
0
0
*******
*******

So, Where is the Collapse?
Published on Mar 31, 2016
Bill Holter from JS Mineset is back to discuss the current state of global economic affairs, and I have one simple question for him. Where is the collapse!?
*******

 Russian General Confirms That The Dollar Collapse In 28 May 2016
Published on Mar 31, 2016
Russian General Confirms That The Dollar Collapse In 28 May 2016
The dollar collapse will be the single largest event in human history. This will be the first event that will touch every single living person in the world. All human activity is controlled by money. Our wealth, our work, our food, our government,even our relationships are affected by money. And sure The Dollar Collapse And The Economic Collapse Will Be In 28 May 2016 .
*******
*******
No global economic crisis yet, but the ingredients are there
The days when one country’s economic woes could be insulated from the wider world have long gone. China’s problems could have a fearsome domino effect
Larry Elliott, Economics editor
Wednesday, 20 January 2016
Food vendors wait for customers at a Beijing market. China’s economy grew at its slowest rate in 25 years last year. Photograph: Kevin Frayer/Getty
*******
Another day, another financial spasm. In London, New York, Shanghai and Frankfurt the story was the same: shares dumped and the oil price crashing to its lowest level since 2003 on fears that China is heading into a recession that will drag the rest of the world economy down with it.
Despite the fresh sell-off in financial markets on Wednesday, this is far from a done deal. For the doomsday scenario to materialise, China would need to have a hard landing, rather than simply a bumpy one, the rest of the world would have to be ripe for its own crisis, and there would need to be a transmission mechanism for delivering a problem centred on east Asia to the rest of the global economy.
For the time being, the theory that the events of the past three weeks herald another 2008-style crisis is just that: a hypothesis. But make no mistake, if the conditions for a recession are right, it would move around the world like a pandemic.
That, after all, is the essence of globalisation. Economies are far more integrated than they were half a century ago, when capital controls, trade barriers and extensive public ownership shielded national economies. Today, changes in political philosophy and technology mean there are far fewer impediments to the free movement of goods – and virtually none at all to the free movement of money.
So, when one country runs into problems there is always the risk of contagion. That was true of Thailand in 1997, when the collapse of its currency, the baht, quickly had a domino effect across south-east Asia.
It was true also of what appeared to be a local difficulty in a much bigger economy. Ben Bernanke, then chairman of the US Federal Reserve, was dismissive in 2006 of the notion that problems with sub-prime mortgages posed a threat to the American, let alone the global, economy. How wrong he was.
Britain’s direct exposure to China is relatively modest. It is not in the top five overseas markets for UK companies, and only 4% of UK goods and services go there. If China’s economy hits the wall, some jobs would be at risk but it would not be nearly as serious as a recession in the United States or the eurozone. The US has more at stake, but even so exports to China account for only 1% of GDP.
Britain’s banks are, however, a different story. UK banks – HSBC and Standard Chartered in particular – have lent lots of money to China to the extent that they have more at risk than any other country, should the loans turn sour. China has a mountain of bad debts.
So how would the crisis manifest itself? One way, according to Nariman Behravesh, chief economist at analysts IHS, would be if China stopped trying to support its currency, the yuan. The result, he says, would be a devaluation of 15-20% that would make China’s exports cheaper but those of every other country more expensive.
This would be the opening salvo in a full-blown currency war. Other countries would retaliate and the US would impose trade sanctions on Chinese goods. Deflationary pressure would intensify as Asian countries dumped their excess production on the rest of the world.
The UK steel industry has already had a taste of this. China is producing more steel than it needs for its own economic growth and is selling it at cut-price rates. British producers have found it impossible to compete.
That, though, would only be the start of the mayhem. Many countries in the emerging world have borrowed heavily in dollars. China itself has $1tn of dollar-denominated debt. If the yuan and other emerging market currencies are devalued, then the value of these dollar debts will rise, putting severe strain on all the affected economies and unbearable strain on the most vulnerable.
Zhu Min, deputy managing director of the International Monetary Fund, sketched out in Davos on Wednesday what would happen next. Quite simply, every investor would stampede for the exit at the same time. Liquidity in the global economy would dry up, he said, noting: “That scares everybody.”
It certainly does. Around the concrete bunker hosting the World Economic Forum, the masters of the universe were quietly checking the latest from the financial markets on their smartphones and tablets. A few eyebrows were raised when the Dow’s fall reached 500 points.
Chief executives of multinational corporations should not, of course, need to be reminded of global interconnectedness. If they did, Nobel prize-winning scientists were on hand in Davos for a tutorial on chaos theory.
One of its ideas is that seemingly tiny events can have big impacts, so that a beating of a butterfly’s wing could lead to a hurricane on the other side of the world. China is a very big butterfly.
*******
*******
Society's Five Stagesof Economic Collapse
David Meyer
Society as we know it will break down and collapse in a five stage process outlined here. While it can be accelerated by certain events like war, a natural disaster, pandemic, terrorist attack, or even an impending asteroid impact, history has shown that economic collapse will essentially happen in this five stage process. To survive the collapse, it is important to read and interpret the signs and understand what assets are important to the current situation so you can be prepared for the worst thereby allowing you to survive intact and with as little damage as possible.
STAGE 1. The Decay Begins
Everything is good and the economy is thriving. A high standard of living has been achieved. This is the way things should be. Goods are cheap and readily available. Everything seems to be in abundance. Stores are filled with retail items ready to be purchased. Life in general is good. The nation’s working infrastructure is solidly intact and working well. However, the idea that everyone is entitled to have what others have earned now permeates society. Redistribution of Wealth Policies are implemented and quietly woven into the fabric of society. Unchecked and under the guise of fairness and equality, these policies slowly decrease productivity and increase dependency on government entitlement and welfare programs.
Primary Assets:
1.Career
2.Home Value
3.Savings
4.Investments - Stocks and bonds
5.Health Insurance
6.Lifestyle Image
7.Good Credit Rating for Debt Accumulation
STAGE 2. The Slippery Slope
The economy goes into a slow but steadily increasing decline. Unemployment is on the rise. Ever increasing numbers of people receive government assistance in one form or another. People are paid not to work. Government spending has increased dramatically. The price of gold, silver, and other precious metals rise to prices unheard of just a few years earlier. Inflation reaches the double digit levels.
Primary Assets:
1.Cash
2.Precious Metals, Gold and Silver coins
3.Job Stability
4.Elimination of debt
5.Health Insurance
6.Home Equity
7.Automobile with good MPG
8.Acquiring secluded land more than 40 miles from densely populated areas
STAGE 3. It is Going to Get Worse
The total collapse of the economy begins after a significant and prolonged decline. The government implements price controls. Shortages on essential goods become widespread. Foreclosed houses sit vacant and deteriorating by the tens of thousands. Middle class neighborhoods begin to look like slums. The government begins to print currency to pay its bills and support the tens of millions on public assistance. Inflation increases even more and unemployment exceeds 25%. Banks and businesses fail at ever increasing rates. Nobody seems to have any money. Many are now homeless. Labor unions instigate strikes, civil unrest, and large scale riots. Government services are interrupted and unreliable. Local and national infrastructure is in decay. Violent gangs begin to appear and assert themselves. The government begins confiscation of firearms from law abiding citizens. Violence is everywhere. Cities and urban areas become very dangerous places to live.
At this stage, the country seems pretty much beyond the point of no return. However, things can still be reversed even at this stage if the right person at the top really believes in the basic fundamental concepts of Freedom, Independence, Liberty, and Individual Rights and is not afraid to do what is necessary to reverse the current trend. He will be vilified and hated because of his attitude toward personal responsibility, cutting entitlements, and ending welfare programs. Of course, if the right person were in power and did what needed to be done, none of this would have happened in the first place.
Primary Assets:
1.Gold and Silver coins
2.Cash
3.Job
4.Automobile
5.Home
6.Short term food supplies
7.Short term fuel stores
8.Firearms and ammo
9.Plans to relocate to a secluded rural hideaway
10.Small livestock - chicken, rabbit, fish...
11.A close network of like minded people
12.Survival knowledge and skills
STAGE 4. The Grab for Power
The collapse can transition to this stage at any time after Stage 3. Most of the middle class have lost everything. What used to be well manicured middle class neighborhoods are filled with the carcasses of empty houses damaged and destroyed by vandals. The nation’s infrastructure has been seriously neglected and is in need of a major overhaul. The power grid becomes unreliable. Rolling blackouts are a daily occurrence. You can no longer buy or sell gold or own foreign currency. Inflation is out of control. Now the economy collapses. There is a rush for everything and the shelves go empty in a matter of hours. Society falls into chaos. The control of urban areas shifts when violent gangs takeover control of the streets and urban neighborhoods. The government issues restrictive measures in an attempt to control the economy. Everything is in short supply and heavily rationed. Food and gasoline is very expensive and there are very long lines to get them when they are available. Affordable quality health care is non-existent and your job is a distant memory. You will do without what you are unable to provide for yourself. You will discover what it is to live in a third world country.
Primary Assets:
1.Relocation to the rural hideaway
2.Firearms and ammo
3.Long term food supplies (1 year minimum)
4.Adequate fuel stores
5.Security plan to protect the group and assets
6.Trained dog for security
7.A working knowledge of survival gardening
8.Survival knowledge and skills
Once all of the above has come to pass, the realization of the current circumstances at this moment must be all too obvious. It is too late to prepare at this point. What you did not acquire earlier, you are not going to possess now. Anything of value necessary for your survival has already been claimed. The situation gets worse… much worse.
Stage 5 is next… and it is not pretty.
STAGE 5. Freedom, Liberty, and Independence are Lost
The government implements martial law. Fighting between civilians and government forces break out nationwide. Maintaining more than a 30 day supply of food is considered hoarding food and is illegal. Severe poverty and starvation become a common sight. The government offers marginally acceptable food, water and shelter in exchange for your Freedom, Liberty, and Independence. Democracy ends and a Socialist form of government takes over under the guise of fixing society’s problems with the false promise that peace and prosperity will return better than it was just a few years ago. A Totalitarian regime assumes power and the individual freedoms and liberties once enjoyed by the people are completely eliminated.
Primary Assets:
1.Rural Hideaway
2.Security plan to protect the group and assets
3.Living below the radar in a community of like minded people
4.Firearms and the ability to use them
5.Guard dog for security
6.Survival knowledge and skills
7.A working and producing garden capable of feeding 150% of the group
8.A stable supply of clean water
9.Vegetable seeds for long term food production and barter
10.The will to live and survive in a harsh political climate
As you can see, priorities change as the world changes. Your most prized assets of today – your good credit, luxury automobile, and career are no longer important after the economy collapses.
*******
*******
Also See:
The Coming Global Collapse in 2015!
 (Part 1)
14 October 2015
and
(Part 2)
02 November 2015
and
The Coming Global Collapse in 2016!
(Part 1)
07 January 2016
and
Food Shortage, Then Anarchy!
(Part 2)
03 September 2014
and
Economic Collapse! How Did We Get Here?
(Part 2)
28 September 2013
and
Are We Facing a Global Financial Crisis?
31 May 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/05/are-we-facing-global-financial-crisis.html
and
Financial Crunch! Economic Collapse!

(Part 1)
31 July 2008
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2008/07/financial-crunch-economic-collapse.html
and
(Part 2)
20 November 2008
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2008/11/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 3)

25 January 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/01/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and

(Part 4)
17 April 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/04/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and

(Part 5)
23 June 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/06/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and

(Part 6)
23 August 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/08/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and

(Part 7)
30 November 2009
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2009/11/xxxx.html
and
(Part 8)
23 February 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/02/debt-dynamite-dominoes-coming-financial.html
and
(Part 9)
28 August 2010
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2010/08/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 10)
13 January 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/01/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 11)
29 April 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/04/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 12)
28 July 2011
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2011/07/financial-crunch-economic-collapse-part.html
and
(Part 13)
04 April 2012
(Part 15)
02 November 2012
and
(Part 16)
23 April 2015
and
Recession? ... Depression? ... What is Going On?
(Part 1)
06 October 2008
(Part 2)
02 February 2009
and
(Part 3)
19 April 2009
and
(Part 4)
02 August 2009
and
(Part 5)
17 September 2010
and
(Part 6)
17 September 2010
and
(Part 7)
23 July 2014
and
Jobs, Jobs, Where are the Jobs?
(Part 1)
20 April 2010
and
The Poor - Prosperity Creates Poverty! 
(Part 1) 
and
(Part 2)
13 November 2013
and
How Do We Eradicate Poverty?
27 November 2012
and
Financial Crisis! The Culprit? Volatility in the Bond Markets!
14 May 2015
http://arcticcompass.blogspot.ca/2015/05/financial-crisis-culprit-volatility-in.html
*******

What Free Speech?

$
0
0
*******
*******

Behind the war on free speech (left AND right) Guests Diana West, Gad Saud
Published on Apr 5, 2016
Tiffany Gabbay of TheRebel.media: The war on free speech actually started over a hundred years ago. PLUS Diana West and Gad Saad talk about how it manifests itself on the Left -- and even on the Right.
MORE: http://www.therebel.media/tiffany_gab...
*******
Majority of US college campuses becoming ‘no-free-speech’ zones - report
RT News
22 Jan, 2014
Despite the explicit protections of the First Amendment, a majority of US institutions of higher learning enforce rules that severely restrict free speech on campus, according to a new study.
According to a report by the Foundation for Individual Rights in Education (FIRE), 59 percent of US colleges and universities received a ‘red light’, meaning that the schools endorse policies that the watchdog group says impede on First Amendment rights.
A red-light institution, according to FIRE, is one that has “at least one policy both clearly and substantially restricting freedom of speech, or barring public access to its speech-related policies by requiring a university log-in and password for access.”
Out of 427 schools surveyed in the report, about one out of every six enforced “free speech zone” policies – legislation that limits student protests and other “expressive activities” to small and isolated parts of campus.
The report provided some examples of free speech policies that they say infringe on First Amendment rights. The University of Southern Mississippi, for example, requires students to hold their demonstrations in one designated ‘Speakers’ Corner’ unless they register the demonstration at least one month in advance of the event.
Longwood University in Virginia limits speeches, demonstrations and literature distribution to one location, and requires the area to be reserved five days in advance.
In addition to the 59 percent listed as restricting free speech, FIRE gave a ‘yellow light’ rating to 35.6 percent of colleges and universities because they have "policies that overregulate speech on campus."
Another method that many colleges and universities employ for impeding upon free speech is by charging demonstrating groups for the cost of providing security at such events.
The University of Oklahoma, for example, states “When the director of Student Life determines that additional security beyond that normally provided is necessary, the director of Student Life shall so inform the [Registered Student Organization]. The RSO shall be responsible for the cost of additional security.”
The FIRE report indicated that some schools impinged on free speech rights in an attempt to “stop harassment” against particular groups and organizations.
Many institutions “expand the term to prohibit broad categories of speech that do not even approach actual harassment…These vague and overly broad harassment policies deprive students and faculty of their free speech rights.”
An example is provided by way of Athens State University in Alabama, which has a long list of groups that any protesting student group must be careful not to offend or criticize.
Their policy on harassment says that “any conduct consisting of words or actions that are unwelcome or offensive to a person in relation to race, color, national origin, age, marital status, sex, sexual orientation, disability, religion, genetic information, or veteran status.”
FIRE’s Director of Policy Research Samantha Harris said in a statement, "the Department of Education needs to make clear to universities, once and for all, that prohibiting harassment does not mean restricting protected speech."
*******
Viewing all 3271 articles
Browse latest View live